diff options
Diffstat (limited to '16451.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 16451.txt | 8702 |
1 files changed, 8702 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/16451.txt b/16451.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..465f956 --- /dev/null +++ b/16451.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8702 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898, Volume +XXIII, 1629-30, by Various + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898, Volume XXIII, 1629-30 + Explorations By Early Navigators, Descriptions Of The + Islands And Their Peoples, Their History And Records Of + The Catholic Missions, As Related In Contemporaneous Books + And Manuscripts, Showing The Political, Economic, Commercial + And Religious Conditions Of Those Islands From Their + Earliest Relations With European Nations To The Close Of + The Nineteenth Century + +Author: Various + +Editor: Emma Helen Blair + +Release Date: August 6, 2005 [EBook #16451] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS *** + + + + +Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Distributed Proofreaders Team + + + + + + + + The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898 + + Explorations by early navigators, descriptions of the islands and + their peoples, their history and records of the catholic missions, + as related in contemporaneous books and manuscripts, showing the + political, economic, commercial and religious conditions of those + islands from their earliest relations with European nations to the + close of the nineteenth century, + + Volume XXIII, 1629-30 + + + + Edited and annotated by Emma Helen Blair and James Alexander Robertson + with historical introduction and additional notes by Edward Gaylord + Bourne. + + + + + + + + +CONTENTS OF VOLUME XXIII + + + Preface + Documents of 1629-30 + + Decree regarding mission appointments in the + Indias. Felipe IV; Madrid, April 6, 1629 + Letter from Manila Dominicans to Felipe + IV. Diego Duarte, and others; Manila, May 12, + 1629 + Letters to Felipe IV. Juan Nino de Tavora; + Cavite, August 1, 1629 + Relation of 1629-30. [Unsigned; Manila, July, + 1630] + Letters to Felipe IV. Juan Nino de Tavora; + Manila, July 30, and Cavite, August 4, 1630 + + History of the Augustinian order in the Filipinas Islands + (to be concluded). Juan de Medina, O.S.A.; 1630 [but printed + at Manila, 1893] + Bibliographical Data + + + + + +ILLUSTRATIONS + + + Monument in Manila to Legazpi and Urdaneta; from a photograph + in possession of the Colegio de Agustinos Filipinos, + Valladolid 125 + Map of the Marianas Islands (with large inset of the island of + Guam); photographic facsimile of Bellin's map in _Historische + Beschryving der Reizen_ (Amsterdam, 1758), xvii, p. 6; from + copy in library of Wisconsin Historical Society 135 + View of boat of the Ladrone Islands; from engraving in + _Histoire generale des voyages_ (Paris, 1753) xi, facing + p. 171; from copy in the library of Wisconsin Historical + Society 139 + Exterior of Augustinian church and convent, Manila; from + plate in possession of the Colegio de Agustinos Filipinos, + Valladolid 205 + + + + + +PREFACE + + +The present volume contains but few documents relating to current +affairs in 1629-30, the greater part of its space being occupied with +the Augustinian Medina's history of his order in the Philippines to +1630; but the annual reports of the governor present an interesting +view of the colony's affairs at that time. As usual, the colonial +treasury is but slenderly provided with the funds necessary for +carrying on the government, and Tavora proposes expedients for +obtaining these, and for utilizing hitherto neglected resources of +the country. He has to contend with hostility on the part of the +royal officials, and apathy in Mexico as to the welfare of the far +western colony dependent on it. The southern Malays are hostile, +but thus far have been held in check; and threatened hostilities +with Japan have been averted. Medina's history is of course largely +religious; but it contains considerable mention of secular events and +of social and economic conditions. The length of this work obliges +us to synopsize such matter as is of secondary importance, and to +conclude our translation of it in _Vol_. XXIV. + +A royal decree (April 6, 1629) commands the provincials of the +religious orders in the Spanish colonies to heed the rights of +the royal patronage in making or changing appointments to mission +posts. The leading Dominican officials in Manila write (May 12, +1629) to the king, informing him that the country is in a ruinous +condition from the piracies of the Dutch, which have also broken +up the trade of the islands. They ask certain favors from the king, +and are sending an envoy to Madrid to discuss their affairs with him. + +The annual reports of Governor Tavora (dated August 1, 1629) include +many important matters. As usual, he is embarrassed by lack of funds; +little has been received from Nueva Espana, and the revenues of +the islands are greatly diminished by the decline in trade. He +is endeavoring to secure what cloves he can from the Moluccas, +and advises that this product be bartered in India, on the royal +account, for supplies needed for the royal magazines in Manila, +which can be done on highly profitable terms. Tavora minimizes the +possible danger to these cargoes from the Dutch enemy at Singapore, +and asks that he be allowed to send cloves thus to India, at such +times as he can collect a sufficient quantity for this purpose; +and that in this matter the treasury officials be not allowed to +interfere. He also proposes that the rations of rice allotted by +the government to its workmen be provided by letting Chinese farmers +cultivate certain unused crown lands; he has even begun to plan for +this undertaking. Tavora recounts certain difficulties that he has +experienced in dealing with the treasury officials at Manila, and asks +for the royal decision. In this connection, he remarks: "The offices +in the Yndias are not worth anything unless one steals." To this letter +are appended the decisions made by the royal fiscal in Spain. He refers +to the royal councils the proposal to trade cloves in India; approves +the farming of crown lands, but is uncertain whether the Mexican +treasury can provide the additional contribution thus made necessary; +advises thorough inspection of the accounts of the probate treasury, +and strict prohibition of the use of those funds by the governors; +objects to accepting pay-warrants in place of cash; and states that +the removal of minor officials in the treasury, and the fees paid to +them, are matters which should be investigated. A later opinion by +the fiscal is to the effect that those minor officials be removed and +appointed, as hitherto, by the treasury officials, not by the governor. + +Another letter from Tavora, of the same date, deals with various +matters of administration, relations with other nations, etc. He +again deplores the late arrival of the ships from Nueva Espana, +and urges that they he sent thence earlier in the season. He has +not waited for them in sending the vessels to Acapulco; and the +latter carry but small cargoes, owing to the unusual lack of Chinese +goods in Manila this year. The citizens desire to send a committee of +their number to Mexico to conduct their trade, in order to thwart the +supposed unfriendly schemes of the Mexican merchants; but the governor +deprecates this proceeding, as dangerous to the best interests of the +islands. It is favored by an old royal decree, which he is putting +into execution; but he considers this so inexpedient that he asks +the royal Council to decide the case. He deprecates the forced loans +that the governors make from the inhabitants, and urges that this be +prevented by having more aid sent from Nueva Espana. The governor is +endeavoring to have ships built in India, Camboja, and Cochinchina, +to relieve the islands from this burden; he has a prospect of success +in these efforts. The king of Siam who withheld the property of +Spaniards is dead; and his son, in fear of Spanish arms, seeks +friendly relations with Manila. Tavora has endeavored to restore +trade with Japan, and has sent an embassy thither to make amends for +burning the Japanese junk off Siam. Regarding that affair, a sharp +controversy has arisen between Manila and Macan, which is referred +to the home government. Don Fernando de Silva has left the islands, +not without certain difficulties concerning bonds for his residencia, +involving the governor's right of jurisdiction--which Tavora settles +by the decision of common sense. The bridge across the Pasig is nearly +completed, and the cost of it has been met from the general fund of the +Chinese residents, as has also the support of the hospital for their +use. On the arrival of the ships from Nueva Espana, the governor is +disappointed at receiving so little from the viceroy, and implores +the king for more reliable and permanent aid for the islands. He is +sending artillery to Mexico. To this letter are appended a report of +proceedings in the council convened to discuss relations with Japan, +and various official acts regarding Fernando de Silva's departure +from the islands. + +The Jesuit annalist for 1629-30 relates various affairs of war. An +expedition is sent against Jolo; but, their commander being wounded in +an attack, the Spaniards are seized with a panic, and retreat without +accomplishing much. The Malays of Achen attack Malacca, and besiege it +during four months; then help arrives opportunely, in an expedition +headed by the viceroy of India. The enemy are finally defeated, with +loss of all their ships and artillery, and practically all their +men killed or captured. Soon afterward the viceroy is accidentally +drowned, which puts an end to his plans of conquest. The missionaries +in Cochinchina are persecuted by superstitious natives. + +The more important events in the colony's affairs for 1630 are related +in Tavora's letters (July 30 and August 4). The Japanese are still +angry at the burning of their junk by the Spaniards, and talk of +attacking the latter in both Formosa and Luzon; accordingly, Tavora +has greatly strengthened the fortifications of Manila. He has sent +the usual relief to Ternate, but finds hostile Dutch ships there, +and more reported as not far away. He mentions the siege of Malaca, +and other exploits of the Portuguese; also the unsuccessful expedition +to Jolo. Affairs in Cagayan are improving, and more of the revolted +Indians are being subdued. In the second letter Tavora recounts his +difficulties with the auditors, who are sending secret despatches to +Spain, commanding the royal officials to pay their salaries regardless +of the governor's orders, endeavoring to rule the Chinese, interfering +in matters which do not concern them, and complaining against the +governor's acts and plans. Tavora recounts these matters in detail, +defending himself against the accusations made by the auditors, and +stating his services to the crown. At the end, he asks permission to +resign his post as governor. + +The _Historia_ of Fray Juan de Medina, O.S.A., was written in 1630, +but printed at Manila in 1893. He records the history of his order +in the Philippines up to 1630, adding much interesting information +regarding secular affairs and the condition of the islands and their +people. He begins with a resume of the discovery and early history +of the archipelago--in the former of which, it will he remembered, +the Augustinian Urdaneta was so prominent. Legazpi's voyage, and his +encounters with the natives, are related at length. Medina describes +the island of Cebu (where the Spaniards first halted), and its +economic and religious condition at the time of his writing. He adds +some information regarding Panay, Negros, and other adjacent islands; +then, resuming his narration, describes the founding by Legazpi of a +city in Cebu, and the purification of the natives. This is at first a +most difficult and vexatious matter, as the natives are faithless to +their promises; but they are finally won over by a chief whose wife, +captured by the Spaniards, is well treated and restored to him. In the +midst of this account Medina injects another, relating how Urdaneta, +sent home by Legazpi with despatches, discovers the return route from +the Philippines to Nueva Espana; and recounting subsequent events +in the lives of Urdaneta and his companion Aguirre. Friendship with +the natives of Cebu having been established, the Augustinians there +begin to labor in the conversion of the Indians, and a considerable +number of baptisms are conferred. The infant colony is attacked +(at the instigation of the devil) by the Portuguese, but they are +obliged to depart without harming it. The missions thrive apace, +and extend to neighboring islands; and Fray Diego de Herrera goes to +Spain to obtain more laborers for this so promising field. Returning, +he brings tokens of the royal favor to both the missionaries and +Legazpi. That officer concludes to remove his seat of government +to Luzon, especially to secure the valuable Chinese trade, of which +Medina gives some account--not failing to reiterate the stereotyped +complaint that all the silver is being carried to China. + +Medina describes with enthusiasm the magnificent bay of Manila, where +the Spaniards enter Luzon; and relates the dealings of the invaders +with the Moros, who are, as usual, perfidious and unreliable. After +a time, however, they are reduced to obedience, largely through the +efforts of the religious who accompany Legazpi. The Augustinians +have a large and handsome convent in Manila, which is described. The +organization of their province of Filipinas is accomplished _pro +tempore_ in 1572, and Diego de Herrera is sent to Spain to secure +their independence and procure more missionaries. + +Medina recounts the convents and churches founded in succession by +his order, with some account of the lakes Bombon and Bay, and of the +communities about them. Speaking of the hospitals, he highly commends +the Franciscans who have them in charge. He describes the region +watered by the Pasig River, and the Augustinian convents therein; +and continues his account, in like manner, for Panay and the other +islands in which that order has its missions--throughout furnishing +much valuable, although desultory, information regarding social and +economic conditions. + +Recurring to affairs at Manila, he recounts the beginning and growth +of the Chinese trade there, and the unsuccessful attempts of the +early Augustinians to open a mission in China. Legazpi's death +(1572) is a grief and loss to that order. The people of Mindoro, +hearing of Limahon's attack on Manila, rebel, and threaten to kill +the missionaries there; but afterward they release the fathers. The +Moros at Manila also revolt, but are finally pacified. + +Various new Augustinians arrive at Manila in 1574 and 1575; but a +great loss befalls them in the following year, in the death of Fray +Diego de Herrera and ten missionaries whom he was bringing to the +islands, their ship being wrecked when near Manila. The Augustinians, +seeing their inability to cultivate so great a mission-field, +invite other orders to come to their aid. Accordingly, the discalced +Franciscans arrive in the islands in 1577, the Jesuits in 1580, +the Dominicans in 1581. Medina enumerates the missions and colleges +conducted by the latter orders, at the same time warmly commending +their educational work and their pious zeal. The Dominicans are in +charge of the Sangleys, of whose sharp dealings with the Spaniards +Medina complains. Among the mission-fields ceded to the Dominicans +by the Augustinians are the provinces of Pangasinan and Cagayan; +in the latter, the natives frequently revolt against the Spaniards. + +Medina extols the magnificence of the churches in Manila, and the +liberality displayed by the faithful in adorning them. This is noted +by foreigners who come to the city, notably the Japanese. The converts +of that nation have witnessed nobly their zeal and holy devotion, for +more than nine hundred have been martyred in Japan for the truth. In +1575, two Augustinians go to China with letters from the governor of +the Philippines, hoping to begin a mission in that country. In this +attempt they are not successful, but they return with much information +regarding China, which until then had been mainly a _terra incognita_. + +The city of Manila has made steady progress, and the religious orders +are erecting stone buildings for their convents. At first, they had +built their houses of wood, in the native style, which is described +by our writer. Many houses, both within and without the city, are +now built of stone; but the health of the city is not as good as when +the people lived in wooden houses. + +In 1578 Fray Agustin de Alburquerque is elected provincial, and +at once begins to extend the missions of his order--especially in +Pampanga, of which province some description is given. This province, +once so populous, has lost many of its men by conscription for the +Spanish forts, being sent away even to Maluco. It is often raided +by the head-hunting tribes of the interior--something which cannot +be checked, especially on account of the heedlessness and lack +of foresight inherent in the character of the Indians. They are +lazy, deficient in public spirit, and have no initiative; what they +accomplish is only under the vigilance and urging of the missionary +or the alcalde-mayor. The Panay convent is near the Spanish fort +at Arevalo, and the fathers have the privilege of treatment by the +surgeon there--"who, without being able to distinguish his right hand, +bleeds and purges, so that in a brief time the sick man is laid in +his grave." The creoles of Nueva Espana die early, and "do not reach +their majority." + +In 1581, Fray Andres de Aguirre is elected provincial of Filipinas: +his many virtues and achievements are extolled by our writer. Medina +here takes occasion to advocate the policy of gathering the Indians +into reductions and there teaching them the civilized ways of +Europeans. He makes interesting observations on the character +and temperament of the natives; and complains of the opposition +encountered by the missionaries from the Spaniards, "by whose +hands the devil wages warfare against the ministry; consequently +the religious tire themselves out, and the devil reaps what harvest +he wills." But the Spaniards oppress the Indians; and, "if it were +not for the protection of the religious, there would not now be an +Indian, or any settlement." Moreover, it is the religious who are +taming those wild peoples, and reducing them to subjection to the +Spanish crown. All these points are illustrated by anecdotes and +citations from actual experience. Under Aguirre's rule as provincial, +some extensions of missions are made. Among these is Bantayan--since +that time abandoned by the Augustinians, as Medina records, and almost +depopulated by the raids of Moro pirates. An attempt is made to remove +its inhabitants to settlements in Cebu Island; but they refuse to +leave their homes. Medina recounts numerous instances of cruel and +oppressive treatment of the Indians by the Spaniards, and of insolence +and opposition on the part of the latter to the missionaries and their +work. With this, he also urges that the religious be allowed to inflict +punishments upon the natives, when the latter are disobedient or commit +misdeeds. In this argument Medina makes a curious admission, especially +as he writes after missionaries had labored sixty-five years in the +islands--saying of the Indians: "For they detest, as a rule, church +matters--to such an extent, that they would even pay two tributes to +be free from the church. They love their old beliefs and revelries +so strongly that they would lose their souls for them. Without any +fear, how would they attend to their duties?" The missionaries also +desire to break up the native habits of sloth and vagabondage, by +compelling the Indians to live in villages; but many Spaniards oppose +this policy. Medina recounts the difficulties between the friars and +the ecclesiastical authorities, in Bishop Salazar's time, regarding +the religious jurisdiction of the former. + +Further extension of missions is made during the provincialate of +Fray Diego de Alvarez (elected in 1584). Each district in which a +mission is introduced or enlarged is described by our writer, who adds +many pertinent and interesting observations on the natives and their +character, their relations with the Spaniards, the affairs of his +order, the progress of the colony, the products of the country, etc. + +_The Editors_ + +December, 1904. + + + + + +DOCUMENTS OF 1629-1630 + + + Decree regarding mission appointments in the Indias. Felipe + IV; April 6, 1629. + Letter from Manila Dominicans to Felipe IV. Diego Duarte, + and others; May 12, 1629. + Letters to Felipe IV. Juan Nino de Tavora; August 1, 1629. + Relation of 1629-30. [Unsigned; July, 1630.] + Letters to Felipe IV. Juan Nino de Tavora; July 30 and August + 4, 1630. + + +_Sources_: Of these documents, the first is obtained from Pastells's +edition of Colin's _Labor evangelica_, iii, p. 686; the fourth, +from the Ventura del Arco MSS. (Ayer library), i, pp. 617-625; and +the remainder from MSS. in the Archivo general de Indias, Sevilla. + +_Translations_: All these documents are translated by James +A. Robertson. + + + + + +Decree Regarding Mission Appointments in the Indias + + +The King. Inasmuch as I have been informed that--notwithstanding that +it has been ruled and decreed, in virtue of the prerogative of my royal +patronage, that the provincials of the orders in my Western Indias, +whenever they have to propose any religious for the instruction or for +the administration of sacraments, or to remove him who should have +been appointed, shall give notice thereof to my viceroy, president, +Audiencia, or governor, who should have charge of the superior +government of the province, and to the bishop; and that he who may +have been already appointed be not removed until another has been +appointed in his place--for some time past, the said provincials have +been introducing the custom of dismissing and removing the religious +teacher who is stationed at any mission, and appointing another in his +place, solely on their own authority, without giving notice to the said +viceroy, or the persons above mentioned, as they have done on various +occasions. They also claim that if a religious is once approved by the +bishop for a mission, he needs no further approbation for any other +mission to which his provincial may transfer him. If the archbishops +or bishops of the diocese where such a thing occurs try to hinder it, +the provincials base various lawsuits upon that point, whence follow +many injurious and troublesome results. In order to obviate these, +the matter having been discussed and considered by the members of +my Council of the Indias, with their assent and advice I have deemed +it advisable to ordain and order--as by the present I do ordain and +order--that now and henceforth, in regard to the said provincials +removing and appointing the religious of the said missions, they shall +observe and obey what is ordained on that head by the said my royal +patronage, according to what is mentioned in this my decree. They +shall not violate or disobey it in any way; and in addition to it, +whenever they shall have to appoint any religious to the said missions +in their charge--whether because of the promotion of him who serves it, +or by his death, or for any other reason--they shall nominate from +among their religious those who shall appear most suitable for such +mission, upon which their consciences are charged. This nomination +shall be presented before my viceroy, president, or governor (or to +the person who shall exercise the superior government, in my name, of +the province where such mission shall be located), so that from the +three nominated he may select one. This choice shall be sent to the +archbishop or bishop of that diocese, so that the said archbishop or +bishop may make the provision, collation, and canonical institution +of such mission, in accordance with the choice and by virtue of such +presentation. In regard to the pretension made by the said provincials, +namely, that if a religious be once approved for a mission, it must +be understood that that approbation is to answer for all the other +missions to which he may be appointed, I consider it advisable to +declare--as I declare and order by the present--that the religious who +shall have once been examined and approved by the bishop for a mission, +remain examined and approved for all the other missions of the same +language to which he shall be appointed afterward. But if the mission +for which his provincial shall present him be of a different language, +he must be examined and approved anew in it; and, until he shall be +examined and approved, he cannot serve in the mission. I order my +viceroys, presidents, and governors of each and every part of the said +my Indias, on whom falls the execution of the said royal patronage; +and I request and charge the very reverend and the reverend fathers +in Christ, the archbishops and bishops of the Indias--each one of +them in what concerns him--to observe and obey this my decree, and +its contents, exactly and punctually, without permitting or allowing +anything to be done contrary to or in violation of its contents, in +any manner; and that they give notice to all the provincials of the +said orders of this ordinance, so that they may observe it. Given in +Madrid, April six, one thousand six hundred and twenty-nine. + +_I the King_ + +By order of the king our sovereign: + +_Don Fernando Ruiz de Contreras_ + + + +Letter from Manila Dominicans to Felipe IV + + +Sire: + +Responding to our obligation, as religious of St. Dominic our father, +and as vassals of your Majesty, to advise you of the condition of the +lands of your seigniory, where we now reside in this country of the +Philipinas and the city of Manila (where we are at present assembled +in our provincial chapter and definitory), we say that this land +is greatly afflicted because these seas are so infested with the +Dutch. The trade with neighboring nations, which was formerly rich +and supported this country, has lost its power. The result of the +Dutch attacks is, that your vassals here have no sea forces, and but +few for land; and those are widely scattered in various presidios of +little importance, that serve no good purpose and cause very great +expense to your royal treasury. At those presidios the soldiers die +in great numbers from the unhealthful climate, insufficient and poor +food, and their own inactivity and vicious lives. We believe that a +small fleet for the sea could be maintained at a much smaller cost; +that will sweep it of enemies, will keep the soldiers contented +and in sufficient numbers (and if they are killed, it will be while +performing their duty, and not for the above reasons); trade would +return to its former condition, and all the injuries that daily befall +this wretched country would cease. + +Concerning the condition of our holy order, your officials will +tell your Majesty, for they ought to inform you of everything that +happens here. And although they are, as a rule, not very friendly to +us, because our order is a friend to truth, we leave information of +our affairs to be given through their statements. The report of our +poverty will be given to your Majesty by our religious procurator +of the province, who is at that court. We beseech your Majesty to +hear, believe, and protect him, and despatch his affairs. The royal +officials of Mexico, on account of the expense of these islands, +which is made up from the treasury under their charge, send annually +to our order, at the cost of your royal revenues, flour for the host, +and two arrobas of wine for each priest, with orders that one and +one-half arrobas are to be given here to each one, because of the +waste on the voyage. Since we do not even see any dust from the flour, +nor more than one arroba of the wine, in order to celebrate mass for +a whole year, on account of which mass cannot be said, even on days +of obligation, it is sufficient to propose it in this way, in order +that we may expect the remedy as sure to follow from your Majesty, +whose royal person may our Lord preserve for many years, as we all +your vassals find necessary. From the city of Manila in the Filipinas +Islands, May twelve, one thousand six hundred and twenty-nine. Your +Majesty's servants and chaplains, + + +_Fray Diego Duarte_, definitor. +_Fray Joan Luis de Gueti_, definitor. +_Fray Gaspar Cassablanca_, definitor. +_Fray Pedro Martin de Lucenilla_, definitor. + + +[A copy of the last portion of the above letter regarding the flour +and wine sent from Mexico follows, and is commented upon thus: "Decree +of the Council. Referred to the fiscal, November 8, 1630." "The fiscal +says that what is requested by this portion of the letter appears very +just and advisable; and it will be right and expedient to give strict +orders to the governor of Philipinas to be very careful to relieve +these necessities, and not to allow them to be again represented to +the Council. Madrid, February 8, 1631."] + + + + +Letters to Felipe IV from Governor Tavora + + + +Treasury Matters + +Sire: + +The officials of the royal treasury will give your Majesty a detailed +account of the condition of your treasury in these islands--which +beyond all doubt is very pitiable, because of the smallness of the +relief that has come these last few years from Nueva Espana, and the +little profit that the islands themselves have produced, because of +the great decrease in commerce. That obliges me to see what measures +will be advisable to increase the revenues and decrease the expenses +of this royal treasury. The other day, I proposed in a meeting of +the treasury, of which I send a copy, what will be seen in that +copy--for whose better understanding, and so that the advisability +of the proposition may be seen in your royal Council, I thought it +fitting to write this section. + + + +_First point of the letter_ + + +Your Majesty has ordered by many decrees that we try to obtain +cloves, from our present possessions in the Malucas, and that they +be cultivated for your royal treasury. In accordance with that +command--although your Majesty's purpose had not been realized +hitherto, either because the governors my predecessors were unable +(which is the most certain thing), or they did not always have the +cloves in the quantities necessary, or because of the corrupt agents +who have been occupied in that business--I have now forty-five bars +[_i.e.,_ bahars] of cloves stored in the magazines; and I judge +that an average of fifty bars per year (rather more than less) +could be obtained without much difficulty. Considering the question +of the cultivation and investment of that quantity, I think that by +no other route can this be better accomplished, or with more gain to +your royal treasury, than by way of Yndia. I base my assertion on the +following argument. Fifty bars of cloves are worth four thousand pesos +in Maluco. If they are traded for clothing such as the Moros wear, +the cost will be one-half less. The carriage from Maluco to Manila +is nothing, for they will be brought in the ships of the usual relief +expedition to those forts. The fifty bars, delivered in this city, are +worth already at least ten thousand pesos. Once laden for India, and +carried at your Majesty's account in your own ship, they will be worth +thirty-five thousand pesos and more when delivered in Goa or Cochin, +as is affirmed by men experienced in this kind of merchandise. Your +Majesty needs many things in your royal magazines which are brought +from the above-named cities, such as saltpetre, iron, anchors, slaves +for the galleys, arms, biscuits, _cayro_, white cloth, and wearing +apparel for convicts. Those articles are bought every year in Manila +from merchants of Yndia, at excessive rates. The thirty-five thousand +pesos resulting from the cloves having been invested, then, in those +articles at Goa or Cochin, and having been brought to Manila on your +Majesty's account and investment, will be worth at the figures now +paid for the said articles, ninety or one hundred thousand pesos. And +even if all this did not rise to so high prices, I am sure that fifty +thousand pesos (which is one-half less than one might consider them +to be worth) will be the return in products to these magazines from +the fifty bars, which will cost four thousand pesos in money at first +cost, as I have said--and if they be bought for the peculiar cloth +of Yndia, two thousand pesos. That would be a very considerable gain +and relief to the royal treasury. [1] [_In the margin_: "Consult with +his Majesty as to what the governor proposes; and say that it has +been judged best, before advising what we think of it, to refer the +matter to his Majesty, so that he may order the council of Portugal +to state their opinion regarding the matter. Having examined it from +all points of view, an opinion will be given."] [2] + +The expenses of that voyage will not amount to much, considering +the profit and gain. The expenses for this gain are as follows: +One ship or patache of one hundred and fifty Castilian toneladas, +which, if built in these islands, will cost, when ready to sail, +ten or twelve thousand pesos; eight pieces of bronze artillery, +using balls of twelve and eight libras, which will be worth five +thousand pesos; twenty-five sailors and a like number of musketeers, +with six artillery-men, taken from those who receive the usual pay of +this camp and beach--all married men and under such obligations that +they cannot remain in Yndia, and who when embarked will only receive +an increase in their rations of biscuit, meat, and fish, and some +native wine, all of which amounts to but little; one captain for the +management of the vessel, and master, pilots, boatswains, keeper of +the arms [_guardian_], and steward--who are the officers to whom pay +is assigned. The above, with all the other purchase expenses which I +have given above for this ship, will not amount for the first time to +twenty thousand pesos, together with the four thousand for the value +of the cloves, the total amounting to twenty-four thousand, more or +less. By this method, the so great profits for this treasury will +be made, as above stated--adding the sum received from the freight +charges for goods belonging to private persons, which can be brought +and carried by this ship, and the register and the duties on them, +which will here amount to considerable, and will prove of great relief +for the said expenses. + +The danger of this voyage is that of meeting the Dutch at the passage +through the strait of Sincapura, near Malaca, which every year the +Dutch inhabitants of Jacatra belonging to the Company [3] close up, +and with a ship or two of little strength, or a couple of pataches, +await the Portuguese galliots that sail from Macan to Yndia, and from +Yndia to this city. The enemy knows very well that the Portuguese +do not carry force enough to fight, and that on seeing the Dutch +they run ashore and place their persons in safety with their gold, +which is the form in which they chiefly invest their wealth. The +ship which would sail from here would enter by a different channel +than do the Portuguese, as the strait has three entrances. Our ship +will be a swifter one, and will sail better against the wind; and a +Dutch ship will not be able to catch it in two rosaries, and their +pataches will not dare to grapple it because of the defense which +they will encounter. Thus by fighting, without losing their route, +the ship, will reach Malaca, and will make its voyage. On its return, +it will stop first at Malaca, where it will hear news of the enemy. In +case they find that the enemy are in the pass, they can wait in those +forts until the former have retired to their own fort at Jacatra. + +Thus far, I have mentioned all the advantages, expenses, and +dangers. What still remains is to petition your Majesty to be pleased +to have this matter considered; and if it appear advisable, to order +that this voyage be made every year or every two years, as the governor +shall deem best, and according to the quantity of cloves on hand and +the opportunity offered by the weather. I petition that there shall +be, in this regard, no opposition from the treasury council, in which, +I have understood, your Majesty has ordered that the governor concur +in the opinion of the majority. That may prove, in this country, +to be a source of considerable trouble; for it might some day happen +that an expedition would be determined to be necessary, in a council +of war, and that the majority of the votes of the treasury council in +which the expenses are voted may not concur, either through want of +capacity in the officials, or through an excess of passion and private +interest--and, in a land so remote, experience teaches that there +are many such. In the report of the meeting that I enclose herewith, +in regard to the above matter of the cloves, I guessed what were the +majority of the opinions beforehand. Doctor Don Albaro de Mesa y Lugo, +neutral or indecisive as he is on all questions of any importance +or difficulty, and especially on those regarding revenue, for fear +lest the auditors be obliged to pay. Licentiate Geronimo de Legaspi, +senior auditor at the time of the council, not satisfied because I have +employed his elder son in a company, tried to have a place given to the +second son also, in another one. Because what he asked was not done, +although I desired to please him, he was displeased. The accountant, +Marten Ruiz de Salazar, has for a long time been offended, because +he was not allowed to take fees from the clerks of the accountancy, +and to exercise absolute authority over accepting and dismissing +them, as in the present case. Hence my proposition was disliked by +them both. Thus may your Majesty see carried out in this case the +same motive that I stated for all the others--namely, that they do +not vote without self-interest or passion. He to whom your Majesty +can and ought to trust most is the person to whom all the government +shall have been charged; and he should be given authority so that +he may, after having heard the opinions of the treasury council, +concur with the party which may seem to him more judicious, even +though it be not the one with the more votes. [_In the margin_: +"Have the fiscal see this again." "The fiscal declares that the form +is laid down by the decrees and ordinances which treat of it, and he +thinks it undesirable to make any innovation. For even though there +happen to be some officials, of those who take part in those meetings, +who are such as here described, it might also happen that there would +be rash governors who might act inconsiderately, and only through +self-will or caprice, and cause great and excessive expenses of the +royal revenues. Consequently, it is preferable that action be taken +by many votes, since in justifiable and even in doubtful cases the +preference of him who governs or presides is always followed. Madrid, +July 11, 1631." "Let the ordinance be kept."] + +In case that your Majesty consider it fitting to have this voyage +made in the aforesaid manner, it will be necessary for the decrees to +come in duplicate for the viceroy of Yndia, so that he may grant free +passage for this ship, and that he may give without any opposition the +wares that will have to be bought on your Majesty's account; and so +that no duties be imposed in Goa, Malaca, or any other part of Yndia, +on what may be registered in your Majesty's name. Order must also be +sent to Cochin, so that if any ship should have to be built there +(as the ships cost less there, and last longer than those of these +islands) all assistance and favor may be extended. + + + +_Point 2 of the letter_ + + +The second point discussed in the council is also essential; and if it +be carried out, it will be the greatest relief to the islands, and will +result in great saving for your Majesty. In the rations of rice (which +is the bread of this country) which are furnished in Cavite and other +parts, more than fifty thousand fanegas are consumed annually. This is +imposed on the Indian natives by assessment or allotment, [4] and is +paid at the rate of a peso per fanega. For the last three years the +Chinese, both infidels and Christians, have devoted their efforts +to sowing rice. Consequently, the country has been well supplied, +as the Chinese are better farmers than the Indians. Many citizens +and the convents of the religious orders have given them the loan +of lands and twenty-five pesos per head, so that they might settle +and equip themselves with the necessary implements for farming the +land. The first year the Chinaman pays this sum, and the following +years gives for every hundred brazas of land fifteen or twenty pesos +rent, which is a like number of fanegas of rice. It has seemed to me +expedient that in certain uncultivated lands that rightly remain in +the name of your Majesty in the best region and lands of the islands +(which is near here, in La Laguna de [Bay], five leguas up the river +from Manila), two pieces of land should be appropriated [for this +purpose]. I am assured that these will be sufficient so that two +thousand Sangleys can be established on them; and that your Majesty +will make the profit which the inhabitants and the religious make, +since you can do so with greater advantage and protection to the +farmers than private persons can give. I am also assured that a very +productive agricultural estate can be made, by managing to obtain +from it the cost in one or two years. For the rest of the time the +rent is left free [from debt or other obligation]. For two thousand +Sangleys that will amount to forty thousand fanegas of rice; and, +as it increases with time, it will amount to fifty thousand. That is +as much as these magazines need. [_In the margin_: "Let us be informed +whether any of the expenses of those islands have been reduced." "Bring +the memorandum of the reduction that was made in the year 618."] + +The gain that will accrue to your Majesty from that will be to relieve +your Majesty from the expense of fifty thousand pesos, and the Indian +natives from the assessment and allotment of fifty thousand fanegas, +which, as aforesaid, is the greatest relief for the islands, and for +this royal treasury. The risk that will be run of the money that will +be advanced to the Chinese so that they may settle and equip their +farms (in which, although it is given with confidence, there is, +of course, always some risk that some will run away and others will +die), will all, however, be of little importance, in view of the +profits that are seen to result in the estates which the religious +and inhabitants are equipping. + +It would be advisable for your Majesty to decree this to be carried out +without any opposition; and that you order the viceroy of Nueva Espana, +in order to facilitate it, to send five thousand pesos separately, and +in addition [to the usual situado] in order that I may continue with +capital what has been begun without it and (with what I have lent to +the treasury from my own funds) make the experiment and take possession +of the lands, ordering wheat to be sowed in a portion of them. I am +told that it has been shown by experience that wheat bears well. This +undertaking can not be accomplished in one or two years. Your Majesty +holds these islands for many years through the Divine favor, and your +successors as long as the world shall last. Consequently, the future +must be considered, in order that these lands may not remain behind; +but if this be done in all parts, in what pertains to your Majesty's +revenues, the treasury will not remain in so backward a condition as +at present. + + + +_Third point of the letter_ + + +Your Majesty's royal treasury owes to that of the goods of deceased +persons more than forty thousand pesos, as appears from the memorandum +and certification which I enclose herewith. For since the relief which +is sent from Nueva Espana is so meager, and the expenses here are so +great, the governors my predecessors were obliged to take, by way of +loan, all that sum on different occasions. For the same reason I have +not been able during my term, to repay it, nor do I hope to be able +to do so, unless your Majesty order that sum to be sent from or paid +in Nueva Espana on a separate account, in consideration of the fact +that it is property of parties who are suffering, and, most of all, the +goods of deceased persons. I give this information to your Majesty, as +to the master and sovereign of it, and for the relief of my conscience. + + + +_Fourth point of the letter_ + + +The office of the notary of government and war which became +vacant by the death of Captain Pedro Alvarez, was put at auction +and adjudged to the heaviest bidder, who was Pedro de Heredia, +governor of Terrenate. He bought it and placed it under charge of +one of his sons. It was knocked down for the value of fifty-four +thousand pesos--ten thousand to be paid on the spot, in reals, +another ten thousand from his pay, and the thirty-four thousand +remaining in the pay-warrants of various persons. It seems to have +been a sale of importance for the services of your Majesty. And in +order to avoid the suits which the secretaries of government have +had with the governors my predecessors, as to whether that office +should include the secretaryship of the permits to the Sangleys and +the inspection of the Chinese ships (which are special commissions +of the governor), and in order to avoid suits with my successors, +I ordered that in the sale of that office it be made a condition that +no more than the office of government secretary be sold; and that this +was understood to be only what the governor should sign in writing; +for in the commissions that the latter should give for those permits +the secretary of the government was not to act as secretary. [_In +the margin_: "As the fiscal says."] + +The above is what occurs to me in regard to the increase and efficient +administration of your royal treasury. I shall now declare my opinion +regarding two differences of justice or jurisdiction that have arisen +with the royal officials. + + + +_Fifth point of this letter_ + + +They formerly proposed the clerks whom they employed in their +offices, so that the governor should appoint them at the pay that +was assigned. In consequence of that power that they possessed, the +accountant tried to take it upon himself to dismiss a clerk without any +agreement with his associates, or the consent of the government. In +fact, he abolished the position. I was informed that it was not for +incompetency, or for any failure of which the clerk had been guilty +in his office, but only for the accountant's own private reasons. He +was ordered to return the man to his place, and to have him serve as +before. The accountant alleged with too unmeasured language that he +and his associates had the authority to dismiss the clerks, since they +were the ones who proposed them. I was advised that it would be better +government, in order to avoid the consequences, for the royal officials +not to propose the clerks whom they had to employ in their offices, +except in the memorial of the person who enters it, petitioning that +they give information of his competency. Accordingly, I so provided; +and therefore, so long as the clerks give satisfaction, it must not be +understood that the royal officials can dismiss them without having +information of demerits understood by the government--which is the +agency to dismiss such men, as it was the one to hire them. [_In the +margin_: "Ascertain what the royal officials write; and, if they have +not written, let them report." "Search was made, and all the papers +on the matter collected, together with those sections and letters +which the royal officials have written."] + + + +[_Sixth point of this letter_] + + +The accountant has also claimed the right to collect certain fees +which this royal Audiencia assigned some years ago, by a sentence of +examination and review, as a tariff to the clerks of the accountancy, +the factor's office, and the treasury. The accountant lately renewed +the suit, and declared in this Audiencia the one which I have resolved +to send to your royal Council with the evidence. The matter is one of +moment, for the clerks who serve carry the weight of the work of the +accountancy; and as they cannot be maintained with the fees of the +tariff, they charge additional fees, which parties give them in order +to facilitate their business. Nor is it possible for the governors to +avoid that; for it is a matter of importance to the parties themselves +to conceal it, for the sake of their business. If the accountant tries +to take those fees from them, the clerks will have a much greater +reason to accept bribes; else they will not expedite the business, +or reduce the great volume of accounts and business that are pending +in this accountancy. Even the commencement of this suit has caused +great trouble, and the clerks have been much disturbed by it. Will +your Majesty be pleased to order the suit to be concluded, and the +decision that is most expedient to be made. [_In the margin_: "Look up +the papers regarding this matter; let it be as the fiscal says." "These +sections were collected with the papers which treat of this matter."] + +What is to be said is that the accountant and treasurer are very poor; +and that the offices in the Yndias are not worth anything unless one +steals, and they do not do that. The expenses of their households and +families have been excessive in this city for some little time past, +and consequently, those ministers cannot live decently on their pay. If +there is any means to increase it, will your Majesty order that inquiry +be made in what way this can be done without the royal officials taking +away the perquisites from their clerks. May God preserve the Catholic +royal person of your Majesty, as is necessary to Christendom. Cavite, +August first, 1629. Sire, your Majesty's humble vassal, + + +_Don Juan Nino de Tavora_ + + + +[_Addressed_: "To his Majesty. Cavite, 1629."] [_Endorsed_: "Governor +Don Juan Nino de Tavora. Treasury. Seen and decreed in the margin, +July 11. Take it to the fiscal. In the Council, November 23, 630."] + + + +[_The findings of the fiscal_] + + +1. The fiscal says that he has read this letter. In regard to the +first point, concerning the ship which is to take the cloves, he +thinks that if affairs move with the security and ease which the +governor ascribes to them, the profit is a matter of considerable +moment, and that the governor should be ordered to undertake it. But, +inasmuch as many things enter into that question which pertain to the +Council of War, he requests that the matter be examined and discussed +by them before any resolution be taken. He also thinks that it will +be necessary that a copy of what concerns the Council of Portugal be +given that body, on account of the relations which the execution of +this measure have and may have with Goa, Malaca, and other points of +Eastern Yndia which fall within the demarcation of the said Council. + +2. In regard to the second point, concerning the cultivation of the +land, he thinks that it ought to be accepted; for the amount of money +risked is little, and will be spent to establish a known gain. He only +stops to consider that, in order to carry out this measure and the +preceding one, the governor requests further increase in the situado +which is generally given from Mexico to those islands; and he does +not know whether the royal treasury of that city is at present able +to furnish that increase, because of the loss which his Majesty's +incomes have sustained from the inundation [5] and other troubles +which have come upon them, and the heavy burdens of the said treasury. + +3. In regard to the third point, concerning what is owed to the fund +of the goods of deceased persons--a sum which exceeds forty thousand +pesos, because the governors have used it on various urgent occasions +that have arisen and have not repaid it--the fiscal recognizes how +just it is that an effort be made to repay and satisfy those funds, +but he finds this unadvisable at present for the royal treasury; +for it is first necessary to liquidate the accounts and investigate +how all that sum was spent, and whether it could have been avoided, +and why the governors have not always made it up from the situado +which has been sent to them all these years. That must depend on the +investigation which shall be made in the inspection which has been +ordered to be made of the governors, auditors, treasuries, and royal +officials of those islands. This point must be set down in writing, +as it is so essential, so that the inspector who shall be appointed +may have it well in hand. After knowing the result and report of the +inspection, orders will be given as to what shall be just in regard +to the payment and integrity of the said fund of the goods of deceased +persons. A royal decree must be despatched, so that this indebtedness +be made no greater in the future, and so that the governors take +upon themselves no authority to make payments out of the said fund; +and such proceeding shall be strictly prohibited to them, as it was +by another decree which was despatched to Piru in regard to this same +matter, and the custom of the viceroys in making payments from the +fund of the goods of deceased persons. + +4. In regard to the fourth point, concerning the sale of the office +of [secretary of] government and war, which the governor says he has +sold for fifty-four thousand pesos, the fiscal will place before +the Council what will be advisable for the investigation of this +matter, when the purchaser shall come to ask for the confirmation +of this sale. For the present, what he has to note is that only ten +thousand pesos of the said sum appear to have been in cash; for the +forty-four thousand pesos remaining were received in salary-warrants +which were said to be owing from the treasury to the said purchaser +and to other persons. That mode of payment has many inconveniences, +as has been alleged on other occasions; and order must be given that +it be avoided as much as possible. + +5. In regard to the fifth point, no definite measures can be taken +until the accountant and royal officials have been heard, and the +custom ascertained which has been in vogue in appointing and removing +the minor officials of the royal treasury; for in the majority of +cases, it is usually in charge of the royal officials, to say who +shall help them, and they remove or appoint as they deem best. If +there has been or is anything that contradicts this, it is where such +minor officials are paid and are given title by his Majesty. + +6. In regard to the sixth and last point, it will be advisable to +look up and collect the acts cited in it; and in the meanwhile the +fiscal thinks that order should be given to pay the fees to the minor +officials, as was declared by the royal Audiencia. Madrid, November +30, 1630. + +[A copy of certain sections of the present letter follows (those of +the fifth point) with the decree of the Council and the statement of +the fiscal, all of which is given above. Several of the summaries +of decrees of the Council are dated July 11, 1631. The following +statement, relating to the fifth and sixth points, completes the +document.] + +The fiscal, having seen the acts which accompany this section of this +letter, in virtue of a decree of the Council, declares that it should +be ordered to observe the custom that has been followed in Manila in +regard to the appointment of the clerks who serve under the royal +officials; and that there be no such innovation as is attempted by +the governor--by which, besides the petition that shall be given to +the governor by the person who solicits such and such an office, the +royal officials give information as to his ability and competency; +and the governor, having considered his competency, will make the +appointment. For this means to deprive the royal officials of what +they now enjoy and possess, which is even less than their rights in +other parts. Neither does the pretension of the accountant, Martin +Ruiz de Salazar, appear suitable--namely, that he absolutely appoint +his clerks and have authority to remove them; for that is contrary +to the custom and procedure which has always obtained there. It is +sufficient for him to propose them to the governor. It will be well +for the latter to retain that privilege, especially since that royal +official's associates, the treasurer and factor, do not make any +demand regarding this point, although they have the same right. It +will be advisable to write to the accountant that in regard to the +point that he makes concerning the removing of his clerk at will, +he shall go to the governor who appointed him, or to the Audiencia, +where justice will be done in the presence of the parties. In regard +to the laws and acts regarding this that have been referred to the +Council, he thinks that either one of two means can be adopted: +either to order the Audiencia of Manila to take the proper measures, +after having examined the parties, since they are there, and do not +come [here] under summons; or, in case the Council wishes to decide +the matter, that the parties be summoned, so that they may declare +what is advisable for them. For the tariff given by the Audiencia in +the year 599 speaks clearly in favor of the clerks; and since it is +so old and has always been observed, and since this favorable act +was obtained from the Audiencia, the said royal officials cannot +take any resolution within hearing of them. Thus does the fiscal +petition. Madrid, June 9, 1633. + + + + + +Government Matters + + +_1. Slowness of the ships which come from Nueva Espana_ + +Sire: + +In a separate letter sent with this same despatch, I write to your +Majesty of the matters pertaining to war, revenue, the ecclesiastical +estate, and the religious orders, that have arisen in the course of +the year. In the present letter, I shall briefly mention some general +points of the government, for which I take pen in hand today, July +19, before the arrival at this port of Cavite of the ships from Nueva +Espana, or news that they have entered the islands. Consequently we +(I and all this city) are as anxious as can be imagined, as it is now +so late and the vendavals have already set in with some vehemence. May +God, in His mercy, have pity on us; and will your Majesty be pleased +to urge the viceroy of Nueva Espana, by ordering him to have the aid +for these islands leave Acapulco at least by the middle of March. By +that the voyage will be made certain; but if it is delayed until +the last of the same month or the first of April, as has been done +these last years, these islands are in evident danger of remaining +without aid, and that would mean their total ruin. [_In the margin_: +"Have him notified accordingly, and advise the governor what orders +have been sent to him."] + + + +_2. Despatch of the ships leaving here this year_ + + +I am despatching these ships before the arrival of the others, to the +very great inconvenience of the entire country. But the trouble would +be greater if the ships sailed out of season, and after the subsidence +of the vendavals, which is their proper monsoon. May God bear them +with safety. They are the two best ships which have sailed from this +place. The flagship was finished recently, and the almiranta is the +same as new, because of the thorough overhauling that was given it +on this beach. [_In the margin_: "Seen."] + + + +_3. Their small cargo, and the lack of trade in this year_ + + +Their cargo is small, because ships from China and Macan have not +entered Manila this year, and those which were laden in the island of +Hermosa have not returned. The reason why the Chinese did not come is +the multitude of pirates of their own nation who have overrun their +coasts; while it is understood that the reason why the ships have not +returned from the island of Hermosa on time is because the vendavals +must have set in earlier than usual. Accordingly, for both reasons +the ships take less merchandise than they could, and what they take +is at advanced prices. Everything has been incredibly dear in Manila +this year; and we could not live here if we did not have the hope of +better conditions and an abundance of all things. [_In the margin_: +"Seen."] + + + +_4. Resolution taken by this city to send eight citizens to the City +of Mexico, so that they may handle their merchandise in accordance +with a royal decree which they have presented for that purpose._ + + +The scarcity in the present year and the small supply of the past +years have given this city occasion to resolve upon an innovation +which we greatly fear will be its total ruin. The city petitioned +me for the execution of a decree of your Majesty given in the year +1593, which has not as yet been given force in what pertains to +the citizens; and that is the matter in which they are causing an +innovation. Your Majesty permits them in that decree to go to sell +their goods in Mexico, or to send them by persons who go in the ships; +but not to send or consign them to citizens of Mexico, unless it he in +the second place and in case of the death of those who take them. As +the profits have been so small these last few years, the citizens of +Manila throw the blame on the efforts of those in Mexico, which they +say are unfriendly. Consequently, they have resolved to send eight +men from this city with goods of those who have consented to commit +these to them; for which, although they pretended that this would +not remain at the will of the owners, I, however, relying upon the +decree, have refused to concede them more than it mentions. The eight +men have orders and instructions to form one single body, and to sell +through one person, and to manage their business by the counsel and +opinion of all, the majority of votes ruling. They are to make all +the necessary efforts in Nueva Espana for blocking the citizens of +Mexico who are not agents for those in Filipinas, even if it should +be necessary for some of them to go to that court to attain their +purpose. [_In the margin_: "Take it to the fiscal." "It was taken to +him. Answered on a separate paper."] + + + +5. _Advantages and difficulties in the execution of this decree, +and the ruinous outcome which may be feared from it._ + + +As the execution of this decree, although so old, is a good method +to attain what his Majesty intends and what the monarchy needs, that +but little money of merchants be sent to these islands, I am giving +without any opposition to the citizens of this city what is ordered by +the decree, as will be seen by the acts that have been passed in this +regard which I am sending to that royal Council, in order that it may +understand the matter better, and that it may take the measures which +seem most advisable. The truth is, that I fear lest a violent clash +result from this innovation, between this city and that of Mexico; for +the citizens of the latter place, when they find themselves deprived of +the gains which they had by acting as agents for those of Filipinas, +will render poor service as such to the latter; and further, knowing +that the citizens here are combining against them, that will oblige +them also to combine [against these citizens], in order not to make +the returns this year with any silver. That would be the total ruin +of this colony, because of the small investments and business affairs +of these last years. [_In the margin_: "Take it to the fiscal with +the acts." "They were taken to him. Response on a separate paper."] + + + +_6. That all that has been done in this matter has been with the +approval and assent of the Audiencia, and against my own_. + + +I never took my pen to sign an act in this matter (upon which all +the Audiencia was unanimous), for they seemed to me the most serious +acts that could arise pro and con in this community. All that I +have executed has been against my own opinion. What I would gladly +have done would be to have four or six alert men to take charge of +the goods of private persons, and have each one administer it as +best he could, without at present trying to oppose the citizens of +Mexico and to deprive them at one stroke of the agencies, and that +would be accomplished gradually. Besides, times becoming better by +buying here cheap, the profits would be greater; and it would be a +good expedient not to send too great a consignment of goods to Nueva +Espana. That would be, and this city would have, some relief without +so much offense to the City of Mexico, which is of no less importance +to the monarchy than this city. [_In the margin_: "Take it to the +fiscal." "It was referred to him. Response in a separate paper."] + + + +7. _How injurious it is to take loans from the inhabitants of this +city_ + + +The havoc wrought by the loans which the inhabitants are forced to +make to the royal treasury, which is now owing them about two hundred +thousand pesos, is not little. The inhabitants have been unable to +invest that money, and hence the deficiency in what they could have +used in trade has embarrassed them with a like shortage in the profits +that they would have made with this sum. Your Majesty ought to have +this matter remedied by ordering the viceroys of Nueva Espana to aid +this treasury with the sum asked for here; for surely such procedure +means the total destruction of these few vassals whom your Majesty +has here in this little commonwealth. If that relief be lacking, +the enemy will have but little to do in making themselves masters of +the South Sea. [_In the margin:_ "That this matter is being discussed +very carefully and that it will be thoroughly examined in order to +give a suitable answer."] + + + +_8. The fresh supply of saltpetre which was brought from Yndia by +the efforts of Don Felipe Mascarenas, captain of Cochin_. + + +Four galliots have come from Yndia with flour and a certain quantity +of saltpetre, of which we were in great need. The captain of Cochin, +Don Felipe de Mascarenas, is the one who has solicited it; and he +aids me very punctually with what I ask from him. I am trying to +have some ships built there for the Nueva Espana line. I request your +Majesty to thank him, and to encourage him to pay careful attention +to the quick building of the new ships; for this would effect much, +and relieve the islands of one of the greatest burdens that they +endure, namely, the shipyards and shipbuilding. [_In the margin_: +"Let his Majesty be consulted, so that the same be done in such manner +as he prefers." "Consultation was held October 17."] + + + +_9. Embassy sent to the king of Camboja; the building of ships; +and the trade that has been established with him_. + + +For the same purpose I despatched an embassy this year to the kingdom +of Camboja, in order to ascertain whether it has suitable timber. I +have heard that those who went there have been well received by +the king, and that he is answering me by another embassy composed +of his vassals. They say that he has never done so with anyone +else, and that the building of a ship was already being begun. I am +momentarily expecting a patache which was bought there, in which the +ambassadors are coming. I trust that very many matters for relief for +these islands and saving for your Majesty will be arranged with them +besides the shipbuilding, as well as the advantage which the Catholic +faith may obtain in this commerce. For some Dominican fathers whom +I sent as chaplains for the Spaniards write me that they were very +cordially received by the king, and that the latter had given them +permission to build a church, and to baptize those who wished to +be converted. [_In the margin:_ "Have him advise us of the result, +and approve what he is doing."] + + + +_10. Embassy and trade with the king of Cochinchina_ + + +I also sent a message to the king of Cochinchina, with letters and +presents, in order to establish a factory in his kingdom, both for the +building of ships and for the exporting of iron and other metals--which +can be imported from there at much less cost than what is now incurred +here in the islands. I have already received a reply from the king, +which contains many expressions of desire that what I am trying to do +will be effected; and I am in hopes of accomplishing it this year. [_In +the margin_: "Approve it and tell him to continue these efforts."] + + + +11. _Message to the king of Sian, and the condition in which the +punishment meted out to him last year has placed him_. + + +As for the king of Sian, I advised your Majesty last year of the +punishment inflicted upon him for his injustice toward the inhabitants +of this city in keeping their goods. After having inflicted the +punishment, I thought it advisable to send him a message through +an experienced person of his kingdom, declaring what was intended +by the expedition of the galleons to his river; and warning him to +give full satisfaction, unless he wished the punishment to proceed +further. The messenger found the king dead, and all the counselors +removed who were in power at the time when the matter occurred, +and the new king so fearful of the arms of your Majesty that he +was afraid to despatch any vessel from his coasts. He has sent the +messenger back to me with letters and presents, in which he begs +for our friendship, and satisfies in words the injustice which his +father committed. However, he does not make any active reparation, +so that I am at present in a condition of continuing the chastisement +or of accepting the reparation and friendship which he asks, as shall +seem to me best for the welfare of these islands. This is a matter +of importance, which I am communicating in order that what is most +expedient may be carried out. [_In the margin_: "That it is well to +continue demanding from him what his father owed."] + + + +_[12.] Despatch sent to Japan in regard to the burning of the junk, +of which advice was sent last year; and the controversy regarding +this which the city of Macan has maintained with me_. + + +Like efforts have been made to restore the trade with Japon, which +was formerly of great importance to these islands. I sent a despatch +to the governor of Nangasaqui, sending him forty-two Japanese whom +General Don Juan de Alcaraso brought to me from a junk of that +nation--which, as I advised you last year, he burned at the bar of +the river of Sian. I offered them friendship and trade, giving them +to understand that the burning was done without my orders; and that, +if they would have trade and commerce with these islands as before, +I would give satisfaction for the damage in the said burning. This +despatch did not reach Nangasaqui in the time that I supposed, nor as +yet have we heard from it. The news of the said burning having reached +that same city [i.e., Nangasaqui] at a time when the Portuguese were +there with the galliots that make that voyage, trading, with their +merchandise, the Japanese attempted to attack them, and to force them +to pay the value of the merchandise and the junk which were burned; +and it is feared that thereupon they would lay an embargo on the three +galliots. However, as yet we do not know with certainty or assurance, +except that a suit was pending in the court of the king of Japon, +the Portuguese claiming that they could not in justice be forced to +repay the damage which the Castilians had done. Thereupon the city of +Macan earnestly begged me to make satisfaction, and send the value +of the cargo burned and lost in the said junk, in order to silence +the Japanese. Being desirous of gratifying the people of Macan, +and settling the matter, I called an assembly of theologians and +jurists, in which I broached the subject. All agreed that so long as +the Japanese persevered in locking the door to commerce with these +islands, contrary to justice and reason, there should be no talk of +giving satisfaction for the damage inflicted, until advice could +be given to your Majesty--even though it should follow from this, +by a casualty not intended, that the Portuguese with whom the said +Japanese trade should have to pay for the loss. This will be seen more +in detail in the authentic copy of the said council's proceedings, +which I enclose herewith, so that if perchance the city of Macan should +petition your Majesty through the Council of Portugal to have these +damages paid, no decision may be made in the matter until you shall +have seen the motives which we have here for failing to settle it. In +such case, I petition your Majesty also to be pleased to examine, +with this section of this letter, that of another which I wrote in the +past year of 628 in regard to the same matter. It will be considered +that if the damage inflicted has to be paid for, it will fall upon +those who did it. That would be the soldiers of this camp and the +leader under whom they were, namely, the said commander, Don Joan de +Alcarasso, who distinguished themselves greatly in your Majesty's +service in the said expedition of the galleons. [_In the margin_: +"File, and have the fiscal examine it all." "It was all filed and +referred to the fiscal. It is answered on a separate paper."] + + + +_13. Departure of Don Fernando de Silva, and difficulties that arose +in it_ + + +Don Fernando de Silva (who is the person whom I found governing in +these islands when I arrived here), exercising the permission given him +by your Majesty by which he may enjoy for eight years the encomiendas +held here by his wife for two lives, undertook to make his voyage this +year. As I thought that a government permit in writing (as is usual +with others who have not been governors) was unnecessary so that he +might embark, I communicated the matter to the Audiencia in session, +which was of my opinion. But the auditors added that the governor +ought to issue an act by which he should notify your Majesty's fiscal +and the official royal judges that the said Don Fernando was leaving +these islands, and that he thus informed them in case that they had +anything to plead against him. I thought it an unnecessary proceeding, +as the departure of the said Don Fernando de Silva was sufficiently +public; yet, in order to comply with the opinion of the Audiencia, +I issued the said act. The fiscal entered a demand that the said Don +Fernando be commanded to give bonds, for himself and his agents and +servants, to furnish residencia for the time while he had governed +these islands, and to pay the judgment and sentence therein. A copy +of this document was given to the party. He replied that the governor +was not a competent judge of this article of residencia, but only +the royal Council of the Yndias. I thought the same, and so did the +government assessor. I ruled that the fiscal should demand what was +expedient for him from the judge before whom he could and should +appear by right. He appealed from this to the royal Audiencia, which +declared that the governor was a competent judge, and that he ought +to pass judgment upon this article. This matter has been examined and +reviewed, without there having been found any decree of your Majesty +which orders such a thing, or any precedent of a similar case made here +or in Nueva Espana--not only as far as the governor, captain-general, +and president of the Audiencia is concerned, but even for the officials +of the Audiencia. They, having been promoted to other parts, have +gone without giving their residencia or bonds, so long as that royal +Council does not provide therefor. Consequently, notwithstanding what +the Audiencia declared, I thought it wise not to set such a precedent, +or cause such difficulty to the superior ministers of your Majesty +(who would have them under your eyes, in whatever part they might be), +so that you may order them to pay what they should be sentenced to pay +in their residencia, when your royal Council shall decide that it be +taken. I was obliged to make this decision by the consideration that +it might happen that there might not be left to a governor persons who +are under obligation to him in the country, because he has given to no +one other things than what he has deserved, by which no one considers +himself favored and obliged. And it may be that no one can be found +to go bond for him; and it will not be right that he should have to +remain in the Filipinas on account of not having bonds, if there is +no commission to take his residencia. And this would weigh even more +heavily upon the auditors, who have less power to give favors; and, +when they were promoted by your Majesty, they would be unable to go +to take charge of their places for lack of bonds. Thus they would +remain in this land, exposed to innumerable affronts from those to +whom they had administered justice, which is a thing that your Majesty +ought not to permit to happen to your ministers. Although all these +reasons were sufficient to decide me not to allow this innovation +without a special order from your Majesty, there is, in the present +case of Don Fernando de Silba, another very special consideration, +since he is leaving an encomienda in this country with an income +of four thousand pesos per year. That is the best bond that one +can ask. Consequently, seeing that no detriment was being incurred +in not taking the bonds, I decided the matter by declaring that I +was not judge in this sense. I am sending the copies of the acts to +that royal Council, so that your Majesty may be pleased, after their +examination, to enact what may be considered most fitting, and with +all distinctness, so that there may be no abuses here, and so that +the governors who depart after the entrance of the other governors may +not be harassed. With Don Fernando I have maintained very harmonious +relations during the three years while I kept him here. On the occasion +of this despatch, I have furnished him all the accommodations possible, +assigning him forty toneladas of cargo to carry his goods, household, +and servants. He is a person who is worthy of what favor your Majesty +may show him, and will render excellent service in any employment +that he may hold. [_In the margin_: "Refer it to the fiscal." "It +was referred. Answered on a separate paper."] + + +_[14.] Erection of the bridge; and how the hospital has been given +the revenue produced by the ferry boat._ + + +The bridge which I began in this city (as I have advised you during +the last few years) is now in such a condition that we can cross by +it. It will be finished in a couple of months without having cost the +citizens or your Majesty a single maravedi. The Sangleys have built it +from their common fund, with which they have been freed from the amount +that the ferry-boat cost them. The latter belonged to the hospital of +the same Sangleys, which is in charge of the Dominican fathers; and +it netted them at least two thousand pesos annually. They maintained +themselves with that sum; and accordingly, so that that hospital, +so necessary for that nation, might not be left without support, it +has seemed best, with the consent of the Audiencia, to assign to the +hospital the same sum of two thousand pesos per year from the common +fund of the same Sangleys, with their consent. Thus will it be done, +and the Sangleys do not pay any ferry rate, but support the hospital, +in which they are treated, from their common fund. Your Majesty is +patron of it as ever, the fathers happy, and the poor well provided +for. [_In the margin_: "File this with what is enacted in the petition +of the Dominican fathers." "This section was filed with a memorial +given by Fray Mateo de Villa." "It is decreed in the memorial and +what is to be answered, here on a separate paper."] + + + +_15. Sickness in Manila this year, and death of the archbishop_ + + +I hope to construct other works this year, if our Lord gives me life, +with which this city will be no less beautified. There has been but +little health in this city and its environs this year, with many +sudden deaths, both of Spaniards and Indian natives and slaves. Among +others has passed away the archbishop Don Fray Miguel Garcia Serrano, +who died on Corpus Christi, as is written at greater length in the +letter touching the ecclesiastical estate. [_In the margin_: "Seen."] + + + +_16. Arrival of the aid and ships from Nueva Espana_ + + +Just as I reached this point in my letter, and when about to seal it, +I received news that the two ships which sailed for Nueva Espana last +year for the reenforcement have returned with it; and that they have +made port in different parts of these islands, because the weather did +not allow them to reach this port of Cavite. They left Nueva Espana +late, and the vendavals set in early. Hence the voyage has been one +of hardships, and it was a great mercy of God that they were able to +make the islands, although not little is the discomfort and not few the +additional expenses that have been incurred because of their inability +to make this port. What I grieve over most is to see the inadequacy of +the aid, which does not reach two hundred and fifty thousand pesos, +while I informed the viceroy that we needed four hundred thousand, +as I wrote last year. Consequently, I again petition your Majesty in +the same terms as in that letter, to be pleased to endow these islands +with the said sum, so that it may not be at the will of the viceroys +of Nueva Espana to discontinue sending it. This is the chief point, +and on it is based all the government of these islands, so that we +may be able to give a good account of them to your Majesty. [_In the +margin_: "Have what was enacted for this examined." "The enactments +were examined, and filed with this section for the Council. Answered +on a separate paper."] + + + +_17. Aid of artillery sent to the viceroy_ + + +The viceroy of Nueva Espana asks me for bronze artillery with which +to fortify the fortress of San Juan de Ulua, sending me twenty-four +thousand pesos for the expense of it. Although the ships have arrived +so late that I have had no time to cast it in the quantity and of the +quality that he asks, I am sending him the equivalent [of the money] +in eighteen excellent pieces from what we have already manufactured, +with which I think that that fort will be well defended, and the +viceroy will have the pieces with which to go to succor the fort +if it should be necessary. He tells me that he wishes some of the +artillery which he has asked of me for that purpose. [_In the margin_: +"It is well, and let him execute what the viceroy shall advise him +of in this respect."] + +May God preserve the Catholic and royal person of your Majesty +with the increase of kingdoms and states that is necessary to +Christendom. Cavite, August first, 1629. Sire, your Majesty's humble +vassal, + + +_Don Juan Nino de Tavora_ + + +[Appended to this letter are the following documents:] + +_Second Council in Regard to the Injuries Committed on the Japanese +Boat Which Was Captured in Sian_ + + +In the city of Manila, on the sixteenth day of the month of January, +one thousand six hundred and twenty-nine, Don Juan Nino de Tavora, +knight of the Order of Calatrava, comendador of Puerto Llano, member +of the Council of War of the king our sovereign, his governor and +captain-general of the Philipinas Islands, and president of the royal +Audiencia therein, called a meeting of theologians and juries in +order to discuss matters of his Majesty's service, and those touching +cases of conscience and justice. And in the royal buildings and the +palace of the governor's dwelling, in the presence of Licentiate +Marcos Capata de Galvez, fiscal of the said royal Audiencia; the +reverend fathers, Fray Domingo Gonzalez of the Order of St. Dominic, +commissary of the Holy Office and rector of the college of Sancto +Tomas; Fray Juan de Montemayor, of the Order of St. Augustine, Fathers +Diego de Bobadilla and Francisco Colin of the Society of Jesus of this +city, father Fray Gaspar de Santa Monica, lecturer on theology in the +convent of St. Nicolas of the Order of the discalced Augustinians; and +Licentiate Don Rodrigo Gonzalez de Varreda, his Lordship's assessor; +and all being assembled: the lord governor ordered me, the present +government secretary, to read a paper, which his Lordship gave me +for that purpose. I read it, and it was of the following tenor. + +"In May of one thousand six hundred and twenty-eight, there took +place at the bar of the river of Sian the capture and burning of the +junk from Xapon, caused by our galleons. In July of the same year, it +was decided, at a meeting of four theologians and two jurists which +was called to discuss the matter, that this act had been unjust, +for lack of authority by him who did it; and that, accordingly, the +one who caused the damage was under obligations to make it good to +the Japanese. + +"That satisfaction has not been discussed as yet, except that the +king gave liberty to the Japanese who were captured; and they were +made ready to be sent to their country with messages for the governor +of Nangasaqui. These were to the effect that keen regret was felt +over the illegal act recently committed by our galleons; and that +as to the value of the junk and its cargo, order would be given to +make complete reparation, if the Japanese would open commerce with +this city, as was done in former years, and as they now have with the +Portuguese. Of the contrary, in case that the Japanese refuse to open +commerce, nothing was said; nor did it state who was the principal +cause, but gave the order for the damage. No investigation or effort +has been made in regard to reparation, but a reply is being awaited +to the message which was sent to Japon, so that the government might +know what ought to be done and ordered. + +"The reason for this suspension or omission on the part of the +government has been because we considered that the king our sovereign +has a legitimate cause to make war on the Japanese on account of +the faith which they so cruelly persecute; and because all who leave +Japon in order to ship goods have to deny the faith before embarking, +at least to outward appearance, and unite with the heathen in order +to persecute the faith. Thus it is believed that these islands have an +especial reason to consider themselves aggrieved by Japon. 1st. Because +the Japanese have prohibited commerce without other reason than the +faith, and that with so great severity that a ship which sailed +secretly from the districts of Arima and Omura for these islands +having put back, and the Japanese ascertaining whither it was bound, +that resulted in the loss of many lives, and in most cruel injuries +to the Christian people there. 2d. Because the Japanese refused to +receive the ambassadors who were sent from here in order to bring +about peace and harmony between these kingdoms. 3d. Because of the +old-time robberies which were made in the time of Taicosama, and +by his order, of the goods of the galleon 'San Phelipe,' which put +in at their coasts because of bad weather--the Japanese martyring +on that occasion the religious of St. Francis who protested against +the injustice; and Taico declaring war against these islands in the +endeavor to make them tributary, and for some years sending a number +of ships to infest, as they did, these coasts; and although peace +was made afterward in the time of Daifu, and commerce was reopened, +still they never gave satisfaction for the wrong committed, nor did we +obtain damages for it. Consequently, as soon as the peace was broken, +on account of Daifu, and because they deprived us of commerce with +them, it appears that they again revived the past insults and that they +are vigorously demanding their right of procuring redress. 4th. Because +from the time when our ships put in at Japon, and the Japanese had news +of the richness of these islands, they have always tried to conquer +them, by endeavoring to get a foothold on the island of Hermosa, +in order to make it a way-station for the conquest of Luzon. That +has caused the governors of Philipinas to make great expenditures +and vast preparations during the past few years; and but recently +it is learned that discussions of this kind are rife in Japon, and +that their reason for not doing it [_i.e._, conquering the islands] +is not the lack of malice but of power. + +"For all the above reasons, it was nevertheless doubted whether the +capture and burning of the said junk were unjust, if, now that it +has been done, the king our sovereign could avail himself of these +wrongs as a beginning and part of the compensation; and if those +who govern these islands in the name of his Majesty could remain +firm, and order the person who committed the injury not to give any +satisfaction so long as they make no reparation in Japon--or at least +so long as they do not desist from the aforesaid injuries, by opening +commerce, or in some other manner that may be advantageous to these +islands. In virtue of that doubt the discussion of the question of +satisfaction for the injuries has been neglected until now by the +government. The government has contented itself with the aforesaid +measures of granting liberty and accommodations to the Japanese, +and a message which was sent to the Japanese--to which the reasons +and consequences of state that existed for it obliged us. + +"One of these reasons was that one now urged by the correspondence +with Macan, upon whose commerce Japon might perhaps fall in order to +obtain reparation for the injury which this government might inflict +upon them, as we see has been attempted. The city and commandant +of Macan request these islands to make reparation immediately for +the goods, so that the difficulty may not recoil upon them, to the +damage of their goods and of the commerce between Yndia and Japon, +which they declare to be of great importance for the preservation of +Christianity in those islands." + +And having finished reading the said paper in the said meeting, his +Lordship requested those present to give him their opinions in regard +to its contents, so that the most advisable measures might be taken +for the service of his Majesty and for the relief of his conscience. + +All the said assembly having heard and understood the contents +of the said paper, above incorporated, and conferred regarding it +and what in conscience they ought and could do, voted unanimously +and as one man that the king our sovereign and these islands have +sufficient cause in law to avail themselves of these wrongs which +were committed by our galleons without their orders, and to take +them as a beginning and part of the reparation; and that, so long +as the Japanese did not give satisfaction for the aforesaid wrongs, +the lord governor ought not to order any reparation to be given; +for the right to take reparation, when the party owes it and does +not give it, is plain. In the present case, it is certain that his +Majesty could with justice order the said loss, and even greater, +to be inflicted upon the Japanese, in retaliation for the injuries +committed on the faith and these islands. And since he did not order +it, but it is done, he has an undisputed faculty and right to avail +himself of the wrongs committed. Thus it appears that there is no +doubt that his Majesty's officials are not bound in conscience to +make reparation to those of Japon until his Majesty is advised of +the case, so that we may see whether he wishes to avail himself of, +or to have these islands avail themselves of, his right. In regard +to the mention of the injury that may follow to the inhabitants of +Macan if reparation be not made immediately, as yet we do not know +that the latter have shipped anything; and even if they had, Macan, +in order not to break with Japon, would have to pay the value of this +junk, since that is an incident not reckoned on by Manila, but one +which this city rather tried to obviate by all the means which were +readily feasible, such as giving liberty to the prisoners, sending an +embassy and messages of apology to the Japanese, and pledging immediate +reparation for the injury done to their property, if they would open +trade and make peace with these islands. So long as they do not do +this his Lordship appears to be fulfilling the demands of conscience +by informing his Majesty of what is happening, so that as sovereign +of both states [i.e., Manila and Macan], he may order what is to his +royal service. This is their opinion, and the said father Diego de +Bobadilla said that the opinion does not state anything as to who ought +to make reparation for the said injuries, nor do they consider that; +because it does not pertain to them to give any opinion or judgment +on that point, but only to state who would have authority for doing it. + +His Lordship, having seen the above opinions, declared that he was in +accord with them, and that he is doing what is mentioned in them in +the manner which seems to his Lordship best. He affixed his signature, +as did the rest of the said assembly. + +_Don Juan Nino de Tavora_ +_Licentiate Marcos Capata de Galvez_ +_Fray Domingo de Goncales_ +_Francisco Colin_ +_Diego de Bobadilla_ +_Don Rodrigo Goncales de Barreda_ + +Before me: +_Andres Martin del Arroyo_ + +Collated with the original records which rest in this government +office. By order of the said lord governor and captain-general, +I drew up this copy, at Manila, June twenty-two, one thousand six +hundred and twenty-nine, [witnesses being] Francisco de Silva and Don +Juan Martin. In testimony of the truth, I seal and sign it officially. + +_Andres Martin del Arroyo_, royal secretary. + +We, the undersigned notaries, attest that Andres Martin del Arroyo, +by whom these copies appear to be signed and sealed, is a notary of +the king our sovereign, and exercises the office of chief government +and military notary of these islands. The copies and other matters +that pass and have passed before him are given and have been given +entire faith and credit, both in and out of court. Given in Manila, +July three, one thousand six hundred and twenty-nine. + +_Pedro Munoz de Herrera_, royal notary. +_Luis de Barrasa_, royal notary. +_Luis de Torres_, royal notary. + + + + +_Acts Regarding Departure of Fernando de Silva from the Islands_ + +_Act by the governor_ + + +In the city of Manila, on the sixteenth of July, one thousand six +hundred and twenty-nine, Don Juan Nino de Tavora, knight of the Order +of Calatrava, comendador of Puerto Llano, member of the Council of War +of the king our sovereign, his governor and captain-general of these +Philipinas Islands, and president of the royal Audiencia therein, +declared that, inasmuch as Don Fernando de Silva, knight of the habit +of Santiago, former governor and captain-general of these islands and +president of the royal Audiencia therein, because of the death of Don +Alonso Fajardo de Tenca, is to go to Nueva Espana this present year, +and to take his wife, Dona Maria de Salazar, and his household and +family: therefore he ordered--and he did so order--that if the fiscal +of these islands and the royal officials have anything to plead against +the said Don Fernando de Silva, whereby he should not make his voyage +without any hindrance, they do it within the following day. Thus did +he enact and order, and he signed it. + + +_Don Juan Nino de Tavora_ + + +Before me: + + +_Andres Martin del Arroyo_ + + + +_Notification to and reply of the fiscal_ + + +In Manila, on the seventeenth of July, one thousand six hundred +and twenty-nine, I, the notary, read and announced the act of the +lord governor, contained in another part of this, to Licentiate +Marcos Capata de Galvez, fiscal of the royal Audiencia of these +islands. Having heard it, he said that what he has to demand is +that the said Don Fernando give bonds to furnish residencia, both for +himself and for his agents and servants, for the time while he governed +these islands; and to pay the amount to which he should be adjudged +and sentenced, and that he leave a person with accepted powers to +give the said residencia. Thus does he request his Lordship to order, +as that is justice. He signed it, and will request it by petition. + + +_Marcos Capata de Galvez_ + + +Before me: + + +_Andres Martin del Arroyo_ + + + +_Notification to the treasurer_ + + +In Manila, July seventeen, one thousand six hundred and twenty-nine, I, +the notary, announced the act of the lord governor, herein elsewhere +contained, to the treasurer, Juan Ruiz Descalona, official judge of +the royal exchequer in these islands. Having heard it, he declared +that he does not know whether Don Fernando de Silva is indebted to the +royal treasury. If he is not, then he does not know of any reason why, +in what concerns this matter, there should be any obstacle to prevent +his journey. He signed the same. + + +_Juan Ruiz Descalona_ +_Andres Martin del Arroyo_ + + + +_Notification to the accountant_ + +In Manila, July seventeen, one thousand six hundred and twenty-nine, +I, the secretary, gave notice of the act of the governor and +captain-general, on the preceding leaf, to the accountant, Martin +Ruiz de Salazar, official judge of the royal exchequer in these +islands. He declared that when Don Fernando de Silva was governor he +ordered and commanded some things contrary to the ordinances in regard +to payments which were made from the royal treasury, as he thought +them expedient for his Majesty's service. There is nothing evident +today in the royal accountancy why he should be detained, for this +concerns the residencia which he should give, with the bonds which the +fiscal demands shall, according to law, be furnished in residencias, +to pay the sum to which he may be adjudged and sentenced. It is well +provided, except, etc. He signed the same. + + +_Martin Ruiz de Salazar_ +_Andres Martin del Arroyo_ + + + +_Demand of his Majesty's fiscal_ + + +I, Licentiate Marcos Capata de Galvez, his Majesty's fiscal in +this royal Audiencia, declare that the government secretary, Andres +Martin del Arroyo, notified me of an act of his Lordship, in which he +orders me to plead what there may be to plead against Don Fernando +de Silva, knight of the habit of Santiago, and that the same act be +made known to the royal officials, in consideration of the fact that +he is to make his voyage to Nueva Espana this year. Since the said +Don Fernando should give his residencia for the time while he was +governor of these islands, it will be advisable for your Lordship +that, if his departure be effected, he shall give good and creditable +bonds to furnish the said residencia for himself and for his agents and +servants, and to pay the sum to which he may be adjudged and sentenced, +leaving a person with accepted powers who may give it for him. This +being complied with by the royal exchequer, I have nothing else to +require. I request and beseech your Lordship to have the said Don +Fernando give bonds to pay the sum to which he may be adjudged and +sentenced in the residencia which he shall furnish and that he leave +a person with, accepted powers to give it when his Majesty orders it, +for all this that I request is justice, etc. + + +_Licentiate Marcos Capata de Galvez_ + + +_Act_ + +Cavite, July eighteen, six hundred and twenty-nine. Copy for Don +Fernando de Silva. Thus he [i.e., the governor] enacts, together with +his counselor. At the bottom of this decree are two rubrics, one of +the lord governor and captain-general, and the other of Licentiate +Don Rodrigo Goncales de Barreda, his counselor. + + +_Andres Martin_ [_del Arroyo_] + + +_Petition of Don Fernando de Silva_ + +I, Don Fernando de Silva, knight of the Order of Santiago, former +governor and captain-general in these islands and president of his +royal Audiencia for the king our sovereign, in answer to a writ +presented by his Majesty's fiscal, in which he declares that he +has been notified of an act of your Lordship ordering him to plead +against me whatever he might have to plead, in consideration of the +fact that I am about to go to Nueva Espana; and who demanded that I +be ordered to leave bonds for the sum to which I might be adjudged +and sentenced in the residencia that is to be taken from me, and a +person with accepted powers to furnish my residencia for me when his +Majesty orders it: declare that notwithstanding that the said act could +not be pronounced by your Lordship, nor the said demand made by the +fiscal--which is an innovation that until today has not been made with +any of the governors, or with any other official of his Majesty among +the number of those who must give residencia of their offices when and +before whom the royal pleasure dictates--(for that belongs exclusively +to the royal person and to the supreme Council of the Indias, and to +no other judge or royal minister) yet, without prejudice to my right, +and without attributing to your Lordship greater jurisdiction than what +belongs to your office, because on my part there is no cause to refuse +what the said fiscal demands, and in order to avoid the trouble which +might ensue for me if my voyage were hindered or delayed by opposing +the said demand at a time when the ships are so soon to set sail, I +am ready to give the said bonds, that I will furnish residencia for +all matters in which by law I ought to give it, and that I will pay +the sum to which I may be adjudged and sentenced in the residencia; +and, besides, to leave a person with accepted powers who shall give +my residencia for me when his Majesty orders it. I request and beseech +your Lordship to receive from me the said bonds by the present notary, +for which, etc., and in all justice. + + +_Don Fernando de Silva_ +_Don Juan Fernandez de Ledo_ + + +_Act of the governor_ + +In the port of Cavite, July twenty-three, one thousand six hundred +and twenty-nine, Don Juan Nino de Tavora, governor and captain-general +of these islands, having seen this petition of Don Fernando and what +was demanded by the fiscal regarding the bonds to give residencia +for himself and for his servants and agents, for the time while he +was governor and captain-general of these islands and president of +the royal Audiencia therein: declared that the fiscal should plead +what he had to plead in this regard before whom and with what law he +ought and could plead it. Thus did he order, and he signed the same, +with the advice of his counselor, who signed. + + +_Don Juan Nino de Tavora_ +_Licentiate Don Rodrigo Goncalez de Barreda_ + + +Before me: + + +_Andres Martin del Arroyo_ + + +_Notification to his Majesty's fiscal, and his appeal_ + +In the city of Manila, July twenty-three, one thousand six hundred +and twenty-nine, I, the present secretary, read and announced the act +(which is written on the leaf preceding this) enacted by Don Juan +Nino de Tavora, governor and captain-general of these islands, to +Licentiate Marcos Capata de Galvez, fiscal of this royal Audiencia, +in his own person. His Grace said that talking with the due respect, +he appeals to the president and auditors of the said royal Audiencia, +and requests the government secretary that, in accordance with the +ordinance, he go to the Audiencia to make a report of this cause. This +was what he gave as his reply, and he affixed his signature thereto, +witnesses being Licentiate Pedro Lopez and Juan de Caneda, residents +of Manila. + + +_Licentiate Marcos Capata de Galvez_ + +Before me: + +_Diego de Torres_, royal notary. + + + +_Summons given to Don Fernando_ + +In Manila, on the said day, month, and year, I, the undersigned +notary, gave notice and summoned in due form, for the appeal +interposed by the fiscal, and at his request, Don Fernando de Silva, +in his own person. He said that he hears it, and regards himself as +summoned. Witnesses were Captain Don Manuel de Torres and Alferez +Bartolome Gomez, and I attest, the same. + +Before me: + + +_Diego de Torres_, royal notary. + + + +_Act of the royal Audiencia_ + +In the city of Manila, July twenty-four, one thousand six hundred +and twenty-nine, the president and auditors of the royal Audiencia +and Chancilleria of these Filipinas Islands, having examined these +acts in regard to the demand of his Majesty's fiscal of this said +royal Audiencia--by virtue of which Don Fernando de Silva, knight +of the habit of Santiago, and former governor and captain-general +of these islands and president of this royal Audiencia, should give +bonds to furnish residencia for the time while he exercised the said +duties, for himself and his agents, and to pay the sum to which he +may be adjudged and sentenced in that residencia, leaving a person +with accepted powers to give the said residencia--and the appeal +interposed on the part of the said fiscal from the act enacted by the +governor and captain-general of these islands on the twenty-third of +the present month and year, in which he ordered that the said fiscal +plead in this regard what he had to plead before whom and with the +law that he ought: declared that they returned this cause--and they +did return it--to the said governor, so that as a competent judge, +he might enact what should be just in the matter. By this act they +so enacted, ordered, and decreed. Before me: + + +_Pedro Munoz de Herrera_ + + +_Appeal of Don Fernando from the said act_ + +Most potent Sire: + +I, Don Fernando de Silva, knight of the Order of Santiago, your +former governor and captain-general in these islands, and president +of the royal Audiencia, appeal from the act of the Audiencia of the +twenty-fourth of this month of July, only in regard to their ordering +returned to your governor and captain-general the cause which your +fiscal of this royal Audiencia is prosecuting, by which they order me +to give bonds that I will furnish residencia of the said offices and +pay the sum to which I shall be adjudged and sentenced in it, as I am +about to go to Nueva Espana. It was declared in the said act that the +said your governor and captain-general was a competent judge to try +the said cause. That said act, only as far as the said declaration +is concerned (and speaking with due respect), must be revoked as a +general rule, and because I am, by having exercised the said offices +of president, governor, and captain-general, immediately subordinate +to your royal person and to your supreme Council of the Indias; and no +other judge or tribunal can take it upon themselves to try anything +pertaining to the residencia of the said offices or to security for +residencia. Thus, until the present time, the said bonds have not been +required in this city for this royal Audiencia or for your governors, +my predecessors in the government, or for your auditors when they +leave these islands to go to Nueva Espana or to other parts (who ought +also to give residencia for their offices at the will of your royal +Council); they have gone without giving the said bonds. Moreover, +as is proved by this royal decree, of which I present an authorized +copy, attested by three royal notaries, your royal person was pleased +to give me permission authorizing me to make the said voyage, without +condition or obligation of giving the said bonds. The obligation that +your Majesty did not impose in the said permit cannot be imposed +by any of the judges or ministers inferior to the said your royal +Council of the Indias. And accordingly, although the question of the +said bonds might have been discussed with other persons, that cannot +be understood as applying to me; but I must be allowed to make my +voyage freely, without any obstacle being offered, as his Majesty [6] +orders, notwithstanding the contents of my writing of the twenty-third +of this month. For that writing was without prejudice to my right, +and did hot attribute any jurisdiction to the said your governor. I +presented the said writing before receiving the said permission from +his Majesty. Consequently, I petition and beseech your Highness to be +pleased to have the said act revoked, in so far as it concerns the +said declaration, by ordering that it be understood without having +the cause returned to the said your governor and captain-general; +for what I petition is justice, and for it, etc. + + +_Don Fernando de Silva_ +_Doctor Juan Fernandez de Ledo_ + + +_Act of the royal Audiencia, and reply of the fiscal_ + +In Manila, on the twenty-seventh of July, one thousand six hundred and +twenty-nine, while the president and auditors of the royal Audiencia +and Chancilleria of these Filipinas Islands were in session, this +petition was presented, which having been examined they asked for a +copy. The fiscal presented an act which declared that appeal ought +not to be allowed from an act referring back a cause. Consequently, +since this cause has been returned to the lord governor, his Lordship +must decide the chief matter, namely, whether or not to allow the said +bonds to be given. The documents presented are not for this plea, +but for the principal cause before the lord governor. Therefore, +the fiscal, as far as he is concerned, concludes by this plea. + + +_Licenciate Marcos Capata de Galvez_ + +Before me: +_Andres Martin del Arroyo_ + + + +_Summons to Don Fernando, and his reply_ + +In the city of Manila, on July twenty-seven, one thousand six hundred +and twenty-nine, I, the secretary, informed Don Fernando de Silva of +the act herein elsewhere contained. He declared that the appeal which +he has interposed is in regard to declaring the auditors of the royal +Audiencia competent judges of that which the fiscal has demanded +from the governor. He declared that, in regard to this question, +there must be an authoritative statement from the proper source; +and that the appeal must be allowed. On seeing the acts, he regards +himself as summoned. He signed the same. + + +_Don Fernando de Silva_ + +Before me: +_Andres Martin del Arroyo_, royal secretary. + + + + +_Decree for Don Fernando_ + +The King. On behalf of you, Don Fernando de Silva, knight of the +Order of Santiago, relation has been made me that you have served in +the states of Flandes, and that you have served in other important +affairs for more than ten years; that, having gone to Nueva Espana by +the appointment of the marquis of Cerralbo, you served _ad interim_ +in the duties of my governor and captain-general of the Philipinas +Islands, and president of my royal Audiencia therein, because of the +death of Don Alonso Fajardo de Tenca; that you did it excellently, +maintaining that community in peace, which was supplied with what was +necessary; and that my royal treasury was but little burdened. When +Don Juan Nino de Tavora arrived to serve me in those offices, he +found the finest fleet of galleons which those islands have had, with +which they could defend themselves from the enemies who infest them; +provision of the metals necessary for casting artillery, and fifty +molds for casting the pieces every two days; and the infantry in good +discipline, clothing in abundance, and the ships for Nueva Espana ready +to lade. Possession had been taken in my name of the island of Hermosa, +which is eighteen leguas from the mainland of China, in the year six +hundred and twenty-six, by which it will always be safe for the wealth +of that kingdom to pass by there, without the enemy being able to +hinder them (their fortress being very well fortified by nature). You +were married in those islands to Dona Maria de Salazar, granddaughter +of one of the earliest and most prominent conquistadors and settlers +of the islands, and your father-in-law was the first Spaniard born in +the said islands; [7] and, in commemoration of the services which the +aforesaid performed, the encomienda of Butuan and Oton was given to +them, which they enjoyed. I conceded the favor of prolonging to the +said Dona Maria de Salazar, your wife, the same encomienda for one +generation more, by a decree of February twenty-four, six hundred +and twenty-two; and to it shall succeed the person to whom it shall +belong and pertain according to the law of succession. You went to +the said islands solely for the purpose of serving me in the said +duties, and incurred many expenses on the voyage, and enjoyed only +slightly more than one year's salary. You have a desire to continue +in my service, petitioning me that, in order that you may be able to +do so, and in remuneration of the forbears of your wife, I employ you +without the prohibition imposed on absentees, ordering that they may +not enjoy the income from their encomiendas of Indians, preventing +you therefrom; and [that you be allowed] to appoint a representative +[of the encomienda] to the satisfaction of my governor of the said +islands as is the usual custom. The matter having been examined in +my royal Council of the Indias, I have considered it proper to give +the present. By it I give permission to you, the said Don Fernando +de Silva, to be absent for the space of eight years from the said +encomienda, together with all your household and goods, in Nueva Espana +or in any other part where I may employ you, provided that you leave +the representative and all the rest to which you, as an encomendero, +are obliged, to the satisfaction of my governor of the said islands, +to whom and to my royal Audiencia of the said islands, I order no +obstruction to your voyage to be placed. During the said eight years, +which are to run and be reckoned from the day on which you leave +the said islands in order to make your voyage, they shall not take +away from or deprive you of the said Indians; and shall allow you +to enjoy freely the income from them and the other things which you +shall possess in the said islands, notwithstanding any royal orders +or decrees given to the contrary. Such orders and decrees, I do for +this time, and so far as they touch this case, dispense with. Given +in Madrid, October two, one thousand six hundred and twenty-seven. + + +_I The King_ + + +By order of the king our sovereign: + + +_Don Fernando Ruiz de Contreras_ + + +I copy this transcript from the original, which was in possession of +the treasurer, Alonso de Santoyo, knight of the Order of Santiago, at +whose request it was drawn. It is a faithful and true copy. Mexico, +March twelve, one thousand six hundred and twenty-nine. Witnesses +were Hipolito de Santoyo and Geronimo de Marquina, inhabitants of +Mexico. I seal it in testimony of the truth. + + +_Marcos Leandro_, his Majesty's notary. + + +We, the undersigned notaries, certify and attest that Marcos Leandro, +by whom this copy appears to be signed and sealed, is a notary of his +Majesty; and as such, entire faith and credit has been and is given to +the writs and other acts which have passed and pass before him, both in +and out of court. In order that it may be apparent, we give the present +in Mexico, March twelve, one thousand six hundred and twenty-nine. + + +_Pedro Gallo_, his Majesty's notary. +_Francisco Gallo_, his Majesty's notary. +_Alonso Cavallero_, his Majesty's notary. + + +_Act ordering the fulfilment of the royal decree_ + +In the port of Cavite, July twenty-nine, one thousand six hundred and +twenty-nine, Don Juan Nino de Tavora, knight of the Order of Calatrava, +comendador of Puerto Llano, member of his Majesty's Council of War, +his governor and captain-general of these Filipinas Islands, and +president of the royal Audiencia therein, having seen this copy of the +royal decree which his Majesty gave at the petition of Don Fernando de +Silva, knight of the habit of Santiago--who presented himself before +his Lordship in his own behalf, and petitioned that it be observed and +obeyed--and attentive to the fact that the said copy was authorized +by a notary of his Majesty, and attested by three other notaries: +ordered--and he did so order--the contents of the said copy of the +said royal decree to be observed and obeyed; and that the said Don +Fernando avail himself of it, leaving an agent appointed to attend +to the said obligations of the said encomienda. The judges and royal +officials shall note the decree in the books under their charge, +and shall observe and obey it, as is contained therein, in behalf +of the royal treasury. Thus did he enact; and he signed the same, +together with his counselor. + + +_Don Juan Nino de Tavora_ +_Licentiate Don Rodrigo Goncales de Barreda_ +_Andres Martin del Arroyo_ + + +Collated with the copy of the royal and original act from which it was +copied. It is an accurate and exact copy, and agrees with the original, +which was returned on the part of the said Don Fernando de Silva, +in order to take account of it in the royal accountancy. This copy +was made in Manila at his request, July twenty-seven, one thousand +six hundred and twenty-nine; witnesses being Francisco de Silva and +Don Juan Martin, residents of Manila. + + +_Andres Martin del Arroyo_, royal notary + + + +_Act of the royal Audiencia_ + +In the city of Manila, July twenty-seven, one thousand six hundred +and twenty-nine, the president and auditors of the royal Audiencia and +Cnancilleria of these Filipinas Islands having examined these acts in +regard to the demand of his Majesty's fiscal in this royal Audiencia +that Don Fernando de Silva, knight of the Order of Santiago, former +governor and captain-general and president of this royal Audiencia +of these said islands, give bonds to furnish residencia, for himself +and his agents and servants, for the period while he exercised the +said offices, and to pay the sum to which he should be adjudged and +sentenced, leaving behind a person with accepted powers; and the appeal +interposed by the said Don Fernando de Silva from the act enacted by +this royal Audiencia, on the twenty-fourth of this present month, in +which this cause was returned to the lord governor and captain-general, +so that, as a competent judge, he might enact what might be justice in +it, etc.: declared that, notwithstanding the said appeal, they must +confirm--and they did confirm--the said act of this royal Audiencia, +with the declaration that the said return be, and be understood, +in order that the said lord governor and captain-general may declare +whether or not he [the said Don Fernando] must give bonds to the said +fiscal of his Majesty. Thus they did enact, order, and decree. + + +Before me: + +_Pedro Munoz de Herrera_ + + + +_Act of the governor_ + +In the port of Cavite, July twenty-eight, one thousand six hundred and +twenty-nine, Don Juan Nino de Tavora, governor and captain-general +of these Filipinas Islands, and president of the royal Audiencia +therein; having examined these acts and the demand of the fiscal of +his Majesty concerning Don Fernando de Silva giving bonds to furnish +residencia for the period while he governed these islands, and for +his agents and servants, and to pay the sum to which he should be +adjudged and sentenced; the other things which he has petitioned; +the return of these acts to his Lordship by the royal Audiencia in +an act which they passed at [the reception of] the appeal by the said +Don Fernando de Silva; another act passed by the said royal Audiencia, +that, as a competent judge, the governor should enact what should be +justice in this matter; and the copy of the royal decree presented +before the said royal Audiencia; said that he declared--and he did +declare--that his Lordship was not a competent judge in this cause +to declare or order whether the said Don Fernando should or should +not give the bonds which the said fiscal has demanded for the said +residencia, or for any other thing pertaining to it; and that the +fiscal should plead in this regard what he should have to plead before +whom and with what right he can and ought. Thus did he enact and order, +and he signed the same, by the advice of his counselor. + + +_Don Juan Nino de Tavora_ +_Licentiate Don Rodrigo Goncales de Barreda_ + +Before me: + +_Andres Martin del Arroyo_ + +Collated with the original acts, which rest at present in these +archives of the office of government under my charge. This copy is +accurate and exact, according to the originals. At the command of +the said lord governor and captain-general, I ordered to be drawn +and drew this copy, in the port of Cavite, July twenty-eight, one +thousand six hundred and twenty-nine; witnesses being Don Juan Martin +and Francisco de Silva. In testimony of truth, I signed and sealed it. + +_Andres Martin del Arroyo_, royal notary. + +We, the undersigned notaries, testify that Andres Martin del Arroyo, +by whom this copy appears to be signed and sealed, is a notary of +the king our sovereign, and exercises the office of notary-in-chief +of government and war of these islands. To his copies, acts, and +dispatches, entire faith and credit is and has been given in and +out of court. Given in Cavite, July thirty, one thousand six hundred +and twenty-nine. + + +_Luis de Torres_, royal notary. +_Pedro de Valdes_, royal notary. +_Augustin de Valenzuela_, notary-public. + + + + + +Relation of 1629-30 + +_Relation of events in the Filipinas Islands and other surrounding +regions, from the month of July, 1629, until that of 1630_. + + +I shall commence the affairs of these islands with the expedition to +Jolo. It is an island of this archipelago, rebellious for years past; +and its natives, who are Mahometans, have made a thousand incursions +against us in these islands, pillaging whenever opportunity arises, +burning villages and churches, and capturing numerous people. + +In order to remedy all these evils, Governor Don Juan Nino de Tabora +determined to equip a powerful fleet in order to destroy that enemy and +conquer a stronghold which nature has made in their island--so lofty +and so difficult of approach, that there is no better stone castle; +for the approach to it is by one path, and it has some artillery +which defends it. The people are courageous and warlike. For our +fleet were collected one galley, three brigantines, twelve freight +champaos (which are like small pataches), and about fifty caracoas. The +last named are the usual craft of these islands, and generally have +thirty or forty oars on a side. All these vessels together carried +about four hundred Spaniards and two thousand five hundred Indians, +and they had considerable apparatus and war supplies. It was quite +sufficient for another conquest of greater importance than the one +on which they were going. + +All that fleet departed, then, from the port of Dapitan on March +17. Dapitan is the port nearest to the enemy, and the island of Jolo +was reached in [_blank space in the Ventura del Arco MS_.] days. At +dawn our men were landed, and began the ascent to the stronghold. The +master-of-camp, Don Lorenzo de Olaso, who was commander-in-chief of +the fleet, preceded the men. The Joloans defended their stronghold +with valor. They killed some of our men and wounded eight, among them +the master-of-camp himself. He was overthrown, as if dead, and went +rolling down the hill. However, he was not dead, but only wounded, +nothing more. Our men retired on the run, and to speak plainly, such +terror entered into them that they did not dare to attack again. They +skirted the island in their craft, entered the villages, burned, +wrecked, destroyed them, and killed a few people. They brought +back some captives with them whom the Joloans had taken from us. A +violent storm overtook them, which compelled them to weigh anchor, +and they retired stealthily. Thus so powerful a fleet as that was +lost. It was such a fleet that never has one like it been made for +the Yndias in these islands. The Joloan enemy were left triumphant, +and so insolent that we fear that they will make an end of the islands +of the Pintados--which are the nearest ones to them, and which they +infest and pillage with great facility. + +"A greater force than ever attacked Malaca from Achen--two hundred +and twenty craft; and among them thirty-three were of stupendous size +and resembled galleys with topsails, while others were medium-sized +and smaller; and they carried a force of nineteen thousand men of +the best picked soldiers, who were all ordered not to return alive +without taking Malaca. They disembarked at a river one-half legua +from here. Then they began to march with great trenches, ramparts, +and other devices until they neared the walls. After taking the mount +of San Francisco, they fortified themselves on it, and for the space +of four months they continued to batter the walls of the city. Our +artillery harassed them from the ramparts also although the trenches +and terrepleins did not allow us to do them much harm. They destroyed +all the side of Yben, Bocachina, and San Lorenzo, and did not leave a +house, palm-tree, or church. Then they attempted to pass to the Malaca +side in order to destroy its suburbs, and to attack the walls on all +sides. In order to make use of all their men, they beached all their +ships in the mire of the river. That was their total destruction, +for the reenforcements arrived on October 21, from Yndia, with Nuno +Alvarez Botello--who succeeded in the government to the bishop who was +governing and died; he had thirty-three oared vessels and one thousand +Portuguese soldiers, the flower of the nobility and soldiery of +Yndia. Thereupon the enemy retired to the river where their fleet was +stationed. The governor, without disembarking, took his station in the +entrance, where he cannonaded them for forty-six days with all of his +artillery. He had some very heavy artillery which he had brought from +Yndia, which he fired from some barges that he had built. He harassed +them so greatly with these guns that, although the enemy attacked +him in order to get out, they were unable; and finally surrendered, +or fled to the mountains and forests, one night. A great number of +them remained in our hands, and the others in the hands of the king of +Pan and those of Malay friends who aided us. They abandoned a quantity +of spoils, all their ships, artillery, etc., so that of the nineteen +thousand men there did not remain any who could rightfully carry back +the news. The Portuguese collected three hundred pieces of artillery, +counting large and small, with which the fortress was well supplied, +and artillery was sent to other parts. The versos, falcons, and +arquebuses which they captured were without number. It was a glorious +victory which our Lord gave to this city of Malaca. The neighboring +kings who were subject to Achen immediately resolved to render homage, +by sending their ambassadors." Thus far Father Azevedo. [8] + +After having gained the victory against the people of Achen, Nuno +Alvarez Botello determined to remain to winter in the region of the +south. He sent some ships to Java; and with them a large galleon +belonging to the enemy, and the commander and captains who were +captured. He kept twenty-three of his galliots, with seven hundred +picked men, in order to go in pursuit of the Dutch. + +He commenced at Humbe, thirty leguas from Malaca, where, the Dutch +have a factory for pepper. There were two Dutch ships at the bar [of +the river] which went out to meet him. The Portuguese attacked the +Dutch ship, which was a very handsome one, and had come from Holanda +the year before. They gave it a volley which fell into a quantity of +cartridges and powder, whereupon the ship blew up, although some of +the Dutch who fell into the water were picked up. Then the Portuguese +assailed the other ship, captured it, and sent it to Malaca. They +saw that there was another large ship in thus mouth of the river, +and attacked that one. The Dutch who were aboard deserted it. The +Portuguese captured the artillery, ammunition, and other things in +the ship, and set it afire. + +Learning that there was another ship [up the] river, and that it was +lading pepper, the Portuguese determined to go to capture it. They +entered the river, attacked the ship, and, without their knowing how, +it blew up. As the ship sank, a powerful suction was formed, and drew +after it the Dutch [i.e., one of the captured ones] skiff in which +the commander, Nuno Alvarez Botello, was giving his orders. The brave +gentleman was drowned there, without any one being able to help him; +and with him were also drowned his good intentions, and all that that +fleet expected to do. + +In consequence of the persecution of the king of Conchinchina against +the missionaries [9]--because the commerce of Macao had been lacking +for some time, and on account of the great drought that lasted for the +space of fourteen months--Governor Don Juan Nino de Tabora ordered an +embassy to be sent to the Said king, and for that purpose sent Father +Antonio Cardin with some presents. The father reached Turon, and thence +went to Sinao, the court of the king. The king took the presents from +him, but notwithstanding that received him with very ill grace; and, +without conceding him what he asked, made him retire to Macao. + +[To the above relation for the years 1629-1630 (which seems to be +merely a synopsis or abstract, and not a copy of the original document) +is appended the following from another and later relation:] + +In the years from July, 1630, until that time in 1632, says a relation, +there was great peace, and the Filipinas Islands prospered; for aid +from Holanda failed the Dutch, and their forces were too few to trouble +the Spanish possessions of the archipelago and the Malucas. However +the quiet was disturbed in the province of Caraga, where the Indians +revolted, and assassinated the Spaniards and the Recollect religious +who were instructing them. The leaders of the revolt were punished, +and the Indians gradually subdued. + + + + +Letters from Tavora to Felipe IV + +_News of the Japon fleet, and of the fortifications which were built +on that occasion, without any expense to your Majesty._ + + +Sire: + +I gave your Majesty an account in July of last year, 629, by way of +Nueva Espana, of the condition in which were war affairs in these +islands; and again in November, by way of Yndia, I added such new +events as had occurred up to that time. What there is to write now is +that we were advised in March of this year, 630, from Macan by the +ship "Trinidad," which sailed thence, that the Japanese were still +angry over the burning of their junk by our men in the port of the +kingdom of Sian in the year 628, as I have written in other letters; +and that they were constructing large fleets to avenge themselves on +our port and fort in the island of Hermosa, and on the city and coasts +of Manila. It was asserted that the Japanese had forty thousand men in +various ships of the Dutch and Portuguese which they had embargoed, +and in a great number of their own vessels. I thought it uncertain +news, because of my knowledge of the nature of the Japanese; yet I +resolved to make use of it to further the fortification of this city +and its environs. I suggested to the Chinese that they perform some +service for his Majesty for the relief of that necessity, from their +communal fund. They gave four thousand pesos, with which, and by means +of other efforts, I built two cavaliers and a bit of covered way with +its ledge of stone, they being built of incorruptible wood, while other +enclosures and preparations were erected in Cavite. With them and with +the fortifications which, as I wrote, were constructed last year on +another similar occasion, this city remains well fortified. And I +trust, with God's help, that when I leave here there will be much +better fortifications, so that the city of Manila and the port of +Cavite may be safer with few soldiers than they were before with +many. On account of the same news, the fortification of the island of +Hermosa was also urged forward. The commandant, Don Juan de Alcaraso, +who has it in charge, writes me that he was in such condition that +he did not fear the Japanese, even though they should come with as +great a force as was reported. The Dutch will be able to cause greater +anxiety if they should return this year to the port of Tanchuy, as +they did last. I am preparing aid, not so much as our people there +ask and need, but in accord with the little aid which has come to me +from Nueva Espana. + +It has been learned from a ship of Chinese which arrived here +afterward, and which sailed by stealth from the kingdom of Japon, +that the imprisoned Portuguese, the Dutch, and their stranded ships +were still detained there, and that there was no movement of the +fleet. [_In the margin_: "Give him thanks for what he has done, and +[tell him] that provision has been made in regard to the junk."] + + +_Aid for Terrenate_ + + +I sent the usual aid for the forts of Terrenate in the middle of +November this year, as that season is the true monsoon. It was sent +in two ships which had just arrived from Nueva Espana, together with +a patache. All three vessels were equipped, and carried a sufficient +force, so that they would not have to enter Terrenate by stealth, +or fleeing from the enemy. I was very happy over the despatch, +both for this reason and because I saved the cost and preparation of +the pataches in which this aid is generally taken. God our Lord was +pleased that, while the vessels were at a distance of two leguas from a +port of these islands where they had to lade rice and other products, +they should be struck by a very violent squall, which forced them to +drag all their anchors, and the storm carried them immediately until +they grounded. The flagship ran aground in the sand; but, the masts +having been cut down, it and the patache were put out of danger. The +almiranta grounded on reefs, where it was instantly shivered into +pieces. Its mast fell in such a favorable manner that it could be +used as a bridge by the men, who were all saved by that means. After +the storm was over, there was opportunity to remove the artillery, +the silver, and a goodly portion of the food which the ship was +carrying. Consequently the loss was only of the boat, which was quite +old. The two remaining ones were refitted, and proceeded on their +way. Inasmuch as they could not take all the provisions necessary, +I despatched another patache from this city, but it was also wrecked +on these coasts. The men and provisions were saved, and the wreck was +not due to the fault of those who had charge of the patache, as was +proved by the trial held regarding it. I immediately despatched another +patache--for in the matter of aid I leave no stone unturned--which +performed the voyage. All three vessels have returned from Terrenate, +where they entered at a very convenient season; because a number of our +men having left our forts, by order of Governor Pedro de Heredia, to +effect a junction with the men of Tidore in the town of the Ternatans, +which lies under the guns of the enemy, the latter withdrew to their +forts the ship which was awaiting the relief from us. That relief +entered Terrenate the same day on which the enemy withdrew. After the +silver and food were unladed, it was planned to sally out with the +flagship of the relief fleet, to fight with the enemy's ship; and +this would have been put into execution if two other ships had not +come to their aid that same night, which made a force very superior +to ours. It was reported that there were thirty Dutch ships in the +island of Ambueno, and that half of them were coming to Terrenate +to make a Moro, whom they wished to introduce into the government, +king of the natives; and that the others were coming to the coasts +of China, the island of Hermosa, and perhaps Manila. + +That enemy has had very little power in this sea for the last two or +three years. I am now informed by letters that eighteen ships have +come to them from Europa, and that the Javanese have raised the siege +of Jacatra, by which the Dutch will remain more free to annoy us. [_In +the margin_: "[Tell him] that what he says has been noted; and that +he proceed in everything with the prudence that is expected from him."] + + +_That the convoying of the Chinese fleet by two galleons of this state +is being discussed, as that has been asked by the viceroy of Yndia._ + + +The count of Linnares, who has just arrived to govern Yndia, requests +me to send three galleons to convoy the galliots which are bound from +Macan to Yndia, and which are called "the Chinese fleet," granting +for the expenses certain accommodations in the duties on merchandise +and the freight charges of the same trading fleet. I have discussed +the matter with the auditors, and in the Council of War. Although +it is impossible to do air that the viceroy asks, I am arranging to +have at least two galleons go, as the majority of votes were in favor +of it; and because it fits well with the determination of last year +to send a galleon to Goa for anchors and other supplies which it is +necessary to bring from that place. The principal reason is to oblige +that viceroy thereby to join his galleons with those of this state, +in order to make for once some considerable showing of force against +the enemy. [_In the margin_: "Let it be understood that it is regarded +as certain that the decisions which he shall make will be formed with +the prudence and consideration that are expected from him."] + +_Deeds of Nuno Alvarez Botello in Malaca_ + +Nuno Alvarez Botello had very good fortune against the enemy in +capturing two ships and burning two other large and heavily equipped +ones close to the factory of Jambi, which is near Jacatra. Much +greater luck did he have in raising the siege of Malaca, with the +capture and slaughter of nineteen thousand Moros from Achen who +held the city closely beset. However both events were tempered by +the death of the said captain, as your Majesty is advised through +the Council of Portugal by letters from Malaca, which are enclosed +with this one. [_In the margin:_ "Let account of all this be given +to his Majesty, although a very detailed account of the affair will +be given by the Council of Portugal."] + +_Expedition made to the islands of Jolo and Mindanao_ + +Another sort of enemies whom these islands have are the Moros of +certain kingdoms near them. Those who have been most insolent and +unbridled since my arrival in this government are the inhabitants +of the kingdom of Jolo. For their punishment (in addition to the +punishment inflicted two years ago) a fleet was prepared this year +of three hundred and fifty Spaniards and two thousand five hundred +Indians, under command of Don Lorenco Olasso, master-of-camp of this +army. After a long and troublesome voyage, he arrived late at the +island and chief stronghold where the king lives. They found the +village dismantled, and the king and his chiefs and the majority +of his men retired to a very steep hill which they have fortified +for that purpose. He attacked them at daybreak, confident that their +lack of caution would facilitate his entrance, and that the short time +remaining in which to perform that exploit would suffice. Within a very +short time he gained as far as the crest of the hill, where the stout +enclosure and works of the enemy were. And if, as he himself fought, +there had been others to assist him, he would have entered the place +and captured the king and all his household and chiefs. On the part +of our Spaniards and Indians the necessary spirit was not exerted. The +enemy held the stronghold sufficiently well in their defense, and with +the advantage of location; and did considerable damage to our men with +their artillery, spears, and other missile weapons. On that account +it was deemed better to withdraw the men from the hill and to abandon +the undertaking for the time, and to employ the army in burning the +villages and leveling the fields round about. In doing that there were +many frays with the enemy, and many of the people were killed, so that +it is thought that they are severely punished. The weather did not +allow the enterprise to be carried to a more satisfactory conclusion. + +The fleet went from that place to the island of Mindanao, which is +one of the largest islands of this archipelago, while its king is one +of the most powerful enemies that these natives have had. Just now +he is friendly, and the peace was confirmed with the coming of the +master-of-camp, so that I trust that it will last for some years. I +have increased the pay of the officers and private soldiers who +distinguished themselves on that occasion, while I am trying to reduce +that of those who did not, so that it may serve as a warning. [_In +the margin_: "When we learn the resolution which he has taken, let +report of this be made to his Majesty."] + +_Reduction of the Cagayan Indians_ + +Cagayan affairs are in better condition than formerly. Some Indians +have already been reduced to the obedience of your Majesty, and the +others are being pressed to render it. I hope for a good result. May +our Lord give the outcome which He knows to be most desirable. May He +preserve the Catholic and royal person of your Majesty, with increase +of kingdoms and states, as we your vassals desire and as Christendom +needs. Manila, July 30, 1630. Sire, your Majesty's humble vassal, + + +_Don Juan Nino de Tavora_ + + +[_In the margin_: "It is well. Have a copy of this letter sent to +his Majesty, so that he may be informed of everything."] + + + +_Government touching judicial and military matters_ + +Sire: + +After having concluded my despatch, and while awaiting that of the +royal Audiencia in order to sign it (they having before communicated +with me in session concerning the matters of which they were to +write), I learned that the auditors had sealed the letter, and that +they were sending it by a different way, as they did not wish me to +see or sign it. That is a singular innovation; but, in order to avoid +greater disturbances, I undertook, while they were assembled, to tell +them what evil they were doing in trying to make such an innovation, +which was so unsuitable; for I would not hinder them from writing +freely whatever they might judge fitting to the royal service of your +Majesty, nor would I be angry if their opinion were different from +mine. Neither were they to write anything which should be untrue, +and which I could not see; thus would they avoid interrupting by such +innovation the peace and concord with which we had lived during these +four years. I entreated them to comply with the obligations of their +office, namely, to live in harmony with their president, and to write +their opinion with the truth that is required, showing that malice +does not move them but only the desire of right action. [I told them +that] they should do as in previous years, namely, allow me to sign +the letter. I warned them of the disservice which is being done to +your Majesty in the president and auditors not being in accord; +and I protested to them that it was they who were declaring war, +since they were persisting in trying to make me suspect that they +were writing things against me which they did not dare to say to +me. That is the manifestation which they might make in case of any +treachery or knavery on my part. They had little to answer to these +arguments, but for all that they were not willing to regulate their +conduct as they should, but to persevere in their theme. That would +have obliged me to make the demonstration which the case demanded, +had I not considered rather the service of your Majesty than the +action which the vehemence of their passions deserves. + +_Attack on the orders of the government, by the auditors commanding the +royal officials to pay them their thirds [of salary], notwithstanding +any order of government_. + +2. Jointly with this they made another attack on the government, +namely, to notify the royal officials by an act that they should +immediately pay them their thirds [of salary] notwithstanding any +order that they might have to the contrary, as such was not from your +Majesty. That they said because of the order of the government that +nothing be paid without its decree. That order was given by all my +predecessors, and the auditors themselves ratified it when they were +governing, as will be seen by the enclosed records. I resented this +action, because of their boldness in trying to oppose the orders of +the government, and because of the slight foundation which they had +for it: for never was more owing to them than the third for April, +as the treasury is without a real at this time; and we do not have in +the entire city any place to get the money, and with great difficulty +are we able to get a meager aid for the soldiers and sailors. That +third is paid the auditors in June or July, which is the time when +the silver comes from Nueva Espana. And now because it arrived about +ten days ago, and their third has not been paid them, because I am +here in Cavite, attending to the despatch of the ships, they were +so impatient that, not having taken the trouble to remind me of +their need so that I might order them paid immediately, they enacted +the act above mentioned--copy of which, together with the reply of +the royal officials, I herewith enclose. Last year they themselves +asked me not to pay them the April third until that for August was +due, as they wished to receive them together. That shows how little +inconvenience follows their not having received it this year in the +month of July. Surely, all these actions are the offspring of their +natures, [and show the] duplicity and deceit with which they are +arming themselves in order to break the peace, perhaps because they +have seen that the inspector who was expected did not come this or +last year, at whose coming I was hoping to have rest. But since he +has not come, it will be necessary for me to do myself what I wished +to have done by the hand of another--namely, to give the auditors to +understand the respect which they ought to have for their governor +and president. This said, I shall now go on to answer the points of +the letter which I have heard from them themselves, and which they +say are the ones which they wrote to your Majesty. In passing, I +shall answer to that Council the chief complaints, which, I suppose, +are the ones that may oppose my method of governing. It is no little +consolation that all of them have to do with points or controversies +of justice, and not defects which transgress my obligations; for it +is those that could give me some pain. + +_That it is not advisable that the royal Audiencia carry the burden +of visiting the prison of Tondo and that of the Parian of the Chinese._ + +3. The first point is in respect to the royal Audiencia petitioning +that it be ordered that they visit the prisons of the village of +Tondo and of the Parian of the Sangleys. This does not appear just; +for although those prisons are near Manila, and inside the district of +the five leguas to which the [jurisdiction of the] Audiencia extends +(which is the argument on which they take their stand), still those +places have their alcaldes-mayor, and are separate jurisdictions, and +it belongs to those officials to make their visitation of prisons as +the Audiencia do in theirs. It is true that the alcaldes-in-ordinary +and those of the court (who are the auditors themselves) arrest in +Tondo and in the Parian by virtue of the five leguas; but they do not +put the prisoners in the prisons of those courts, but in that of the +court, or the prison of this city. The example which they have cited +to me--namely, that the prisons of the suburbs of Mexico are visited +on Saturdays by the auditors--is not well taken in this case; for those +prisons are in charge of the corregidor, and separate, because the city +is large and needs those different prisons. But the prison of Tacubaja, +which is one-half legua or slightly more from the city, is not visited +by the Audiencia, because it has its own alcalde-mayor. And it is +certain that because Sangleys are confined in these prisons of Tondo +and the Parian, the royal Audiencia is claiming the right to visit +them, for all their anxiety is to acquire very full authority over +that people. I have written your Majesty enough on this point. It +would be advisable for your service to have this royal Audiencia +prohibited from trying any cause concerning the Sangleys. + +_Causes for accepting the resignation of the reporter of the Audiencia +from his office_. + +4. The second point is in regard to their saying that I accepted the +resignation of Licentiate Umana, reporter of this royal Audiencia, +from his office. It is a fact that the reasons which he gave me for +it obliged me to do so--not so much on account of his lack of health +and eyesight, although he has that, as for the ill-treatment inflicted +upon him by the auditors, without its being possible for me to give him +any relief in it, as I am not always at the meetings. The auditors are +insufferable; and, although this man had served in this capacity for +many years, they finally had him so harassed that they daily sought +numberless excuses by which to avoid coming to the Audiencia. And +inasmuch as it is difficult to struggle all one's life in one thing +which concerns the ordinary despatch of business, I thought it less +inconvenient to accept this resignation. In the meanwhile, until your +Majesty shall provide a remedy, they have been allowed to select +whomever there is in the city. But no one satisfies them; because, +as there is no one who can endure them, there is no lawyer of high +standing who will accept the office. + +_That the auditors, are giving malicious information when they say +that the governor prevents a report of the government suits from +being made to the royal Audiencia._ + +5. The third point is that the auditors complain that I do not allow +any report of the government suits to be made to the Audiencia. As +a sample, they cite an appeal made by the friars of St. Augustine +from the edict, issued at the petition of the city, ordering all the +Sangley shopkeepers to be collected in the Parian. Although that was a +necessary measure, and the royal Audiencia had no right to meddle in +a matter so manifestly belonging to the government as the residence +of the Sangleys in this or in that part yet I am not doing nor did +I do what they say in this matter, about preventing the report to +be made--as will be seen by the acts which I enclose herewith, and +which are cited in the letter on government affairs, which mentions +this point. By those acts will be seen the very opposite of what they +tell me that they have written. + +_That those appointed to judicial offices be lawyers_ + +6. The fourth point is that they say that there are few advocates in +this royal Audiencia, as I always keep them occupied in judicial posts, +which ought to be kept for men of merit. The truth is that there +are not more than five lawyers in all the islands; and that in the +four years while I have governed here I have not occupied in judicial +offices more than two--namely, Doctor Juan Fernandez de Ledo, in the +Parian (which is an office that does not prevent him from exercising +the profession of the law, since he does that in this same city, +and already his term of office is over), and Doctor Luis Arias de +Mora (whom I have only occupied in the office at La Laguna de Bay, +which is three leguas away, and in which I maintain him because +of a petition to that effect from the provincial and religious of +St. Francis, who are the ministers in charge of those missions). They +have assured me that they have not had an alcalde-mayor for many +years who has given more satisfaction in that province. Since La +Laguna, whence are brought the timbers for the shipbuilding at Cavite, +depends greatly on the religious, and without the latter the Indians +would do nothing, and it is important to me to have there a person +of great exactness, so that the cutting and sending of wood may not +cease, and consequently, the building and repair of the ships; and +since there are so few methodical men in this country, when there +is one, I try to retain him in office all the time. In regard to +appointing lawyers to judicial offices, I have made no innovation, +for my predecessors have done the same; and such men can be not less +suitable for those offices than soldiers. Here, Sire, there is very +little for the lawyers to do, and they starve to death. Since they +are citizens and have married in the country, they must be supported, +at least so that the governors may have someone with whom to consult +in regard to the doubts which arise with the auditors. That is the +reason for the ill-will that the latter show toward them. + + +_Whence arises the opposition of the auditors to the concession of the +winepresses which have been granted to the seminary for orphan boys_. + + +7. The fifth point is that they talk of the concession of the Sangley +winepresses which have been conceded to the seminary for orphan +boys. For justification of that, I refer to a section of the letter +which I am writing on this matter in the letter regarding government +affairs, and to the papers which are cited in that letter, which are +clear enough. I know that the opposition shown to this is managed by +Licentiate Marcos Capata, who, as he has but lately been invested with +authority, has been actively engaged in attacking these winepresses, +as he thought that he was performing a great service to the community; +and as it has been made clear that the disadvantages of the matter +are not of the importance that he imagined, he is somewhat piqued. I +beseech your Majesty to consider this point and not to allow any +ill-will to disturb so excellent a work as is the completion of the +seminary for these boys, without any cost to the royal revenues and +without any damage to the community. + +_Report on the permission to gamble which is given to the Chinese +during their festival_. + +8. The sixth point is that they speak of the permit which is given to +the Sangleys to gamble during the fortnight of their festival. [10] +They allege that it is a pernicious thing for the community. I, +Sire, have been even more strict in this than were my predecessors, +who introduced it at petition of the Sangleys themselves, in order to +keep them quiet and in order to avoid greater troubles, as that nation +is by nature excessively addicted to gambling. It seems conformable +to reason that if they are not permitted to play during the year, +it be conceded to them for their festival, which is the time of their +holidays. Your Majesty has ordered that the infidels be allowed to live +according to their own customs in everything which is not contrary +to natural law, or opposed to the good example of the Christians in +whose land they live. It seems very conformable to law and to good +government to keep these men contented and quiet, and this is being +done. This country cannot get along without infidel Sangleys, for +they are the ones who bring us food from China. Consequently, it is +necessary to allow them to live in their own manner in all things which +are not prejudicial to the faith and to the light of reason. Gaming +is a matter of indifference, and although it is true that, if it be +indulged in to excess, the troubles follow which are experienced in +these Sangleys, yet those troubles are not to be laid to the one who +gives them the permission to indulge reasonably in a diversion. It +is known as a well-ascertained fact that the Sangleys will gamble, +whether with or without license; and that there are not wanting +citizens, and even sons and relatives of auditors, who will shield +them for it. Hence I have considered it as less troublesome to give +them a moderate permission (such as that which is granted to them for +their festival), and to try to prevent the danger of incurring other +and greater troubles by making the Sangleys restless and discontented, +and gaming secretly all the year in the houses or gateways of private +persons. It is true that some friars have preached against this; but I +ordered one of them, who is considered as the most learned, to give me +in writing his reasons for opposing this. Having also consulted with +my confessor and with other theologians, who Were of opinion that this +was not a matter for burdening the conscience (and I do not know why +the auditors should think that the religious who gave this opinion +allowed themselves to be carried away by their desire to natter me, +charging their own consciences in order to save mine), I am rather +persuaded that he who preached the contrary was induced to do so by +his own or another's prejudice in opposition to the government. The +opinions of both sides are in my possession, with full relation of +everything that there is bearing on this subject. If your Majesty wish, +they can be sent you very easily; and I would have done so immediately, +if they had not reminded me of this complaint at so critical a time. + + +_The foundation for the complaint of the auditors that the governor +does not allow them to visit the provinces._ + + +9. The seventh point. I am advised also that the auditors write +that I do not allow them to go to visit the provinces. I am not +aware that this subject has been discussed in my time. Neither do +I know whether the execution of it would be convenient in districts +where the Indians are so poor and so burdened with repartimientos and +shipyards, the conveyance of food and products, and other things which +are unavoidable in the service of your Majesty. If in addition to all +that, they were to be burdened with the expense of the visit of an +auditor, they would become still more crushed. However, I shall not +shut the door in this matter; and if 1 shall find it necessary for +the service of your Majesty to send some auditor to the provinces, +it shall be done. However, I am quite sure that it will not be very +easy for them to go to the most needy provinces, which are the poorest +and most remote. + + +_That there is a special book in which to inscribe the opinion of +the Audiencia when appointments are discussed with them_. + + +10. The eighth point. In regard to the appointments to, the judicial +offices and encomiendas, they say that I discuss them with the royal +Audiencia in accordance with the decree in which your Majesty orders +that, but that their opinions are not written down. Although I am not +aware that the decree orders such a thing--since it only says that +if the auditors are of a contrary opinion, what the governor resolves +shall be done, and they shall advise your Majesty of their opinion--yet +a book has been kept ready, in which to inscribe those opinions. I do +not know that any occasion has arisen where it was necessary, for of +all the propositions which I have made only one has been contradicted +by all the Audiencia, and which I tried to execute, although they +were of the contrary opinion, In the end, I did not execute it, +yielding to their judgment, and thus there was nothing to write. + + +_The little reason that the auditors have for complaining to the +city of the appointment of admiral, which was given to Captain Diego +Lopez Lobo_. + + +11. The ninth and last point that they tell me is written in this +letter is, to petition your Majesty to order that, since the posts +of commander and admiral are of the most importance of all that +are provided in these islands, appointments to them be subject to +consultation with the Audiencia. For this, I am told that they take +occasion from the appointment that I have made this year of admiral +in the person of Captain Diego Lopez Lobo--alleging that he is not +a citizen but a foreigner, and that he is interested in the capture +of the Siamese junk, which they say is reported to be valued at more +than three hundred thousand pesos. Commencing with this last, what +they say is outside of all truth, as will appear by the accounts made +by the accountant and adjuster of accounts, Juan Bautista de Cubiaga, +whose certification I enclose herewith. What Captain Diego Lopez Lobo +did was to capture that junk and bring it to Manila, in which he is +so far from having incurred displeasure, that on the contrary, by that +action alone, he merited the place of admiral which is given him; for, +besides having attained what was ordered him, he conducted himself so +honestly in the capture of the vessel that neither for himself nor for +others did he allow anything of importance to be taken--putting aboard +it a trustworthy commander with ten soldiers, who brought the junk as +it was to Manila, without wasting any of the merchandise. Thus did +he obey the order given him that there should be no sack, but that +he should bring it as he had found it, with all fidelity; since it +was not taken as an absolute prize, but by way of reprisal, as I have +written in another letter. In regard to the said Diego Lopez Lobo not +being a Castilian citizen but a Portuguese (which has been the rock of +offense to auditors and citizens, and the motive which has induced the +city to complain to your Majesty), I am not aware that it is a crime +or a demerit to be a Portuguese. Diego Lopez is a son of the second +Lopez Lobo, a nobleman, of the rank that can be easily ascertained in +that Council. He went to East Yndia in the service of your Majesty, +where he lived for ten years. Thence he came to these islands, where I +found him serving worthily with a company of infantry, which had been +given him by Don Fernando de Silva during the year while he governed, +here. During all that year and the four of my government, he has had +his house, and dwelling in Manila, which seems to be sufficient for him +to call himself a citizen. Opportunity lately offered to send him to +that court to discuss the union of the posts and arms of the South Sea, +about which I am writing in a separate letter. As he is a man who had +been under both crowns of Portugal and Castilla, and because of his +rank and good qualities I thought there was no other to whom I could +better trust a matter of so great moment. Imagining that, as it was +a service, for your Majesty, the city would consider it favorably, +I gave him charge of that matter. But since there is no other aim +than self-interest, there are few who yield their own advantage for +the common welfare and the service of your Majesty. Eight or nine +citizens--all encomenderos, the least of whom has four hundred +and fifty-six tributes--without their having killed many Moros, +[a service] for which they ought to claim a post for Castilla, +presented a petition to the city, signed by their names, by which +they asked the city to oppose the said choice. The city accepted +the petition, and sent it to me at my council, with a number of the +decrees of your Majesty, which discuss the matter of appointment +to the posts of commander and admiral--as if I had not seen them, +or looked to see whether the person of Diego Lopez had place among +them. The post of commander was granted to a citizen, the most honored +of the most honored in this city. The post of admiral for the return +voyage (which is an advantageous post) was given to another citizen, +also married in this city, and one of its worthy men. Only the outward +trip has been granted to Diego Lopez, so that he may come before the +eyes of your Majesty more fittingly, since the advantage is not more +than one-half the pay and accommodation of his own post. Eight or nine +citizens who enjoy good incomes (one of them has two or three thousand +pesos), without being better knights or soldiers than Diego Lopez, +complain. It was all contrived by one or two uneasy spirits, simply +to make merits, from vengeance at not having succeeded in obtaining +the office of stewardship of the city, and who claimed to negotiate +for a certain person who was not suitable. Here whatever differs +from and opposes the governor is done with a sinister intention, and +not through zeal for the public welfare. The gist of the petition is +enclosed herewith, in case that the city shall forget to send it. I +petition your Majesty to grant me the favor to have it examined; and +that in consideration of the criticism which they attempt to make +in it on the loyalty and fidelity of the Portuguese nation, and of +the authority which they are attempting to take in what they say, +that they did not willingly oppose the appointment of the captain of +infantry, your Majesty will order that the admonition and punishment +which their boldness deserves be given to them. I have not as yet done +that, in order to avoid greater disturbances at a time when we are +trying to effect a union of Portuguese and Castilian posts and arms +in this South Sea. That union is the only means by which to drive the +enemy from that sea. At a time when many Castilian soldiers have come +to Yndia, and when there are more than two hundred Portuguese soldiers, +alferezes, and captains in the forts of Maluco and Manila, these men +[whom I have mentioned] are ill satisfied, and are sowing schisms among +them all. Will your Majesty have this examined, and furnish the relief +that it requires. And if there be discussion of the matter of pleasing +the auditors in what they petition--namely, that the appointments +to these posts be conferred upon them--it will be better for your +Majesty to order that the posts be given to their sons and brothers, +who are the persons for whom they desire them, although those men do +not have the merits that are requisite for such places. If they had +the merits, it would not be necessary for such men to try to get them. + + +_Origin of the above complaints and others like them_ + + +12. It is a foregone conclusion, Sire, in the Yndias more than in other +regions, that he who shall govern uprightly will have many rivals; +for those who generally come hither come with the desire to hoard up +riches. That is the cause which draws them from their native place; +but, as wealth is not obtained sometimes as quickly as they would +wish, they become resentful. As it is quite natural for mean people +to attribute more to themselves than they deserve, nothing satisfies +them; and they spend all their time envying what is given to others, +and crying down their services and merits, and complaining of the +government, by murmuring openly against him who has it in charge, +and accusing him with innumerable testimonials. Some of the inferior +officials among those whom your Majesty has in the Yndias do not +avoid doing this. Such men desire that their posts be extended in +authority and profit--in authority not for the honor, for one does not +concern himself about that in the Yndias; but for the profit, which +forms their desire and fixed purpose. For if, perchance, there is a +servant, relative, or follower to whom is not given all that such an +official wishes, and whenever he wishes, and as quickly as he wishes, +the friendship is immediately broken, and the royal service pays for +it, for such a minister no longer is inclined to it, and only tries to +cause it trouble, and to work against whatever the governor proposes. + + +_Efforts which have been made to quiet complaints_ + + +13. Knowing this by the experience of four years of government, +I have taken all possible measures to regulate as well as possible +these malcontents; but since the limits of my duty to God and to your +Majesty cannot be overstepped, however much I have desired and tried +to please them, I have learned that I am very backward, and that +they are accusing me by innumerable testimonials. I petition your +Majesty to rest assured that I am serving you with great devotion and +with the desire of succeeding in what I owe to my birth. The royal +revenues are spent with great circumspection, as will be seen by +the accounts sent this year to that royal Council. Military affairs +are undertaken after full counsel. My presence in the government is +continuous. The community is quiet. The soldiers are in the best +state of discipline that can be had. The ships are despatched at +the monsoons. The provinces are reenforced at the proper time. The +cloth traded is procured with the help of the neighboring kings, +and of all your agents; and your Majesty keeps them occupied both +in Yndia and in this archipelago. The Indians are less oppressed +than ever, and, as I have written in other years, a great number of +burdens have been taken from them. No Spaniard is found who has been +ill-treated by words. What there has been to allot has been among many, +and all are supported therewith, although discontented. The city has +been fortified and beautified. Finally, I assert that I shall not +secure from the Philipinas by the end of eight years, if God give +me that long life, and your Majesty preserve me in the islands, the +dowry which Dona Madalena brought, although I live (as is a fact) +so moderately. Granting this, I do not know what more remains or +ought to be done. + + +_Permission asked by the governor to leave the Philipinas_ + + +14. I have written at this length not for fear of someone having +written against me--for to think that no one would do so would be +great arrogance--but only to give account to your Majesty of what +passes here; to ask pardon for my omissions, and that you will not +believe those who are affected by passion; and that you be pleased +to withdraw me hence, as I petitioned you last year. The toil endured +here is vast, and I have now but little strength and health to be able +to endure it, when I have so little success in attaining my loyal +desires. My agents will present memorials in that royal Council, in +which I beg your Majesty for some gratuity and accommodations with +which to leave this exile. I promise myself a very liberal one from +your royal kindness and generosity, in proportion to my services and +those of my ancestors and forbears. May our Lord preserve the Catholic +and royal person of your Majesty, with increase of kingdoms and states, +as is necessary to Christendom. Cavite, August 4, 1630. Sire, your +Majesty's humble vassal, + + +_Don Juan Nino de Tavora_ + + + + + +Historia de la Orden de S. Agustin de Estas Islas Filipinas + +By Fray Juan de Medina, O.S.A., Manila, 1893 [but written in 1630]. + +_Source_: Translated from a copy of the above work, in the possession +of the Editors. + +_Translation_: This document it translated (and in part synopsized) +by James A. Robertson. + + + +History of the Augustinian Order in the Filipinas Islands + + +_By Fray Juan de Medina, O.S.A._ + +History of the events of the order of our great father St. Augustine +in these Filipinas Islands, from the time of their discovery and +colonization by the Spaniards, with information regarding memorable +occurrences. Composed by the venerable father, Fray Juan de Medina, +[11] a native of Sevilla, formerly minister to the villages of Ibahay, +Aclan, Dumangas, Passi, and Panay, vicar-provincial of that island, +[12] and prior of the convent of Santo Nino de Cebu. Written by his +own hand in the year 1630. The annals of the religious of the order +of our father St. Augustine in the Filipinas Islands from the time +of their discovery and colonization by the Spaniards by order and +command of Don Felipe II, king and sovereign of the Espanas. + + + +Chapter I + + +[Medina's narrative opens with the expedition of Legazpi, and the +part played therein by the Augustinian Andres de Urdaneta and his +companions. Felipe II, having determined upon an expedition to +the western islands, "entrusted the matter to the viceroy of Nueva +Espana, at that time Don Luis de Velasco, a man of so great worth +in all matters, that he has never received adequate praise. The +king gave him in everything ample and most complete authority to +appoint a commander and officials, and to make with them whatever +agreements and covenants seemed most advantageous to him and to the +royal service. They were always to listen to the advice of father Fray +Andres de Urdaneta.... His Majesty stipulated that Urdaneta should, +at all hazards, be persuaded to undertake the expedition in person," +taking with him such other religious of the same order as he thought +best. The king wrote to Urdaneta as follows:] + +I The King. To the devout father Fray Andres de Urdaneta, of the Order +of St. Augustine: I have been informed that, while you were a layman, +you accompanied the fleet of Loaysa, and passed through the Strait of +Magallanes and the spice region, where you spent eight years in our +service. And inasmuch as we have just charged Don Luis de Velasco, +our viceroy of that Nueva Espana, to send two ships to discover the +Western Islands in the direction of the Molucas, and to give them +instructions how to proceed, in accordance with the instructions +given to him; and as, on account of the great store of knowledge that +you are said to possess of the affairs of that land, and since you +understand, as you do, its navigation, and are a good cosmographer, +it would be very conducive to excellent results, both in what relates +to the said navigation, and to the service of our Lord, for you to +accompany the said ships: I, therefore, ask and charge you to accompany +the said ships, and to do what shall be ordered you by the said our +viceroy. Beside the service that you will thus render to our Lord, +I shall be very greatly served, and shall have account taken of this +matter, so that you may receive the favors that offer. Valladolid, +September 24, 1559. + + +_I The King_ +By order of his Majesty: +_Francisco de Eraso_ + + +[Of Urdaneta, father Fray Esteban de Salazar remarks that "his devotion +and sanctity cannot be briefly told, while a book would be required +for his military prowess and deeds." He was the foremost navigator +of the time, and "had added the wind called _huracan_ by sailors to +the compass. The sailors believe that when this wind blows all the +other winds, in number thirty-two, are blowing, and that only one wind +results, with a whirling direction from pole to pole." A brief review +of Urdaneta's life follows. His youth was largely spent in the Italian +wars, and his later years in the South Sea. He accompanied Loaysa's +expedition in 1525. "Joined to his so wide experience was the fact +that he was a man skilled in cosmography and astrology ... and he +was therefore best suited to discover the return passage to Nueva +Espana from those islands, a thing regarded as very difficult, and +never yet done, although attempted." He had joined the unfortunate +Saavedra expedition at the islands in an attempt to find the return +passage, but they were forced to put back to the Moluccas. Shortly +after his return to Spain, he went again to New Spain, where, in 1542, +"Viceroy Don Antonio de Mendoza appointed him general of the fleet" +of the new expedition. "He begged off, as he loved his quiet, ... or, +because he feared for the success of the expedition.... Therefore Ruy +Lopez de Villalobos was appointed in his stead; but his voyage was +very unfortunate. Afterward, tired of the world, and disillusioned of +it, Urdaneta took the habit of our father St. Augustine in the famous +convent of Mexico--where he dedicated himself so thoroughly to matters +of religion and virtue that one would believe that he had been reared +to their observance all the days of his life, so forgetful was he of +what he had seen in the world, as if he had never lived in it. But +when he seemed to be enjoying the greatest quiet and repose, God drew +him from his cell, and placed him in charge of new navigations...."] + + + + + +Chapters II and III + + +[Upon the receipt of the king's letters, the viceroy of New Spain, +"with the concurrence of the Audiencia, summoned father Fray +Andres de Urdaneta, and after having delivered into his own hands +the letter that had come for him from his Majesty, intimated to him +the importance of the expedition and the great spiritual advantages +that would accrue from it." When urged to accept the trust, Urdaneta +responded that he must first communicate with "his superior, who +stood to him in place of God." The consent and order of the latter +was readily obtained, and Urdaneta accepted the expedition "with +so great joy and gladness, that the fire that glowed in his heart +was well shown by his eagerness." In continuation of the project, +"the viceroy took measures to establish a shipyard in Puerto de la +Navidad--one hundred and twenty leguas from the city of Mexico, and +situated in nineteen and one-half degrees north latitude--so that three +or four ships of different burden might be made;" for this expedition +was not only to discover routes, but to colonize and take possession +of the islands. By the advice of Urdaneta, "Miguel Lopez de Legazpi, +an illustrious gentleman, and one of great prudence and valor, and +above all, an excellent Christian," was chosen as commander of the +expedition, the viceroy carefully consulting the friar so that a good +choice might be made. [13] In discussing the voyage, Urdaneta "proposed +that they should first go to discover Nueva Guinea. He expressed the +great advantages that would arise from this, the chief being that it +could be the stepping-place to the whole world. Nueva Guinea is near +the equator, and stretches east three hundred leguas and north live +or six degrees. On this account it has been doubted whether it is +mainland, because it extends so far toward the Salomon Islands [14] +or the Straits of Magallanes. However, now that the opposite coast +of Magallanes has been navigated the doubt has been destroyed, and it +has been discovered that it is not a continuation of that land, but an +island surrounded by the water of the South Sea. Father Urdaneta had +discovered this island in company with Alvaro de Saavedra. In the year +of 28, he returned to this land and anchored, when wrecked by terrible +storms that they experienced, which forced them to return. Then they +did not land, but from the coast, the island appeared very pleasant, +and displayed good anchorages and ports. Its inhabitants are black, +tall, robust, and well built in general. Hence, Father Urdaneta thought +it advisable to go to this island first, and make a few entrances, +until they could discover its products, and if it were fertile and +suitable, to colonize it. If it were not suitable, still, some one +of its ports would be of great importance, to serve as a station for +all the other expeditions, which they might wish to make to all the +islands of the archipelago, which are innumerable and nearly all +undiscovered." The viceroy, while not opposing the opinion of the +friar, and even giving him to understand that it would be followed, +at the end gave a different order.] + +[For the voyage the Augustinian provincial, with the concurrence of +the other religious, selected the missionaries who were to be "the +foundation stones upon which that church was to be established:" +the prior, Andres de Urdaneta; Martin Rada, "the most eminent man +in the astrology of that time," who proved of great aid to Urdaneta +in scientific lines; Diego Herrera, who was to spend "all his life +in the Filipinas, with great temporal and spiritual gain, until +at last, he lost his life in the year of 76, when he was drowned;" +Andres de Aguirre, who was also to spend all the rest of his life +in the islands, making two journeys to Spain in their interest; +Lorenzo Jimenez, "who died while waiting at Puerto de la Navidad +to embark;" and Pedro de Gamboa. When all was about in readiness to +sail, the viceroy Luis de Velasco died. In eulogizing him, Esteban +de Salazar says: "Of his virtue and valor, and his Christian spirit, +we cannot speak in sufficiently fitting terms, for he was the light +and model of all goodness and for all Christian princes. Although he +lived amid the treasures of the Indians so many years, he kept his +soul so noble and so uncorrupted, and his hands so continent, that +he died poor." Notwithstanding the death of the viceroy, preparations +went on. Legazpi, on arriving at port, took inventory of his men, and +found that, counting soldiers, sailors, and servants, they amounted to +more than four hundred. There were two pataches and two galleys. The +flagship was the "San Pedro," of about four hundred tons' burden; +the almiranta was called "San Pablo," and was under command of Mateo +del Sar (_sic_). In this vessel embarked Fathers Diego Herrera and +Pedro de Gamboa; the others sailed in the flagship. "A grandson of the +general, named Felipe de Salcedo, a lad of sixteen, also embarked. He +afterward attained great prominence in the islands, and is therefore +given special mention here." A native, Pedro Pacheco, brought from the +islands on the return of the survivors of the Villalobos expedition, +was also taken as interpreter. The two pataches were in command of +Alonso de Arellano and Juan de la Isla. After Legazpi had given his +instructions to the officers, the fleet set sail November 21, 1564, +the men all having invoked the blessing of God upon their voyage.] + + + +Chapter IV + +_Of the voyage made by our religious to the Western Islands_ + + +Great undertakings are wont never to lack their obstacles, which +although they do not fail to unnerve those of feeble intellect, yet +seem to serve only as spurs to the lofty-minded, to make them not +abandon what is undertaken; and these latter show greater courage, +when Fortune shows herself most contrary. And the devil, when he +divines that any work is on foot that may be for the service of the +Lord unless he can hinder it, at the very least manages to impede +it, and does his utmost to render it of none effect. Thus in this +departure, they did not fail to have their misfortunes, but having +conquered these by their courageous souls, they continued their +voyage. For four days had they ploughed the waters of the sea, when +the general thought it best to open his Majesty's despatch and read +the instructions given him, and find the route that he was ordered to +take. The instructions were given him under lock and seal, and he was +ordered not to open them, until he had sailed at least one hundred +leguas. For the opening of the instructions, he had all the men of +account in the fleet assembled; they found that, in accordance with +his Majesty's decree, they were ordered to go straight to the islands, +now called Filipinas. When they were reached, a portion of the army +and the religious were to remain there, while Father Urdaneta, with +the other portion of the fleet, was to return in order to establish +the route, until then unknown, as this was the object and chief +purpose of his Majesty Father Urdaneta was extremely sorry at this, +for he had always been given to understand that his opinion would be +followed on this voyage. But it was certainly considered best by the +Audiencia; for, besides their fulfilling in it his Majesty's will, +they observed that the journey to Nueva Guinea embraced many things, +and Father Urdaneta could not discover so quickly the return voyage +from the Filipinas to Nueva Espana--and this was the chief aim of +that expedition, and the object of greatest importance that was sought. + +After they had understood, then, his Majesty's will, by the +instructions that were read in their presence, all obeyed them as loyal +vassals, and in pursuance thereof, began to lay their course, which +with so certain a beginning as that of obedience and the sacrifice +of their own wills, already promised a prosperous end. They changed +their course, descending to the nineteenth degree, in which lie the +islands of Los Reyes [15] and Corales. [16] From this point they +began to take a direct course to the Filipinas. In order to do this, +an order was issued to steer west by south, and all the fleet was +ordered to do the same, and, as far as possible, not to separate from +the flagship. But should the vessels be separated by any storm, they +were given to understand that they were to follow the said route, +until they made some of the islands of the Filipinas, where they +would all meet. Upon this they again invoked the most sweet name +of Jesus, and sailed with favoring breezes until they reached the +ninth degree; and then the commander again called an assembly to +discuss the voyage. There they took the latitude, and all the pilots +disagreed by as much as a point of the compass, some of them making +it two hundred leguas more than the others; and they could agree on +neither the latitude nor the daily runs. + +Father Urdaneta asserted that the Corales Islands had already been +passed, and that they were farther on their journey. Accordingly he +gave orders to make the tenth degree and sail toward the Arrecifes [17] +and Matalotes [18] Islands, which are very much farther. They sailed +along this course until January 9, when they discovered land. They went +closer to it, and saw a small island, which was seemingly about three +leguas in circumference. It was covered with trees and cocoa-palms, +but as it was surrounded by reefs, they could not anchor at it. They +sailed about the island, and spied a settlement situated among +some palms, and some Indiana on the shore. But they were likewise +unable to anchor there, for, on casting their anchor, they found +more than fifteen brazas of water. Finally a small boat was lowered, +which contained Father Urdaneta, together with the master-of-camp, +Captain Juan de la Isla, and Felipe Salcedo. They reported on their +return that those people were friendly, well disposed, and gentle; +that they had no manner of weapon, either defensive or offensive; +that they were clad in reed mats, very fine and well finished; and +that the island contained many excellent fruits, fish, Castilian fowl, +and millet. They reported also that the Indians were full-bearded. On +this account those islands were called Barbudos. They did not stop at +these islands, or at any of the others that they sighted afterward, +where, certainly, our religious would leave portions of their hearts, +melted with fire and love for their fellow-creatures, to all of whom +they would desire to give a portion of the light that they carried, so +that those peoples might be withdrawn from their dense darkness. But +since now they could do no more, they would commend them to God, +so that by His goodness He might open the door for them which He +was now about to open to the other islands, for those people had +been redeemed no less than the others. In short, they continued to +pass those islands, obedient to the orders that they must not stop +until they should teach Filipinas. At those islands it was better +ordained that the seminary should be established, so that from that +point the light and instruction might spread to the shores of other +islands. Without any doubt, the Filipinas are the best suited for this +purpose, as they are near great China, and not far from Japon, Siam, +and Camboja, while even the land of India is said to be within sight; +and the islands are surrounded by an infinite number of other islands, +inhabited by immense multitudes of people. + +The fleet set sail and left those islands of the Barbudos--and now +the route to the Filipinas is very far from them. Next day they +sighted another island, Which seemed of vast extent. But when they +had arrived nearer, they found some small barren islands, stretching +north and south, to which they gave the name Placeres. [19] In the +afternoon another island, upon which lived many birds, was sighted, +and they named it from the birds. From this point they continued, +to discover islands and barren islets, all of them in the latitude +of ten degrees; and they gave various names to them. Here Father +Urdaneta ordered the vessels to ascend to the thirteenth degree, so +that by running westward and turning their course to the southwest, +until they reached twelve and one-half degrees, they might reach +the Filipinas. On Saturday, January 22, the Ladrones Islands were +discovered, so called because their inhabitants are robbers, to as +great an extent as possible. They are very different from the natives +of the other islands, whose goodness is such, that they do not know +what it is to steal. And if I admit that there are many robbers [in +the Filipinas] they have become so since the Spaniards, have governed +them; for the natives learn our bad habits better than our good +ones. Hence they are quite expert in all the vices of the Spaniards, +but dull and ignorant in their virtues. In this is seen the bias of +their disposition, and that they are much more inclined to evil than +to good. Father Urdaneta said mass in these Ladrones Islands, and gave +their inhabitants to understand, as well as he could, the purpose of +his coming, making use likewise of the interpreter Pacheco. Possession +was taken of those islands for the king, our sovereign, with all +the solemnities of law. The natives expressed great satisfaction +with everything; for, as they are by nature robbers, they assured +the Spaniards, in order to commit their depredations better. And not +few were the jests that our Spaniards endured from that people, all +out of respect to the general, who with his goodness, bore it all, +claiming in this wise to win the hearts of those islanders better +than with arms. For if the natives were exasperated they would receive +tardily the blessings that were intended for them. + +This island of the Ladrones where the Spaniards anchored is a lofty, +mountainous land, with its coasts fringed with thick cocoa groves, +and other cool and shady trees. The natives of the islands eat rice, +which is the chief food of all the islands. At times, when I consider +how many people use rice as bread, I think that three-fourths of the +world are sustained on this kind of food. These Ladrones Islands number +thirteen, [20] and extend north and south. As they were the first +islands of which the general took possession, his Majesty granted them +to Melchor Lopez de Legaspi, only son of the general, giving him the +title of adelantado. These Indians go naked. Both men and women are +fine sailors and swimmers, for they are accustomed to jump from their +little boats after fish, and to catch and eat them raw. Their boats +are very narrow, and have only a counterweight at the opposite end, +where they carry their sail. The sail is lateen, and woven from palms, +in these craft do they venture forth intrepidly through those seas, +from island to island, so that one would think that they had a treaty +with wind and water. The ships en route to the Filipinas pass through +these islands, at different latitudes at various times. So many boats +go out to meet them, that they quite surround the ships. The natives +try to trade water and the products of their islands for iron, the +substance that they esteem most; but, if they are able to steal the +iron, without giving anything for it, they do so. It is necessary to +aim an arquebus (which they fear greatly) at them in order to get +the article returned. And to induce them to leave the ships free, +there is no better method than to fire the arquebus in the air, the +reverberations of which cause them to hide, fear, and vanish. While +the ship in which I took passage was passing one of the islands, +many small boats came out as usual. Among them came one belonging to +a robust youth, who was coming to look for a Castilian, who had been +his captive, as he desired to see him. This Spaniard, with others +who escaped from the ship "Santa Margarita" (which was wrecked on +those islands), lived among those barbarians, until, by good fortune, +the ships with succor passed there, and they embarked in them. The +Spaniard, who had been the slave of this Indian, was with us. As soon +as the latter saw him, he boarded our vessel fearlessly. And still with +no signs of fear, he went among our men and threw himself into the +arms of the man whom he knew, and who had eaten his bread and lived +in his house. He was quite covered with marks of teeth; and when the +Spaniard, who knew something of their language and customs because of +his stay among them, was asked the reason, he said that that native +had but just been married, and the dowry that he had given was to +receive those bites from his wife without murmuring. In that way do the +women elect and choose their husbands. The native was loaded down with +scissors, knives and iron. With all this load he dived into the water, +and at the moment he was thought to have gone to the bottom, because +of the weight of his load, he reappeared quite at his ease, placed +his load in his little craft, then got in himself, and hoisted his +sail. He himself attended to all the duties of steersman and lookout, +and ploughed those seas as if his craft were a powerful galleon. The +household economy of these, as of the other natives, is uniform, as +will be told later on; so that all appear as if cut out by one pair +of shears--notable indications that they are all lopped from one trunk. + + + +Chapter V + +_Of the discovery of these islands_ + + +They continued their voyage toward the west, until the thirteenth of +the above month, on which day land was sighted at eight o'clock in +the morning. That point marks the beginning of the Filipinas Islands, +which name was given to all these islands, in the year 42, by Ruy Lopez +de Villalobos. Anchor was cast in a bay forty-five brazas deep. Then, +at the general's command, the master-of-camp, Father Urdaneta, and +some soldiers with them, landed, and went to see whether the island +contained any town or people with whom they could talk. And although +they brought report of none of this, they found quite sufficient +information next day from some Indians who came to the flagship, +who furnished them with the desired information regarding those +islands. The commander received them kindly, and presented to them +some small trifles, of little value--which, however, they esteemed +highly, as they were novelties and unknown to them before--and they +went away happy. When they were going, they were told that they +could treat for friendship and alliance with the Spaniards without +any fear. Those Indians, drawn to the Spaniards by both the kindly +treatment and the presents given them, talked to their tribesmen. As +a result, the next morning the ships were surrounded by their little +boats, all full of Indians of all ages. Among them were some chiefs, +who told the Spaniards that they wished to draw blood with them, as +a proof of the constancy with which they would keep the friendship +that was to be made with them. This ceremony consists in drawing +some drops of blood, generally from the arms. These drops they mix +together, and afterward mix with a little wine, which is then drunk +by the two or more who bled themselves and who wish to contract the +friendship. The commander rejoiced at this, although he refused to +draw blood himself, reserving that ceremony for the king, or supreme +head of all the islands. Accordingly the master-of-camp drew blood +with them, and then they became seemingly firm friends. The commander +regaled them as well as he was able, and bestowed not less attention +on them. As a result they appeared well pleased, and bound to make +similar returns. They promised to do many favors for the Spaniards +in the future. + +Through this care, the islanders continued to frequent the vessels +fearlessly. The commander treated them according to their rank, +and showed himself kind and affectionate to all. He believed that +he could accomplish more for God and his king by that way than by +the din of arms. As soon as the father prior, Fray Andres Urdaneta, +considered them somewhat quiet and less timorous than at first, he +began, as a true curator of souls, to tell them the chief purpose of +the Spaniards' coming through so wide and vast seas, ploughing the +waters in those vessels of theirs; this he declared to be none other +than to give them light, in order that, issuing from the darkness +of the ignorance in which they had lived for so many years, they +might know the true God, the creator of the universe, and His only +begotten Son--who became man for our redemption and our release from +the slavery of the devil, lived in this world among men, and finally +died, so that by His death we might have life and liberty. He declared +that the imparting of such truths to them was the duty of the fathers +and priests who were in the vessels, who would take nothing else upon +themselves, so that these natives, guided thus by the right way, might +also enjoy salvation. The others, he said, although they were of the +same nation, desired to settle among the natives--not for any evil, +but only to trade in the things of which the natives had abundance; +and at the same time to protect them and defend them from their +enemies, who, envious of their good fortune, might try to make war +upon them. Likewise they would maintain the natives in all peace and +quiet, so that, on this account, the latter might devote themselves +more thoroughly to their occupations, either at home or abroad, +without any fear of harm befalling them from the Spaniards, if they +on their part regarded thoroughly the laws of the friendship that had +been entered upon with so many ceremonies, according to their manner +and custom. In all these negotiations, the Indian Pacheco proved of +great use. Through what was said to him, and from his own experience, +he endeavored to persuade the natives to do what would be so much to +their advantage. The natives showed themselves very well satisfied +at everything, and agreed to everything without any repugnance or +opposition. After this the Spaniards requested the natives to sell them +some food; for they needed food, because of their long voyage. The +natives promised the food generously and willingly. The men in the +fleet waited until next day, believing that the natives would surely +fulfil their promise, since the promise had been made with so many +appearances of affection. The natives came then, but brought no more +than one cock and one egg, and said that they were collecting the +other food in their towns. Now at this the general recognized the +islanders' faithlessness and malice, and that they were entertaining +the Spaniards with words alone, and that they were only awaiting a good +opportunity to work some great mischief. The gallant gentleman bore +it all, in order not to give any grounds for any possible complaints +from the natives. On the other hand, he set about finding a better +port, in order to have it against the occasion already feared by the +tokens observed in those fickle people. To this end he sent Captain +Juan de la Isla to look for a good port. He and his men went to a +bay, where the Indians met them peaceably, and showed signs of a +desire to draw blood with them. But our men dared not trust them, as +they feared some calamity or treachery. One of our gallant youths, +an attendant on the commander, by name Francisco Gomez, declared +his intention to draw blood with them; and without more consent, +suiting the action to the word, he landed, and began to loose his +clothing for the ceremony. But scarcely had he uncovered his breast, +when suddenly an Indian pierced him with a lance, and he fell to the +earth dead. This unlooked for event caused our men great grief. It +confirmed their fears, and showed them how little they could trust to +that faithless race. Our commander was likewise mocked by the Indians, +who seeing that they had enjoyed his presents, and that the Spaniards +were still mild and discussed only the question of concluding the +temporal affairs, now came no longer to the ships, and not one single +Indian appeared. This made the commander somewhat anxious, and his +anxiety was increased by the non-return of the small-boat, and he +feared greatly that some ill-fortune had befallen it. On this account, +he determined to weigh anchor with all the fleet, and coast along +the island in search of ports, rivers, or settlements, and not less, +provisions, of which now they were in sad want. Accordingly they set +sail at nightfall, and next day sighted another bay, which they named +San Pedro, as it was the eve of St. Peter's preaching in Antioch. At +that place one of the chief Indians, nephew of Tandayag, chief of +that island, came to see them. He came, on behalf of his uncle, to +draw blood with the commander. He was received courteously, and the +commander made much of him, and asked him to bring his uncle, with +whom he would draw blood willingly; for it was not reasonable that the +commander of the Castilians, the ambassador of so powerful a sovereign +as the king of Espana, should draw blood with less than the supreme +ruler of the islands. This argument satisfied the barbarian, and be +declared the commander's remark to be very reasonable. Accordingly +he would have his uncle come, both because the request of _Basal_ +was reasonable--_Basal_ was the name given by them to the commander, +and this name is given even now to all the governors, whom they have +called and call Captain Basal (_id est_, "captain-general")--and +also because, as he said, he knew his uncle was very willing to make +peace with the Castilians, and to live under their guardianship and +protection. The commander bestowed generous gifts upon him, and sent +him away very happy. He went away, to all appearances, making them +a thousand promises that the natives would bring them very willingly +all the provisions, and everything that they requested, as alliance +and friendship with the Castilas [i.e., Castilians]--as the natives +called, and still call us--was of great moment to them. But neither +they nor the many others who came fulfilled their word one whit, +so that our men were made to understand that they came only to see +and note what kind of men ours were, their arms, and how they could +rid themselves of them. For they immediately thought that friendship +with the Castilians would be of no use to them, because those who +were then the rulers of the natives would afterward behold themselves +under the yoke, serving as slaves. This they considered more than the +good of the soul, offered to them, to which they paid no attention; +nor did they desire it, as they were content with their _anitos_, +wassails, and innumerable other superstitions that had been handed +down from father to son since time immemorial. + +When this was considered by the commander and the religious, the +former, by the advice of the religious, sent Captain Martin Goiti to +explore the river of Tandayag, and to find out, on the way, whether +any good port existed along the coast, where safe anchorage might be +had. He was ordered strictly to do no harm to the Indians. He took +father Fray Diego de Herrera with him. I beg the kind reader to note +that there is no sign of any action, in which, if one of our religious +took part, he did not play the principal role. One is led to think +that the Lord wished them to be the explorers in everything. The +commander had so good an opinion of our religious, that he trusted +to nothing without them, nor had any confidence in the good outcome +of any undertaking without them. He chose, as an excellent Christian, +to attribute all his prosperity to the servants of God, in whom he put +greater trust than in his own strength. For at the end difficulties +are removed more easily by prayers than by human strength; and God +always desires that the glory of things be attributed to Him, as the +one who really does them. He who does not guide himself thus is in +great error. And if, by the same reasoning, one attributes anything +to himself, God makes of no account his intents; so that, whereas he +expected to derive from it honor, he derives disgrace. This I think +the reason of so many lost opportunities, so many ruined fleets, and +the ill-success of other fleets, for perhaps no thought or heed had +been given to God. But it was quite apparent how little confidence our +commander placed in his own honor, since he would allow no action to +be passed over without our religious, in order to attribute it to God, +whose in truth it was. As soon as the commander had despatched the +frigate or patache, [as] the governor, he landed, and took possession +in his Majesty's name. Father Fray Andres de Aguirre said the first +mass. This taking of possession was observed before a notary, with +all the solemnities requisite and necessary. From that point, the +commander ascended a creek, toward the town of Coyongo He took Father +Urdaneta and Father Aguirre with him to talk to the inhabitants, and to +endeavor to make them peaceful. Arrived in sight of the town he found +that the Indians were hostile. They were drawn up in squares according +to their custom, and by their cries demanded battle. The commander +did not permit any harm to be done them, but tried to inform them, +through his interpreter, of his reason for coming. But it was of no +avail, for the natives answered that the Castilians' words were fair, +but their deeds evil. When the commander found his efforts of no +avail, he went down the creek. The Indians imagined he was fleeing, +and with loud cries followed him. They threw such a shower of stones, +and they were so troublesome, that the commander was obliged to face +about to censure them. He fired a few arquebus shots, but with so +great mildness and moderation that it served only to frighten and +not to kill them, but it was effective. + +Captain Martin de Goiti, who, as I have said, went to explore the river +of Tandayag, had no better success with the Indians than the above; for +when he tried to take in water in a river, an Indian came out from the +thicket, and throwing his dart, transfixed a servant of the captain, +so that he died immediately. The frigate advanced, and discovered a +large river, and a large settlement, with many rice-fields, herds of +swine, and Castilian fowls. Thereupon they thought it unnecessary +to make any further explorations. Goiti learned that the town was +called Cabalian, and thereupon returned to inform the commander fully +of his expedition. The latter was much cheered at this, because +of the little result obtained by his efforts in Tandayag, and the +time and presents that he had lost. The commander removed his fleet +to Cabalian. Upon his arrival there, he landed some men, so that, +accompanied by Father Urdaneta, they might offer the inhabitants +peace. Scarcely had the embassy been announced in Cabalian, when the +Indians filled the shore and sea with their _barotos_ [21] and boats; +for they had heard already of the commander's kind treatment, and had +been informed concerning the gifts and presents that he gave. Among +them came a youth, the son of the chief of Cabalian, who came to +draw blood with the commander. He was received courteously, and the +alferez-general, son of the commander, drew blood with him. He said +that when the ruler of that town should come, then the commander +would draw blood with him. That youth, named Camatuan, assented to +everything, for never does the swindler consider that he must pay +or fulfil anything. This visit allowed the people of Cabalian time +to collect all their best possessions and food, which they removed +that night, thus mocking the commander. + + + + +Chapter VI + +_Continuation of the preceding_ + + +The commander saw that all his good and earnest efforts had been +frustrated, and that the natives of the islands had mocked the +Spaniards openly; because hitherto they had suffered no ill from the +latter, but only the above-mentioned kind treatment and hospitality, +which would have proved sufficient to attract a more unruly race. But +such is the characteristic of this race, which has afflicted and still +afflicts the priests. These people refuse to do anything thoroughly; +and in order to get them to perform what is ordered of them, one must +use the lash and the rattan--whence comes the saying of a holy bishop +of these islands, namely, that on that day when was born the Indian, +next to him was born the rattan, with which the dust was to be beaten +from his back. And if we ministers have experienced this after so +long a period of cultivation and teaching, what must it have been +at the beginning? Accordingly, I am not surprised that the Indians +were so ungrateful to General Miguel Lopez de Legaspi, turned their +backs on all his offers, played such sorry jests on him, and broke +faith immediately--for the Indians do not possess it. And even after +he had participated in their bestial ceremonies of drawing blood +and drinking the blood--a token of constancy among the Indians--the +latter, it was found, failed to observe them just as readily as the +friendship had been confirmed by these customs. The commander began to +suffer almost extreme want, for already he had provisions for but two +days, and was compelled to seek them. Hitherto efforts, such as men +of so generous souls and so desirous of peace could make, had been +made. But the Spaniards saw that they were not advantaged, and that +need was tightening the cords, so that, if they did not look for food +in a different manner, they would doubtless perish at the hands of the +Indians, a thing quite opposed to charity. Hence, it was permitted the +Spaniards, in order to sustain life, to take food by harsh means, since +indeed kind measures did not suffice. Nevertheless, the commander, to +be justified, took counsel with all the others before doing anything +of importance, for he would rather err with the advice of all, than +succeed through his own single action. He called a council of war; +he communicated to all the condition of affairs, and what efforts had +been made with the Indians in order to make firm peace, and to buy from +them with money the food necessary for their sustenance. This, he said, +it was impossible to negotiate with the Indians. Now necessity forced +the Spaniards to get food by severer methods, since the Indians had +repulsed mild measures so obstinately. When the commander stopped +speaking, he ordered every one to express his opinion. Thereupon, +the father prior, Fray Andres de Urdaneta, arose and spoke first, +as was his custom, because of his experience and his offices, and +because all the Spaniards regarded him as a father, from whom must +originate the remedy. He said that natural law conceded to them the +right to get provisions by the readiest means, in order that that +fleet, which had been constructed for the good of those barbarians, +might not perish. Even if the end of their coming had not been so +great and important to those peoples, it was a well-known wrong +to refuse them the intercourse most natural to men, without the +Spaniards having given any occasion for it. Inasmuch as they were +reduced to the preservation of life itself, they were justified in +taking arms, wherewith to get the sustenance that the Indians had +unjustly withheld from them and refused them for their money. _Quibus +necessarium tunc est bellum_. Therefore, he considered war justifiable, +since by no other way had any remedy been found among those unreasoning +barbarians. But before commencing war, he said, a solemn declaration +of the wrongs should be made, of which the Spaniards would be, in +no manner, guilty, since they had labored so sincerely for peace +and harmony. Father Urdaneta's advice was concurred in unanimously, +as was usual. Accordingly, his advice was followed on this occasion, +as being the sanest and most sensible. + +In order to put the decision of the conference into execution, +the governor ordered Martin de Goiti to land with fifty well-armed +soldiers. By means of the interpreter, Pacheco, he was to announce the +articles of peace to the Indians; and declare that, if they did not +accord what was so reasonable to all, then they should prepare for the +war, which, from that moment was proclaimed on them as rebels. The +Indians paid no more heed to this than to all the rest that had +been told them. Thus it was necessary to make use of their arms. The +arquebuses were fired more to scare than to harm the Indians; for, as +soon as those natives heard the report, being so little used to them, +their terror was so great, that, without awaiting more, they abandoned +the shore and village, fled to the hills, and allowed the soldiers +to collect the swine that were found there, and the fowls and rice +that they could carry away. All this was appraised at its just value, +and the money given to the chief's son, whom the commander still kept +with him, in order that he might take it to the village. He was also to +inform the inhabitants that the need of the Spaniards compelled them +to take by force of arms what the Indians refused to sell for money, +and nevertheless after they had been able to accomplish what was seen, +yet they were paying for it, which was a sufficient indication of the +Spaniards' fair and open proceeding, so contrary to what the Indians +had done. He was ordered to return with the reply, notwithstanding its +tenor. Since he was ruler of that village in the absence of his father, +he should reduce the people to obedience, and counsel them to do what +was so thoroughly to their interest. Camutuan, who listened to all of +the above, and seemingly assented to it, took the money and promised +to fulfil his charge with success. But as soon as he left the ship, +he acted just as the others had done; for in their method of acting +all the Indians are cut out by one pair of shears. To a greater or +less degree, all of them are a unit. Whoever has seen one of them, +might well say that he has seen all. The chiefs, by the very fact +of their chieftaincy, should have some better mode of procedure; +yet they are so little better than the others that it can scarcely +be perceived. The commander, who was aware that that matter must +be settled finally with arms, yet did not wish to leave anything +undone. Consequently, to procure the peace justly, he determined to +leave that village of Cabalian and go to another, called Manchagua, +where report said that the first Spaniards had landed. To this end he +despatched the master-of-camp and Father Urdaneta ahead to offer peace +to the chief of that village by means of a present. The commander +went with his fleet from this village to the island of Camiguin, +where he succeeded likewise in finding no people, who but recently +were all to be found. Our men made many other efforts, and even took +as intermediary a Moro factor of the king of Burney, who was there +at that time. The latter said that the governor had captured him in a +battle with the Portuguese. I do not discuss that battle, in order to +consider only the essential thing pertaining to us religious, namely, +the planting of the faith, the fundamental reason for this history. But +in passing, I merely observe that our forces gained many glorious +victories over the Portuguese, for the latter were exceedingly sorry +to have the Castilians for so near neighbors, and tried to drive them +out. Perhaps they were influenced in this by having as neighbors those +who had a better right and reason to the Molucas than themselves. This, +I think, must have been why our Lord favored the Castilians' cause +the more. Perhaps had the Portuguese examined the matter more closely, +they would not have given the Castilians so many occasions for glory, +nor have demanded investigations so greatly to their satisfaction--or +rather, [as it proved,] their loss. + +Resuming, then, the thread of my history, I say that this Bornean +youth, who was well versed in affairs of the islands and knew +their chiefs, because of his continual communication with them, +wished to repay the Spaniards for the kind treatment that they had +given him--or rather he wished to obtain their good will, in order +to regain his liberty. He began to treat for peace, and to harmonize +discordant spirits, so that affairs might be meliorated, by reason of +what the Spaniards requested. He assured the islanders of the great +moderation which the Spaniards would exercise toward them, and that +they would commit no wrong or violence. He accomplished this with so +good grace, that he brought the chiefs Sicatuna and Sigala before the +commander. These chiefs drew blood with our men, and made a lasting +peace. But none of these exploits was important, because they found +it all tiresome and inconvenient to continue of one mind. + +Already was the season well advanced, and our commander was anxious +about the affairs of Nueva Espana. He desired to give a good account +there of his expedition, and feared lest, by the delay, they might +doubt his success or care. He was right in correcting this wrong, +because, although no doubts arise where confidence is, yet all +the kingdom was in great suspense; for the patache "San Lucas," +which sailed with our fleet, had scarcely gone two hundred leguas +from Puerto de la Navidad, when it maliciously separated from the +others. After pillaging those islands, it returned to Nueva Espana, +and said that a storm had separated them, and that, without doubt, all +the rest of the fleet was lost. For that reason, then, the commander, +to allay the fears caused in Nueva Espana by the delay, called a +council, according to his custom. There he proposed the questions +that had arisen concerning that matter, which he himself had already +considered. He besought all to counsel him in this as to what would +be best for their convenience, honor, and reputation, and as to what +means should be taken to fulfil all their commission. The strongest +reason that he adduced was the discovery of the return passage to +Nueva Espana; and he said that that had been the most potent reason +for the construction of that fleet. In short, the unanimous reply, +given through the mouth of Father Urdaneta, was that it was very proper +to ascertain correctly the return passage, since by it, the kingdoms +of Nueva Espana and even of Espana, would be strung together, as they +say. The flagship "San Pedro" was selected for the voyage, as being, +in their opinion, the strongest and best able to resist so new and +unknown seas, as were supposed to exist on the return trip. Meanwhile, +the almiranta "San Pablo" and the patache "San Juan" were to stay among +the islands, although it was judged better to go to the island of Sugbu +[Cebu], where the Spaniards had been several times already, and where +they were known. Also they believed that, if they should experience +any difficulty, they would be justified in making war there, because +of the treachery that its inhabitants had shown to Captain Hernando de +Magallanes--whom they had killed treacherously with many of his men, +at a banquet, where they had been invited in good faith. Besides that, +those Indians had offered themselves for the service of the king of +Espana, and many were baptized, in the time of the said captain, +who afterward apostatized. This was a very strong and sufficient +foundation, upon which father Fray Andres de Urdaneta and the others +based the right to make war, in case that the Indians refused to +receive them peacefully, as was their pretense. All approved this +opinion. However, I must note here the strongest reason that they ought +to have alleged, unless they must have neglected and passed it by as +being so well known, in order to find others more constraining. When I +read the various opinions of the doctors regarding our right to make +war on the western Indians, although they are somewhat sufficient, +that which has most real power to quiet the conscience--while those +who opposed it can only be esteemed as rash--is the concession of +Alexander VI which is, in brief, as follows. + +[Here follows the portion of the bull of Alexander VI of May 4, 1493, +included in _Et tu tanti negotii ... auctoritate et jurisdictione +facimus, constituimus et deputamus_.] [22] + +Since, then, the supreme pontiff says that he can give, and does +really give them, he would be rash who could have any scruples about +the right of our kings to possess these provinces, and the right of +the conquistadors therein to make war, since the latter did it by +order of their kings. For who doubts that the supreme pontiff, who +never was known to be tyrannical or unjust, had not well considered +his powers in order to make this concession? The reasons that could +influence his Holiness are not unknown, but they are rather for the +schools than for this place. The above has been given with the end +of quieting the consciences of the conquistadors, and of sealing the +mouths of the ignorant, since whatever scruples do or can arise in this +matter are settled so completely by Alexander VI's brief. The soldier +has no call to judge or investigate the justification of the war, +as the doctors unanimously agree. It is sufficient that he consider +it as not manifestly unjust, and that he consider his king--as we +all do ours--as so Catholic and so good, that he will war upon no +one without a very just reason. For the justification of a king in +matters of conscience, the declaration of the first rule is sufficient, +namely, the certain knowledge of the Roman pontiff. + +Hence, according to the above, the opinions rendered by Father +Urdaneta in two grave councils seem very apropos. But for soldiers, +it is better to take our stand upon this conclusive argument namely, +that those islands belong to our Catholic sovereigns of Castilla and +Leon, by concession of the pope, and by the reasons that influenced him +therein. Accordingly, the Spaniards may make port wherever they wish, +may request provisions in exchange for their money, may establish +towns and cities, erect redoubts as if in their own land, and make +war on whomever opposes them, as they are unjustly prohibited [by +such opposition] from doing what is right. + + + + +Chapter VII + +_Of the arrival and landing of the fleet at the island of Sugbu_ + + +Having resolved to follow the advice given, our men set sail, and +directed their course toward the island of Sugbu [i.e., Cebu]. They +anchored there on the twenty-seventh day of the month of April, +day of the glorious martyr St. Vidal, in the year 1565. This day +happened to be also the feast of the resurrection. They honored the +saint as their patron and advocate. His feast is kept every year, +and his day observed. The flag is unfurled with the greatest pomp +possible, but that is little now, because the city of Santisimo Nombre +de Dios, founded there, has greatly declined. A regidor unfurls the +flag. He is assigned therefor by the city, that is, the cabildo, to +whom the city grants his gratuity. On this day, the [image of the] +most sacred child Jesus, which rests in our convent of San Agustin, +is taken out, and carried in procession to the cathedral, after a paper +has been signed, by decree of the justice, that it will be given back +to the same religious. The ecclesiastical and secular cabildos come +to our house to take part in the procession, the prebendaries say +mass, and a religious of our house preaches. After the fulfilment +of these duties, those who carried the most sacred child carry it +back, and the spiritual feast is ended. [23] In the afternoon there +is a bull-fight, as extensive as their means allow--but that, as +I have said, is slight. The island is long and narrow, and extends +north and south. It has but little rice, as the dry seasons there +are generally long. Once it was excellent for cattle, and the herds +multiplied to such an extent that there was no room for them on the +land. The milk was of fine quality, and the cheeses which were made, +and are still made, are the best in the islands, and are esteemed as +such. But the cattle have decreased so much, that the ranches that had +a thousand cows now have but the name of having been there. The best +ranch always was the one that belonged to us, located something like +three-quarters of a legua from the city, for it had about two thousand +cows; but scarcely does it preserve five hundred today. The cause of +this might have been from the Indians not eating beef in the beginning, +and their dogs not disturbing the calves. But now the Indians eat beef, +and the fields are full of unruly dogs, so that between them both, +the cattle are a thing of the past. Only the fathers of the Society, +as in all districts, have the good fortune to preserve their estates, +and maintain their cows in the said city; so that it may be said +that they sustain the city, which nets them not a little gain. The +fields are full also of a weed called _amores secos_, [24] which is +not good for the cattle. Furthermore, the island is barren, for which +reason the Spaniards abandoned it, and established the seat of their +government in the island of Luzon, where at present is located the +city of Manila. The city [of Nombre de Dios] lies in that part where +the vendaval blows, so that the waves and surf are blown against +their houses. Lying in front of and very near to Sugbu is an island +called Magtang, where Captain Magallanes was killed years ago. It +is a low-lying land, and now with so few inhabitants that they do +not reach fifty; but when the Spaniards arrived there was a greater +number. [25] There are two channel-entrances, with one strait between +the two islands. It is not of even width but is narrow in some places, +and wide at others, in accordance with the points and bays between the +islands. One mouth lies toward the brisa, and is deeper and narrower; +the other to the vendaval, shallower, but wider. Hence by this latter +mouth no ship with high freeboard can enter, but they enter by the +other mouth. The port has so deep water right next the shore, that the +ships anchor on the sand. The fort is now located quite near, and is +mounted with excellent artillery. The ships of our Spaniards passed by, +and anchored here. They found many people; for truly the island was +thickly populated, and with the most warlike people of the country, +as has been seen when they have joined with the Spaniards. They have +performed excellent exploits in the service of the Spaniards, and have +aided them in conquering the country. The old inhabitants assert that +when the Spaniards arrived, the town of Sugbu was so populous that its +houses extended from Mandave to San Nicolas, which is, I think, more +than one and one-half leguas by land. Now there are so few inhabitants, +that there are not three hundred tributes in the town of San Nicolas, +which is the town proper of Sugbu. They are separated about one-quarter +legua from the city of the Spaniards. [26] It is the best port of +the island today, and might have been very good, if affairs there had +continued to improve. But as cities are maintained and grow through +trade, and the trade there is in wax, which is of little value, +its citizens are abandoning the city and going to Manila. While the +climate of the latter place is not so good, nor the country so healthy, +they are drawn by the wealth there, and the trade with China, Japon, +Macan, and India--and above all, with Nueva Espana. + +I believe, if a small ship were to leave this city of Santisimo +Nombre de Jesus--which is the second in these islands, because that of +Caceres in Camarines, and that of Segovia in Cagayan [27] have already +declined--for Nueva Espana, that, beyond any doubt, the city would +return to its former prosperity. But it does not appear possible, +for the city has no citizens with capital who care to engage in the +building of any vessel. The city has a garrison of one company of seven +hundred soldiers, more or less at times, and other extravagances. It +has an alcalde-mayor, who acts as governor. He is also captain of +the company of the presidio, and usually is supreme chief of all the +Pintados. The latter are so called because all the male Pintados +tattooed their entire bodies with so excellent and well-designed +symmetry, that the best artist in Espana could learn from them. The +women tattooed the hands. But the proper name of these islands is the +Bisayas. Many tongues are spoken in them, for there are many islands +and many villages, and there is hardly a village that has not its own +dialect. But the chief tongues are the _Boholan_, which is spoken in +Sugbu, and the _Hiligain_, and they are very similar. These islands +have a bishop, whose see is located in the city of Santisimo Nombre de +Jesus. That city has a cabildo with its dignitaries, but in name only, +for it has no income. The bishops have been to blame, because they +have not been very active; for our sovereigns, through their piety, +would have assigned stipends, had these been proposed to them. This +bishopric has a large territory, and, in my opinion, is larger and +more extensive than the archbishopric of Manila. For it includes +the islands of Leyte, Samar, and Ibabao, [28] where the fathers of +the Society are carrying on their missions. This island was formerly +densely inhabited with Indians, but now the population is much less, +as is that of all the other islands. This bishopric includes the +island of Bohol, which is in charge of the same fathers. It can +be seen from the plaza of Sugbu, from which it is slightly more +than three leguas distant. I shall have to speak of it later. This +bishopric includes also the island of Panay, more than fifty leguas +distant, which is in our charge. We have thirteen convents there, +besides two more in the island of Sugbu, and besides the other three +belonging to seculars in the same island of Panay. [29] This island +is the granary of all the islands of this archipelago, and I shall +need to speak of it many times. This bishopric includes the island +of Negros, so called from its many Negrillos. It is bounded on one +side by Sugbu. In short, the islands subject to this bishopric are +almost innumerable. It extends to the great island of Mindanao, which +is said to be larger than that of Manila, [30] and to be inhabited by +an infinite number of people. By our neglect the worship of Mahoma has +gained an entrance there. One would believe that those demons attended +to, and still attend to, those fables of theirs, more than we to our +truths. Many of the islands about Mindanao have the same worship. On +one side are the islands of Cuyo and great Paragua, where abundance of +wax is gathered. War generally prevails in the Pintados. This offers +great danger to those who go there, and more to the religious who go +there most often. And although our fleets have made sallies, I have +never seen them have any luck--either because they did not wish it, +or because the Indians' boats are so light that our caracoas can never +overtake them, the worst people of these islands thus succeeding with +their great depredations. This matter will be referred to later; +for some time past we have lost sight of our men, whom we left +disembarking at Sugbu, armed and ready for whatever might happen. + +An Indian named Tupas was the chief of that island. Although all manner +of efforts were made with him, he refused to come to good terms with +the commander. He continued to occasion innumerable delays, while, +on the other hand, he negotiated with his men to arm and oppose the +Spaniards, according to their custom--so that not only would they +defend their country from them, but even finish them all, doing to them +the same thing that their ancestors had done to Magallanes's men. For, +he said, those foreign nations could bring them no advantage, but +would deprive them of their liberty, which they enjoyed as rulers of +the land. Furthermore their _babaylans_, who were their priestesses, +made every effort so that the Spaniards might not set foot on land; +for the devil, with whom they were in accord, seeing that his reign was +about to end, acted with more than usual vigor through his infernal +ministers. But when the Lord is pleased with anything, there is no +effort that can disturb Him. Hence when our commander beheld the +Indians preparing for the defense, and filling the shore with their +lances, darts, campilans, and long shields (which they call _carasag_), +and the sea with their boats--to which they give many names, which +we pass over--although the commander saw all this, still he did not +neglect to announce peace, by means of the father prior, Fray Andres +de Urdaneta, and by public act of the notary. But it had no better +effect than the preceding efforts. Hence he ordered his artillery to be +discharged, somewhat high, so that he might frighten and startle them, +without doing them any harm. This succeeded as he expected, for those +people, little accustomed to similar reports, immediately abandoned +the shore and sea, fleeing more quickly than they had gathered. Thus +our men landed without any opposition. The Indians are much more nimble +than the Spaniards, and it is very easy for them to run through their +land, while it is difficult for us. Our men were unable to enter and +obviate the danger, for, when the firearms were discharged, they set +fire to some houses. These were burnt, inasmuch as their material is +very inflammable, and with them much food, which, in short, was the +greatest loss, for there was great need of it. Without doubt all the +village would have been burned had not the wind been contrary, and for +the time being favored the other houses, so that they were not burned. + +[The eighth chapter of Medina's narrative relates the finding of +the image of the child Jesus, which had been left in the island by a +member of the Magallanes expedition. Our author exults over this find, +which he extols as miraculous, and asserts to be the "greatest relic +... of the islands."] + + + + +Chapter IX + +_Of the subjection of the Indians of Sugbu to the king of Espana_ + + +After the above acts, it appears that affairs began to brighten; for +those Indians, after witnessing the kind treatment extended to them, +and seeing that the Spaniards were more affable than they appeared on +the outside, promised very fair reciprocity. The commander endeavored +to ascertain their reason for refusing to the Spaniards provisions +and entrance into their land, so decidedly contrary to the laws of +hospitality. They answered that they were afraid that the Spaniards' +object was to call them to strict account for the death of Magallanes +and his men, and that they had come for no other purpose. They thought +that his mildness toward them was only for the purpose of quieting them +so that he could later take sharp revenge more easily. The commander +believed that they spoke the truth in their reply, and promised to do +them no injury whatever for that crime; for on the one hand that affair +was already forgotten, and, on the other, the Spaniards' intention was +to establish and maintain among them friendly intercourse. Hence, the +first step and measure was not to be vengeance, whereby, necessarily, +the natives would be exasperated. Moreover the commander told them to +bring their chief to him at all hazards, for he wanted to conclude +matters at once, and sign the peace. Thereupon, the Indians went, +but did not heed the request at all; for, as I have remarked before, +this race is generally faithless and obstinate. On the contrary, +the Indians endeavored to do all the harm possible to the Spaniards, +killing them when they found them alone, and attacking them in their +usual rushes, and with outcry and uproar--their peculiar action in +war or attack. When the commander saw that his hopes were in vain, +and that those barbarians had no intention of acting well, he began, +as a good captain, to prepare his camp. He cleared away the palms +from his camp, and intrenched himself carefully, in order that when +the Indians, according to their custom, should attack him, the result +would not be so harmless to themselves that they would not regret +it. The Spaniards then began to make their raids into the land, +collected what food they could find, and captured what Indians they +met. Once they were so fortunate that, besides bringing back to the +flagship quantities of rice, and many swine and fowls, which food +was being despatched with all rapidity, they captured six Indian +women. Among these was one who occupied so commanding a position +that she promised to have Tupas come to the flagship, by means of +her husband, who was one of the foremost chiefs of the island. + +At this time, the commander began to be established in the island, +and accordingly desired to discuss the founding of a city there, +to be called Santisimo Nombre de Jesus. He marked out the lines, +assigned homesteads, and began to apportion them to those who were +to remain there. It was all done according to the plan of Father +Urdaneta, who was the chief mover in everything. He marked out a +triangular fort, which was constructed rapidly; for the commander +took charge of one side, the master-of-camp of another, and the other +captains of the third. A site was assigned for the cathedral. Also +a site was given to our order, so large that, of a surety--and I +agree thereto--the liberality of the Christian commander can only be +praised, as well as the zeal of our religious, whereby it appeared +that that must amount to something important some day. They did not +found their house, as one author says, in the house where the most +holy Child was found, for that house was next to the cathedral. There +is a very poor hermitage there today. It must be venerated more +greatly, for as the devotion went on diminishing, so likewise did +the worship. Its roof is of nipa, or palm leaves, which are used as +roofing for houses. The sides are boards, and no care, so far as I +know; is taken to sweep it. Our convent is situated very far from it, +on the shore, which is swept by the vendaval. Between its rock wall +and the shore, which is but a short distance, is to be seen the first +cross erected there by our men. [31] Now it has a stone base, and +it is enough that it has not been destroyed, inasmuch as we take but +little care of antiquities. Although the convent should be the best +and most esteemed in the province, as it is, in short, the ancestral +house that declares very well our antiquity in the islands, it is, +I know not why, the poorest and neediest. It may have been that, +as all the wealth passed to Manila, and the capital of the province +was established there, this other city was neglected; or because, +as the city was declining, so likewise the convent declined. After +the above-mentioned acts, those first conquistadors were ordered +to make a solemn procession. The whole fleet took part in it, and +carried the best ornaments that they could. The most holy Child was +carried in this procession to our house, and placed on an altar as +decently adorned as was possible in that early period. The first mass +of those islands was celebrated there, with more spirit and devotion, +than music and splendor. At its conclusion, all took a vow to celebrate +annually the feast of the finding of that relic--the twenty-eighth of +April, when, as above stated, the feast of St. Vidal is observed. A +fraternity of the Most Sacred Name of Jesus was then established, with +the same rules as that of St. Augustine in the City of Mejico. This +was the beginning of that religious province, this its first stone, +and this the first foundation--which, beyond all doubt, began from +that very moment to promise very great increase. Because of this +rock being hewn out of the mountain of its eternity, it fell to the +earth with so small an appearance to the eyes, that it seemed a mere +pebble. But so great was it in its efficacy, that it has increased +so much, that it became a mountain, which occupied no less a space +than the whole earth. Hence did those holy religious trust that the +foundations of that small stone would increase so much that, within +a short time, they would be extended throughout the islands, and that +the islands would become subject to the worship of the true God; while +everything pertaining to the demon, who held those islanders deceived +with innumerable impurities and indecencies, would be wholly cast out +from them. These deceits were of such a nature, that had it not been +for the feeble intellect of the natives, they would have themselves +withdrawn the latter from their blindness. + +In the afternoon of the same day, it appeared that the Lord began to +take account of the service rendered Him; for he brought ambassadors +from the chief, requesting an audience of the commander for the +morrow. The commander consented to receive him, and sent the chief +a white cloth in token of safe conduct, and that he would be immune +from harm. Before Tupas's arrival, the governor--for he was already +given this title--called a council to discuss whether it would be +expedient to grant the natives general pardon for the killing of +Captain Hernando de Magallanes; and whether they should recognize +the king of Espana as their sovereign, and pay some tribute as +acknowledgment. Our men decided upon the first two, but left the +third for a better occasion, in order not to exasperate those who +were showing signs of obedience. But truly there was little to +scruple over, since, with good reason, it was quite proper that the +Indians should aid somewhat in an expense so great, as it was being +made in their behalf. For up till then four expeditions had been +despatched, and the Spaniards who have come here since then are without +number. Accordingly, since the government is now established, when +the profit accruing from the islands is considered, as well as their +expense to his Majesty, the latter is beyond any doubt the greater; +besides, Espana is dispossessed of her sons, and the religious orders +of their most illustrious members, who all perish in these islands, +without any hope of their ever quitting mere beginnings and having +any value _per se_. This I consider, beyond all doubt, as the greatest +expense and worthy of consideration; for the mines yield silver and the +forests wood, while Espana only yields Spaniards. It may give so many, +that it may become barren, and be obliged to rear children outside, +in place of its own. Thus all the foregoing indicates the great zeal +of our sovereigns, and that only the love of souls influences them; +since the expenses of temporal things are so heavy and the profit +nothing. But I hope, through most merciful God, that the spiritual +blessings are so many that not only will they equal but surpass +the expense; so that if from so heavy expenses resulted only the +salvation of even one soul, as says a doctor, our monarchs would be +sufficiently remunerated. But it is quite evident that the souls +saved are innumerable; for had not the Lord His chosen ones here, +He would not have imbued the hearts of our monarchs to persevere in +the discovery of these islands; after their discovery, with their +colonization; and, after their colonization, with their conservation +at so much expense to them. Moreover, the hopes for China and Japon +are very great. In Japon, not only are they hopes, but we already +see that land sprinkled in all parts with the blood of innumerable +martyrs, and as excellent as the primitive church could have. And +with such risk, what harvest can not be awaited? Will it be a slight +glory for our sovereigns, in the future, that God has chosen them as +the instruments to enrich His church with so notable martyrs? Indeed +I think that their Majesties have understood this very well. Thus, +beyond doubt, their fervor will continue to increase, and will +encourage this field, where the Lord gathers so much fruit daily. + +Returning now to our subject, I say that, as the third article of the +tributes, while they were irresolute and leaving it for another day, +the chief Tupas was announced. He was so humbled that everything +was concluded to the governor's taste. Tupas made long excuses for +his delay--which were accepted then. But he said that he was quite +decided to make peace with the Castilians, and to serve them with +all his men; since he recognized that, although his were the more +numerous, they were inferior in valor to the Spaniards. The natives +wished from that moment to consider the Spaniards as their seigniors, +and the latter's king as their king. They offered what vassalage was +right in recognition of subjection. Thereupon, they signed the treaty +of peace under the most advantageous conditions. All was done by act of +notary. The governor, in his Majesty's name, gave them a general pardon +for the death of Magallanes and his men. He received them under his +tutelage and protection, not only to protect them from their enemies, +but also to preserve them in peace and justice, as other vassals of +their Majesties are preserved. All the Indians rejoiced greatly at +this, thus showing that the continual fear of their sin had made +them regard so little the courtesies that they had received. They +promised amendment in the future, and called upon time to be witness +of everything. As to the tribute and recognition, they said that the +governor should consider the amount, so that they could deliberate over +it. The governor answered that, for the time being, he would assign no +tribute; and that they should bring what they deemed fitting, since the +Spaniards would be satisfied with little. For that action, he said, was +only to show that they were vassals of that one whom they had verbally +acclaimed as their sovereign. The governor made them many presents, +and showed them all kind treatment; whereupon, they took their leave, +to all appearances quite in harmony. The governor was very happy, +for he thought that, with that labor, which was not of the least, +the undertaking was ended. But that succeeded as the others had done, +for the chief did not return, although the governor had him summoned, +and begged him to comply with the treaty and agreement, which had been +confirmed by so many oaths. But he did not lack excuses to allege. It +was understood fully that, because the Indian never lacks plenty +of lies, all this was only to make time in order to await a more +suitable occasion. Our men dissimulated, for already they were about +to despatch the flagship, for which preparations were going on apace. + + + + + +Chapter X + +_How Father Urdaneta discovered the return passage to Nueva Espana_ + + +Now were preparations for the sailing well advanced, and the season was +already well forward, and the governor had all that was yet lacking +concluded without any delay. He assigned the men for the voyage, +and as commander of the ship "San Pedro," chose his grandson Felipe +de Salcedo, a youth of tender years, but possessed of great courage +and valor. He subordinated him in all things to the advice of Father +Urdaneta; the latter was the one who had been expressly ordered +by his Majesty, to discover the [return] route, hitherto unknown +to everybody. For company and counsel, Father Urdaneta took father +Fray Andres Aguirre with him. They set sail June 1, 1565. The voyage +was prosperous and better than those made now, which are so full of +hardships and dangers, as will be seen in the proper place. Father +Urdaneta took charge of the ship, for as soon as they had left Sugbu, +the pilot and master of the ship died. Even to this circumstance +can one ascribe its good fortune, as a ship governed by so great +a religious. Setting sail, then, with the vendaval, within a short +time they reached the outside of the channel. The ships sailing from +Manila do not do this, and are much delayed, because they must run +a greater distance within the channel and among more islands. This +is not the least danger of the vessels in sailing from the bay of +Manila. They need the brisa or east wind; but when the shoals of Silay +are reached, they need the vendaval. But, when they sail, they usually +go at the height of the vendaval, and many times the ships encounter +great danger, and lose their anchors, and are even wrecked. This does +not happen in Sugbu. But they leave port with the vendaval, and get +clear of the islands, and in less than twenty hours reach the Spanish +sea. They pursue their course with the same vendaval, which brings +them to the Ladrones Islands. At this point navigation is difficult, +for east winds prevail here, which take vessels going to Nueva Espana +by the bow. Hence, it is necessary to present the side of the vessel +to their fury, and to look for north winds. Thus they go forging +their way until they reach thirty, thirty-six, or forty degrees, +and one has gone as high as fifty degrees. There northwest and north +winds are generally blowing, and with these they descend to the coast +of Nueva Espana. In those latitudes great cold is suffered. By the +above account the difficulty of this voyage will be realized, for +in sailing from Sugbu, which lies in twelve degrees, or from Manila, +in thirteen degrees, to Acapulco, in seventeen degrees, a deviation +so disproportional as ascending to thirty-four or forty degrees is +made. On account of this difference in temperatures, very many of +the crew fall sick, die, and endure very great hardship, since the +voyages are necessarily long; hence we can say that they make the +voyage twice over. In passing, will be declared how deserving of +thanks from their state were our religious, and what great service +they performed for their two Majesties--the divine and the human--in +discovering, with so much toil, this course, which had been impossible +hitherto. In addition, not less were their exploits in the islands, +in planting the faith therein. Many religious, moved by their zeal, +have made these journeys two or three times. Many men died on this +voyage, chiefly for lack of proper nourishment. And reason shows how +little they must have taken, since no land would give it to them; +for, at the best, they could then only get fowls, swine, and rice +(which was their chief food) from the Indians. Thus the entire weight +of the voyage was loaded upon the shoulders of our Argonaut, who made +it; and he so carried himself that he shirked no toil, although of an +advanced age. Every day he cast the lead, took observations, and did +everything that seemed advisable for that course. Hence it was God's +will that he reached Puerto de la Navidad on October 3, after a voyage +of four months and three days. On arriving at port, he made the chart, +showing all their routes, winds, points, and capes--so completely, +that even today his chart is followed without any additions. For I +believe that that chart included everything to be comprehended in that +very wide gulf, which is, without doubt, the greatest known. From +there he went to Mejico. His return caused not a little wonder in +that kingdom, and he was considered as an extraordinary man; for he, +invested with the habit, had discovered what so many and so notable +men had failed in, and could not accomplish. It was an undertaking +that God had reserved for our holy order. Father Fray Andres de +Urdaneta remained but a short time in Mejico, for he found a vessel +about to sail to Espana, and he took passage thereon, together with +his companion, father Fray Andres de Aguirre. He arrived in Espana +safely, where he informed his Majesty fully of all that he had done +in his service, in obedience to his order; and also of the state +of affairs in Filipinas, and the necessity for their succor, if the +undertaking was to be continued. His Majesty granted him audience with +great kindness, and considered himself well served in all that had been +accomplished. He gave orders that father Fray Andres and his companion +should be supplied with all necessities while they remained at court. + +Father Urdaneta settled all matters pertaining to these islands +very carefully and satisfactorily. When everything was concluded, +he requested leave of the members of the Council to return to Nueva +Espana, where he desired to finish his days in peace. The Council asked +him to wait a while, so that after his Majesty had concluded affairs in +Flandes, with which he was very busy, he could hear him at leisure and +remunerate his great labors. Father Urdaneta replied that his object +in coming to court was only to inform his Majesty of what had been +ordered him, and he was sure that in the services that he had performed +after he became a religious (reward for which he wished from God alone) +he had no other aim than to obey his superiors, and at the same time +to serve his Majesty for the alms and favors that he had granted +to the Augustinian order in the Indias. Finally, they had to grant +him this permission, although first his Majesty granted him audience +very willingly, and showed himself as capable in those matters as in +all others of his kingdom and seigniory. Thereupon, the two fathers, +Fray Andres de Urdaneta and Fray Andres de Aguirre, took passage for +Nueva Espana, where they arrived in good health, after much wandering +and shipwreck. Father Urdaneta lived after this, until June 23, 1568, +when our Lord was pleased to take him, to reward him, as is believed, +with His eternal rest. At his death he was seventy years old, less +some months. He wore the habit for fifteen years, which we believe +were of great merit; for he was ever an austere religious, very poor, +very humble, and beyond belief obedient--things which in heaven he +will have found well gained. Father Fray Andres de Aguirre, Father +Urdaneta's companion in his wanderings and labors, remained in the +province of Mejico until the year 1580, when he returned to Filipinas, +moved by great and powerful reasons, namely, sentiments of holiness +and the increase of those provinces. He was made provincial, and as +we shall see later, he went again to Espana, where after negotiating +all that he wished with his Majesty, he returned to Mejico. Here he +despatched all the affairs with which he was charged, and settled +down to a life of rest. But in the year 1593, he thought he was not +employing well in a life of rest the health that God had given him, +and therefore returned to Filipinas, where he served our Lord for +the rest of his days, until he died, to enter upon the joy of eternity. + + + + +Chapter XI + +_Of what was passing in the Filipinas_ + + +It appears that matters at Sugbu were now running more smoothly, for +that chief, the husband of the Indian princess (whom the governor +ordered to be treated with consideration), collected as much as he +could carry, and came into the governor's presence, to give it to him +in exchange for his wife. The governor, who saw the way opened for a +great stroke, told him that his wife was not a captive, nor did the +Spaniards come with any intention whatever of capturing the people, but +rather to give liberty to those who were captives. There was his wife, +and he could ascertain from her what treatment had been shown her, +and he could take her away at once, together with what he had brought +to ransom her. As soon as that barbarian heard this, he wept for joy, +and threw himself at the governor's feet, which he tried to kiss. He +said that the Castilians were in truth good men, and that the reports +that the Indians had had hitherto were malicious. The people that +acted thus could only have good bowels and a guileless heart--this is +their peculiar mode of expression. His wife was given to him, whereat +he was very happy. They talked so well to the Chief Tupas, that he +came in the morning with a great following of his slaves, friends, +and relatives, the most gallant that could come in his train. All, in +sincerity and without pretense, offered themselves again to the service +of the Castilas [i.e., Castilians], as they called and continue to call +the Spaniards. Three of the fathers remained in the island, namely, +father Fray Martin de Rada, father Fray Diego de Herrera, and father +Fray Pedro de Gamboa. These began, with great assiduity, to study +the language, to endeavor to teach the Indians, and to instruct them +in the holy mysteries of our faith. The Indians listened closely and +attentively to them. He who accomplished most was father Fray Martin +de Rada, who, being a man of great imagination, in a short time laid +up great riches, and made considerable gain among the natives. And, +in fact, when I was in the island of Sugbu in the year 1612, as +a conventual in the convent of the natives, called San Nicolas, I +saw a lexicon there, compiled by father Fray Martin de Rada, which +contained a great number of words. This must have been of no little +aid to those who came afterward. The fathers did not dare baptize +the Indians immediately; for, on the one hand, they feared their +fickleness, since they knew with what ease those who had received +baptism in the time of General Magallanes, had apostatized. Besides, +the fathers did not know what orders would be given them, or whether +they would be commanded to retire. Thus they were very considerate +and circumspect in everything, but did not neglect, for all that, +to labor in the field, in order that they might afterward gather +abundance of fruit. + +The religious endeavored to have the children of the most prominent +people come to the convent, or to that house wherein they were living, +in order that they might give them instruction, and teach them to read +and write. Since they were the newest plants, necessarily they would +receive the teaching better, and the new customs would be impressed +more easily upon them than on those already hardened and petrified in +their old customs. The Indians assented readily to this, for already +with their subjection, they felt some indescribable superiority in +the Spaniards which obliged them to regard the latter with fear and +respect. Much more so did they regard the fathers, upon seeing the +reverence with which the captains treated them, who always kissed +their hands on seeing them. This custom has remained even until the +present in the islands. However, they do not kiss the hand, but the +habit or girdle. I suppose that the fathers' modesty would not permit +the captains to kiss the hand, and they substituted therefor the habit +or girdle. Upon the Indians seeing this, they have followed the same +custom. Consequently, as a rule, when an Indian comes to talk to a +father, he kisses the latter's hand. With this instruction that the +fathers continued to give the youth, the Indians were becoming more +harmonized, and began to lose their previous horror of the Spaniards, +and on the other hand, to love them. Most of them begged the fathers +to please make them Christians. + +A miracle which happened at that time aided in this. A fire catching +in some of the soldiers' quarters on a holiday (namely, All-Saints' +day of 1566), many houses were burned, among them that in which the +fathers were living. Meanwhile another and larger house was being +built. The religious had erected a bamboo cross at the door of the said +house. The bamboos are very thick in those islands and so plentiful +that they are used for masts and yards for the caracoas; and they +make the best, for they are very strong, of slight weight, and can be +raised and lowered easily. Then the fire breaking out so furiously +had burned more than thirty houses within an incredibly short time, +and among these was ours. The flame enveloped the cross on all sides, +but did not burn it, or even smoke it. When the religious saw the +present marvel, they had the bells rung as a sign of rejoicing. Upon +the Spaniards and Indians coming to see what was the matter, they +looked at it not without great wonder, for wonder was caused by the +fire's so great respect for that cross. From that time the natives +began to have a deeper idea of the mysteries preached to them by the +religious, since they saw the proof of them with their own eyes. + +Another miracle almost similar happened in Nueva Espana, when that +great pirate Franco Draque [i.e., Francis Drake] was coasting those +shores. He was English by nation, but had been reared many years +in Espana; [32] so that the proverb which says, "Rear a crow, and +it will tear your eye out," might be fulfilled. When this man was +passing through the Strait of Magallanes, and coasting the southern +shores, then much neglected, many were the depredations that he +committed. He set fire to whatever he found, and burned it in his +fury. When he arrived at the coast of Colima [in Peru], there was a +shipyard in one of those ports, where a frigate was being built for +the pearl-fishery. It was already completed below its cabin. Draque +ordered it fired, and such was its material that it was quickly +converted into ashes. Hut a cross which had been raised above the +cabin was uninjured by the fire, as a thing against which flames have +no power. Running through the land and along the coasts, the citizens +of the town of Colima came to the cabin, and among its ashes saw the +cross, clean and shining. This gave them no little consolation, and +they regarded that occurrence as a miracle, namely, that the fire that +had destroyed so great a structure, had reserved only the cross. The +citizens did not keep it, but cut it into splinters, and divided it +among themselves. Although one cannot but praise their zeal in this, +yet it would have been better had they adorned a church with it, +so that the memory of the miracle would last longer. + + + + +Chapter XII + +_Of several who were baptized_ + + +[The miracle of the cross and the efforts put forth by the fathers bore +fruit, and the natives began to request baptism. The first to receive +the holy sacrament was a niece of Tupas, who was named Isabel. The +ceremony was celebrated with great pomp, "for among the Indians, +no sense is so strong as sight. This is so great a truth that they +regard as nothing any Castilian whom they see abased and ragged. On +the contrary, when they see any Castilian who makes a show, they +immediately call him 'Captain,' and canonize him under this name, +although he does not deserve to be even a soldier. The same is true +in regard to the religious, of which I could say much because of my +experience therein of more than twenty-two years. They esteem the +prior greatly, but his companion very little. They think that the +religious who lives better and has the greater number of servants, +is a great chief. They believe the contrary of him who does not live +with so much ostentation. It happened that a religious was going to +visit the chapels of that district where he lived. He, with the spirit +that he brought from Castilla, intended to commence with the greatest +poverty, so that he took neither bed nor refreshment. An Indian, who +was going along as cook, on considering that, said that that father +was going in that way, because he must be some _banaga_ in his own +country--that is, low and base by birth. Another time, when the same +religious was going barefoot, like the natives, because of the poor +roads (for there is nothing good in these islands), their edification +was to make a sound like castanets with the mouth, saying that he was a +strong and brave man. Hence arose the saying that I heard from Father +Bernabe de Villalobos, [33] a notable minister of the Bisayas, who +labored many years in the salvation of souls, namely, that if he wished +to ascend to any dignity, although he would endeavor to be as humble +as possible before God, he would show the utmost grandeur outwardly, +so that the natives might recognize the majesty of the dignity by the +exterior. From this also arises their not agreeing to or believing in +anything, unless they see it. Thus in discussing the glory of heaven, +or the pains of hell with them, they reply that if they do not see +it how then can they believe it?" [34] Isabel was married, after her +baptism, to Maestre Andres, a calker of the fleet. The wedding was +also celebrated with great show. Her son and others of her household +were the next to receive baptism. The Bornean Moro, who served the +Spaniards so well among the islands, was also converted, "a baptism +of great importance ... for this Moro was the key to all the islands, +as he was well known in them all; and so much faith was put in him, +that he was obeyed as little less than king." Mahometanism has secured +a foothold in the islands, and the natives are constant in it as +it does not forbid "stealing or homicide, does not prohibit usury, +hatred, or robbery, nor less does it deprive them of their women, +in which vice they are sunken, and the women no less than the men. So +much are the latter sunken in this vice, that they considered it the +choicest thing, and in their revelries were wont, while singing, to +fit out a caracoa (a medium-sized vessel ten or twelve brazas long) +with those who have been their gallants; and for more verification of +this assertion, the women did not allow any man to have communication +with them unless he had a _sacra_, that is a small jagged wheel, +like the wheel of St. Catherine, with its points blunted. That wheel +was set with a bronze pin, which was thrust through it; for from an +early age the males pierced their privies with these, and by means +of them had communication with the women, as if they were dogs. All +of that has been done away with by the gospel and its ministers, +and they have grieved over it as at death. That would not be taken +from them but rather supported by the Mahometan law. They endeavor +to give themselves with great satiety to the eating of pork and the +drinking of wine, and they stuff themselves from time to time, never +losing an occasion that is offered. Many of those injuries which the +devil was working in the souls of those natives have been remedied; +and I hope, with the help of His Divine Majesty, that the evil seed +will be truly eradicated from these islands with the lapse of time, +so that the seed sown by His ministers may increase and bear a most +plentiful harvest." Our author continues:] + +But the enemy of the human race, who recognized his loss, and that +the progress of the diabolical worship of Mahomet, by which he wished +to gain these islands, was shortened by our coming, tried to concoct +a scheme to drive the Spaniards from the islands, since there were +no longer any forces sufficient to drive them out. For although +the islanders were many in number, so great was their horror of the +arquebuses and other firearms, that the very report of these made them +tremble. They did not consider themselves safe from their balls and +fire, even in the deepest woods. Hence what we now hold was subdued +in a short time, of which a thousand years ago not one palmo would +have been gained, but rather lost. Hence in order to succeed in his +designs against us, the devil made use of another nation, as Spanish +as the Castilians, and of equal arms and courage. He contrived that +they should come from Maluco, where they had been for some days, +and with equal forces descend upon the Castilians in Sugbu to drive +them out. They claimed that they found the latter on territory that +was theirs, and belonged to the kingdom of Portugal. Over this matter +there were not a few contests and glorious triumphs, which must be +passed by, for it will be the Lord's will to have them published some +day by him who may write the general history of these islands, so +that so heroic exploits may not remain buried in the abyss of oblivion. + +Because of this, our Spaniards found themselves in dire need of all +things. They had few men, and little ammunition, and the land where +the war was carried on was not so well-affected as they wished; for +the temperament of the natives made them incline toward the victor, +and persecute the conquered. But, notwithstanding this, the Spaniards +were so courageous in defending what they already possessed that +they were prepared to give up their lives rather than one palmo of +land. However, the governor, as a good Christian, had the religious +summoned, and requested them to consider the matter, so that when +the truth was known fully, and what justice they had on their side, +they might, with greater courage, defend their cloak from him who +was trying to take it away by violence.... + +[The fathers deliberated, and Father Rada, who "was not only a very +great theologian, but was the wisest man in the world in mathematics, +geography, astronomy, astrology, and the foretelling of events," +made a chart on which he showed Alexander VI's line. By this he proved +the islands well within Spain's demarcation. They had also been taken +possession of for Spain by Magallanes. These proofs did not satisfy +the Portuguese, however, and they continued their attempts.] + + + + +Chapter XIII + +_Of what the religious did in the islands, and how they baptized Tupas_ + + +[During the conflict with the Portuguese, the fathers, as became +spiritual advisers, did their duty, and bore their full part. The +continual illness of Father Gamboa rendered necessary greater activity +on the part of Fathers Herrera and Rada. With great effort they +succeeded in baptizing the chief Tupas, well knowing the effect the +baptism of such a great chief would have upon the other natives, who +were completely in the power of their chiefs. With him was baptized +his son. The effect was immediate, and natives of Cebu and all the +neighboring islands requested baptism. The patache "San Juan" arrived +at the island from New Spain in 1569, with two more religious: Juan de +Alba, [35] who had spent more than thirty-three years in New Spain; +and Alonso Gimenez, [36] "who quickly learned the language of these +islands." It was resolved to send one religious to New Spain "to look +after the affairs of the islands, and get colonists for them from the +many workmen in Nueva Espana." The lot fell to Father Diego de Herrera, +and he set sail, after having been elected as the first provincial of +the Philippines. Medina says: "The intention of the religious is not +known. For they had no order from the most reverend general to create a +provincial, and such an order was necessary. Their object is unknown, +but it is well known that the said father Fray Diego de Herrera was +despatched and arrived at Nueva Espana, bearing this title." His +mission in New Spain and Spain proved successful, and advantageous to +the islands; and he set sail again for the Philippines with a number +of religious. Of the three religious remaining in the islands, after +Father Herrera's departure--for Father Gamboa had already been sent +back on the "San Lucas," because of his continual ill-health--Martin +de Rada remained in Cebu, Juan de Alba went to the Alaguer River in +Panay, and Alonso Jimenez to Ibalon. "There, in those ministries, +the religious were learning the language with the greatest assiduity, +in order to be able to preach and confess, and to teach the mysteries +of our faith."] + + + + +Chapter XIV + +_How our religious went to the island of Luzon, and of other matters +that arose there_ + + +As time passed, it appears that we continued to attain more and more +favorable results in enlarging the Spanish dominion and empire among +the islands, and in extending likewise the name of Christ our Lord, +for the adoration and reverence of those barbarous nations. This year +the return of the father provincial, Fray Diego de Herrera, who had +gone the year before to Nueva Espana, as above related, and returned +the following year, was made most prosperously, and with incredible +rapidity. It seems that he had put his hand carefully to the work, +which he had already commenced, and desired to see it assume a wider +extent, and to have those fields full of workers. He was exceedingly +well received in Nueva Espana, and so much caressed, that all were +importunate to embrace him again and again, not being satisfied +with simply embracing him whom they saw visibly as the apostle of +China--the name by which they designated these islands. They promised +him munificent help in advancing the undertaking. On that account was +his return so prompt. He was accompanied by two religious, namely, +father Fray Diego Ordonez [37] and father Fray Diego de Espinar. [38] +He bore the despatches that Father Urdaneta had negotiated. In them, +his Majesty ordered the Filipinas Islands to be colonized, so that, +by that means, the conversion of those races might be advanced better, +which the Augustinian order had already begun, with so much labor, +to secure. And besides the service that was being rendered to our +Lord therein, his Majesty was pleased, and thanked them for the same. + +His Majesty sent the title of adelantado to the commander, for himself +and for his heirs, with the warrant for this privilege with pendant +seal. This was extended to the Ladrones Islands, which were the first +that he discovered and took possession of. That clause declares: "Just +as (says his Majesty) our adelantados of the kingdoms of Castilla and +of the Indias enjoy and exercise this title; you shall have all the +honors, concessions, favors, franchises, privileges and exemptions, +preeminences, prerogatives, and immunities, which, as our adelantado, +you should possess and enjoy." + +The above is given place here, because, on the one hand, it was +negotiated by our religious; and, on the other, to show ourselves +grateful, to him who loved and protected us in everything. Moreover, +his Majesty sent him leave to apportion the encomiendas among the +deserving, as seemed best to his judgment. The governor was very +grateful for all the favors received from his Majesty. He was not +puffed up, but more than ever devoted to his service; for no fetters +bind the good so tightly as do kindnesses, which are strong shackles, +with which they are held within just limits. _Compedes namque invenit +qui benefacta invenit._ [39] + +The adelantado--for so shall we call him now--became more fully and +correctly informed of all the islands; and learned that that of Sugbu +was not adequate, on account of its sterility, to sustain the empire +of the Spaniards. He had been informed also that the island of Luzon, +or that of Manila, would be the best for him in everything; because +of being, on the one hand, the largest of the islands--for it had a +coast of more than two hundred leguas, and was almost four hundred +in circumference--and being on the other, more thickly settled with +people, who would be more prompt to sustain the Spaniards. And above +all it was nearer China, whose trade, it was hoped, would prove of +great advantage, not only for those who might colonize the islands, +but also for all Espana. For that exceedingly vast kingdom abounds +in whatever can be desired to sustain life, and is such that, since +it has so many people who have no room to live on land, many make +their habitations on the sea in certain small champans, a sort +of boat, very suitable for them. Nevertheless, the large vessels +with chapas, and those of lesser size, are well nigh innumerable; +and they sail annually to surrounding countries, laden with food +and merchandise. Forty, and upwards, were wont to come to Manila +alone. In the year 1631, although then not [many of them] were coming, +the number amounted to fifty, counting large and small vessels. We +will not mention those that go to Japon; and although, in going there, +they experience very great trouble, still a constant stream of vessels +go thither, for great profits are derived there. These vessels go to +Siam, Camboja, Borney, Maluco, and Macasar. In short, they coast and +go everywhere, and carry iron, quicksilver, silk, rice, pork, gold, +and innumerable other things, without causing any deficiency for +their own sustenance. They carry away all the silver in the world; +and even that of Europa, or its value, is about to cease, for the +Portuguese and other nations, as the English and Hollanders, carry it +to the Sangleys, without a single piece of money, or one real's worth +of silver, leaving their own country. Thus (and I do not deceive +myself in saying it) the kingdom of China is the most powerful in +the world; and we might even call it the world's treasury, since the +silver is imprisoned there, and is given an eternal prison. And if +there were no more silver there than what has been taken from Mexico +during sixty-six years of trade, it could make them most wealthy; +and much more so, inasmuch as the Mexican silver is not the most that +they get, for they take much from other quarters. They are the most +greedy for and affectioned to silver of any race known. They hold it +in the greatest esteem, for they withdraw the gold from their own +country in order to lock up the silver therein. And when they see +silver, they look at it admiringly. I am writing not from hearsay, +but from the sight and experience of many years. Consequently, he who +has any silver, and takes passage with them, is not safe. _Depraedari +ergo desiderat qui thesaurum publice portat in via_. [40] It would +not be bad if they only despoiled him, but they will beat him most +cruelly with clubs, which they use as weapons. Great misfortunes +have happened in these islands, some of which will be recounted in +the proper place. Nevertheless, the Spaniard does not notice that +no one receives any harm [from the Chinaman], except when he opens +the doors to him, and brings him into his house. Besides this they +are excellent merchants, and are very tractable; and in this regard +they are far ahead of the Japanese. The Sangley, or Chinaman (for the +two are one), when he makes any profit in his merchandise, trusts and +waits very accommodatingly. We shall treat of their other customs as +occasion offers. This trade, then, must doubtless have influenced +our adelantado in going to the land nearest it, in addition to his +own comfort, which was found there with advantages. Accordingly, when +he had prepared his fleet of caracoas--the most suitable war-vessel +in the islands--they set sail with them after two o'clock at night, +with oar and sail, taking advantage of the weather. At five in the +afternoon, they reached land and made port, where the men ate, and +took what wood and water were necessary. These boats have bamboo +counter-balances at the side, whereby it appears that they sail +more securely; for the canes, being large and hollow, have great +sustaining power. It has happened that a sea-going caracoa has kept +continually above water during a hurricane, until driven by the waves +upon some island; and, as there are so many islands, they cannot fail +to strike one. The Indians embarked very willingly with the adelantado, +for their greatest pleasure consists in cutting off a head. And they +desired all the others to be subjects, since they were; and that no one +should escape the fire, but that the law should be universal. Besides, +the Bisayans were generally at war with the inhabitants of Manila--who +were now Moros, through contact with Borney, and captured the former, +since they were men of greater valor; and now the Bisayans wished +to prove whether they could use their swords and cutlasses against +them under the protection of Castilla. Father Fray Diego de Herrera +went with the adelantado. He seemed tireless, and wished only at one +stroke to take everything for God, whose zeal moved him. + +They arrived, then, at that island, after reducing to their service +on the way, all the islands in their path. These are not few, such +as those of Masbate, Sibuyan or Sigan, Bantong, Romblon, Marinduque, +and Mindoro. The island of Manila is as large as I have already +stated. Access to it is obtained through [a bay with] two entrances, +which are caused by an island between them, called Mariveles. There +is a corregidor there, whose only duty is to set fires on the highest +part of the island. [41] These are seen from Manila, and give notice +of what is passing, in accordance with the signals that the governor +has made or given. A Chinese vessel is signaled by one fire; one +from Macan by two; one from India by three; and one from Castilla by +four. Both entrances are navigable, for both are very deep. Then the +entrance expands into the most beautiful bay that I think the world +possesses; for it is more than forty leguas in circumference. [42] +Anchorage can be found in all parts of it, and its maximum depth is +not over forty brazas. The bottom is sand and mud, without a single +pebble. A marvelous number of rivers and creeks empty into the bay, +which cause the latter to be more frequented. It is so filled with +fish that, although so great a town is fed by them, it never begs alms +outside. When the vendavals blow, the weather is terrific; for they +come from the sea, and the waves sweep in from the sea, and become so +violent that ships cannot navigate without great danger. Since the +vessels are laden in the time of vendaval season, and the distance +from Manila to Cavite--the port--is two leguas eastward, the crossing +is very dangerous during the vendaval, and great misfortunes have +occurred, both to property and to life, without the governors being +able to remedy it--or rather, caring to do so, for they could easily +remedy it. But let us leave their government, which does not concern +us. The settlement, then most flourishing, was located where the city +of Manila is situated, namely, at the mouth of the Pasig River where +it empties into the sea, and on the south side of it. On the north +side is located another settlement, which formerly was very large, +and even now is not small; for what it lacks in Tagals, it makes +up in Chinese Christians, and those who have settled there. It is +called Tondo, [43] and our convent there is a very handsome building, +being entirely of cut stone. The convent contains the equipage of +the father provincials, who have gone there to live. This seems well +advised, because they do not stay in Manila, nor can they stay there; +and by this method they save themselves innumerable inconveniences +and importunities. Besides, whenever necessary, they can reach +Manila very quickly by taking a boat just outside the court of the +church and descending a salt-water stream; then they cross the Pasig +River--all this in less than one-half hour--and disembark at the +very gate of Santo Domingo. Our adelantado thought rightly that the +conflict with those Moros must cost much blood, as the latter were +aided by many other towns--both along the coast, and up along the +river--which endure unto this day, still as flourishing and numerous +as before. Already these peoples had been informed of events in Sugbu, +of the victory over the Portuguese, and the subjection of the other +islands. It seemed a difficult thing for them to stem the tide, and +to kick against the pricks; and accordingly, they came to regard as +well that which--according as affairs were going, with wind and tide +in favor of the adelantado--they should have considered as ill. + +The greatest chiefs of that country then were the old Raja, Raja +Soliman, and Lacandola. These men, as they already observed the +pernicious worship of Mahoma, imitated Mahometan names, as well as +their customs. On the part of the Spaniards, their coming thither +and the advantages that the natives could derive therefrom were +proposed. These would not be few, since they would enjoy entire peace, +whereby all their affairs would prosper. _Fiat pax in virtute tua +et abundantia_. [44] The principal thing would be, that they would +be freed from the error of the law under which they were living; +for the only true law, and way of salvation, was the law of the +Christians. That law those religious whom the Spaniards brought there +would teach them. The religious had come with only this object, and +time would prove the truth. All this was very easy for them, but in +what pertains to the changing of the law they found most difficulty; +for they thought that they could attain life eternal by means of the +law under which they were living. The cursed Mahoma made the law, +and ordered his believers not to dispute his law; for he knew that +his lies would immediately be laid open at the first attack. On +the other hand he advised them that each one was saved by his own +law. Therefore, cursed demon, if thus you have advised, how in +spite of torments, do you contrive that your law is received? This +law Mahoma introduced into the world with force and arms. I am not +surprised that these natives were so sorry to leave their religion, +for they were persuaded that there was salvation thereby. But they +preferred to follow Mahoma--homicide, drunkard, incestuous, robber, and +sensual--than Christ, exposed naked on a cross, who preached fasting, +mortification, chastity, penitence, love for one's enemy, and other +virtues. The Borneans who were living in their country offered the +greatest opposition to them, and were persuading them to the contrary, +with the cessation of their cursed religion. But as this was a matter +that could not be concluded in one day, but only gradually, and they +had to be convinced of their errors and superstitions by the true and +forcible arguments of our religion, it was left for the fathers--whose +fasting, abstinence, prayers, and sermons were to cast out that demon, +so strongly fortified in the hearts of those poor wretches. _Hoc genus +(demoniorum) non ejicitur nisi per orationem et jejunium_. [45] + +Upon this, those Moros or Tagals received the peace offered them, +and rendered homage to King Don Felipe, our sovereign--whom may +God keep in His glory--and to his successors, the sovereigns of +Espana. The adelantado set up the standard for him and in his +name. This was concluded and effected in the year 1571, day of +the glorious St. Andrew, the patron saint of Manila. On that day, +the standard is carried in that city, the capital of the islands, +in the same manner as we related in describing the city of Santisimo +Nombre de Jesus in the island of Sugbu. It is now carried with much +less pomp than formerly, for all things are declining; and as affairs +had their beginning, so they must have their middle and their end, +for they are perishable and finite, and consequently must end. + + + + +Chapter XV + +_Continuation of the preceding chapter_ + + +Inasmuch as all one's affairs are subject to change, those things which +apparently have greatest stability show, when one least thinks it, +their defects [_muestran la hilaza_] and reveal their mutability. So it +happened here. The adelantado was very happy indeed at the extremely +good outcome of events, and at the peace so fortunately obtained in a +matter, which, in his constant opinion, to buy cheaply had to be at the +cost of much bloodshed. For everything he, as so thorough a servant +of God, rendered thanks to the Lord, whose will governs all things; +and man on his part does but little. But his happiness was of short +duration, for that inconstant race, with the ease already mentioned, +turned about, and tried to employ war in order to relieve themselves +from the yoke that had been placed on their necks--in their opinion +with little wisdom [on their part]; for without testing the ranks of +the foreign enemy they had surrendered their land, where each one is +a lion. In short, they perjured themselves, after having given their +word, by breaking it. But as the Moro keeps no promise, except when +to his own advantage, they made their forts and mounted therein a few +small pieces obtained by exchange from Borney--whence they obtained +these things, as being related by religion. All was already war and +the din thereof, so that, necessarily, the voices of the preachers +were not listened to--although, as they were so fervent, they did not +discontinue performing their duties and efforts with all, and busying +themselves in learning the [native] language. For, although nearly all +the languages resemble one another in construction, yet they have so +many different words that each one must be learned with special care, +so that the native can better understand the father. The Tagal language +is the principal one spoken in the island of Luzon. Father Fray Diego +de Ordonez learned this language very quickly, and with it obtained +what result those warlike confusions and rumors permitted him. The +aged and holy Fray Juan de Alba, who had previously been stationed +in the river Alaguer, in the island of Panay, had come with father +Fray Diego de Herrera. Although one would think that his advanced +years would excuse him from learning like a child, yet, to the end +that he might serve our Lord, whose work it was, he endeavored to +become young, even making it his duty. And what is more, while the +struggle was in progress, and a general stampede was looked for daily, +he descended to the hostile natives, contrary to the advice of many, +preached to them, taught them, and exhorted them to peace, without +on that account being in any evident danger, for the Lord protected +him as another prophet Elias. + +[The religious hold an important position in the colony. In 1571 +two vessels bring an increase of six fathers: Alonso de Alvarado, +[46] one of the Villalobos expedition; Geronimo Marin, [47] who +afterward goes to China, and transacts affairs in Mexico and Spain; +Francisco de Ortega, [48] who dies as bishop of Camarines; Agustin de +Alburquerque, [49] who becomes provincial; Francisco Merino; [50] and +Juan de Orta. [51] All of these die in the islands. The first fruit of +these religious is the old Raja, who is baptized while sick. At his +death he is interred with Christian rites. Father Alvarado, filled +with zeal, fearlessly ascends the Pasig River and preaches in Laguna +de Taguig and Taytay, where he is peaceably received. The Tagals are +soon convinced of the good intentions and mildness of the Spaniards, +and begin readily to receive the faith. Medina continues:] + +Two buildings were being erected in Manila, for the temporal and the +spiritual. The temporal was in the shape of a fort, which was being +built. With such a possession friends feel secure, enemies fear, +and one's strength is increased. How much the spiritual edifice was +growing is seen, since the number of workers was increasing, the +people were becoming more and more capable of understanding what we +were teaching them, and were estimating the inequality between the two +beliefs. Hence it was needful that they should embrace what was good, +and throw away the other as wicked and evil. The fathers kept school +in the convent. They taught the boys to read and reckon. They were +training some of them in the sacristy, teaching them to aid in the +mass; so that, by having nearer at hand what we were teaching them, +they should learn it more easily. All this was necessary in order to +conquer natives, who were so hardened and so much accustomed to evil, +that they regarded everything evil as good. For to such a pass can evil +come, as says the prophet Isaiah: _Vae qui dicitis bonum malum_. [52] +And as the lads returned home every day with something new, which they +told to their fathers and mothers, the result was that they gave the +latter food for reflection, which caused the spark to course through +their hearts; and as the spark was fire, and still more from God, it +must strike deep and work its effect. Thus the number of Christians +continued to increase. And, not less, certain hopes arose that they +would be multiplied daily, and extended through all those nations who +were viewing events in Luzon, as being the greatest island of all, +and with the most warlike inhabitants. + +A site had been chosen for the convent, which is today the best in the +city, and the largest and finest; for it comprises an entire square, +equal on each side. It has a vaulted church with its transept. The +body of the church is adorned on each side with chapels. Truly, if +the chapels had been built higher, according to the plan, so that +there might have been a series of windows above, where the light +would enter, it would rank with the fine buildings of Espana. But +the lack of light is unfortunate for it. It has a very fine stone +cloister, accompanied by its cells. There is a vault underneath +also. All of this work has proved excellent, for although it is in +a place where frequent earthquakes occur, it has suffered no damage +of consequence. [53] Rather, I think that the fathers of the Society, +upon seeing this, have planned to build their church with a vault, and +are correcting in it the faults of ours. Thus it will result in a very +fine building indeed, and just as the affairs of that so distinguished +and holy order are wont to result. The rest is yet to be built, for +now everything is very dear. Since the money is derived from outside +sources, they must be guided by the alms received; but the faithful +assist according to their means--if they have little, with little; +and, as [now] they have not anything, it is a matter of necessity +that they cannot give us even that little. I can only acknowledge +that as we were the first [to enter here], our houses ought to be, +at the end of sixty-six years very strong in this regard. But the +fact is that there is no community in Manila that does [not] excel +us in this; and we remain only with the name [of being well-to-do], +which does us no little harm. For, with the title of powerful ones, no +one remembers us, except to beg from us and take away our lands; and, +as they say in Espana: "What matters it to me if my father is called +_hogaza_ [i.e., "large loaf of bread"], if I die of hunger?" But, +finally, the little that covetousness influences us will be evident +to all, even if I am not pleased at the abandoning of what belongs +to us lawfully; as says our great father: _Et ideo quanta amplius +rem communem, quam propriam curaveritis, tanto vos amplius proficere +noveritis_. [54] Yet am I glad that in such manner are we so greedy +of the rich patrimony of poverty, and such masters in it, that we +cannot keep anything. For, after all, we are all sons of one father, +of whom it is written that, although he was a bishop, he made no +will at his death, for he had nothing. _Testamentum nullum fecit; +quia unde faceret pauper Christi non habuit_. [55] I made the above +remarks, for later an occasion so apropos may not arise. + + + + +Chapter XVI + +_Of the assembly held by our religious in these islands, where they +elected a provincial; and of other events._ + + +[With the increase of their numbers, the missionaries felt the need +of electing a provincial. Accordingly a general assembly was called, +and in the early part of May, 1572, Martin de Rada was elected +provincial--"a person of whom we have said so much and of whom we +shall say much, and of whom there is plenty to say; for he was a +subject worthy of all things, and his memory is as green today in +the islands as if he were alive; and his achievements are extolled by +Spaniards and Indians, who hold his sayings as prophecies.... In this +assembly the priests had a vote, for as there were no fixed convents, +and all were participating in the same labor, the responsibility of +voting was divided among them all. The first thing that they discussed +after the election was the despatching of a religious to Nueva Espana, +and thence to Espana, to give account of the condition of the province, +and of their ministry; and to request religious for the continuation +of the work, and permission for our most reverend father to divide +the province among them with full authority of proceeding in their +elections and government, as in the other provinces which are not +dependent." Diego de Herrera was chosen for this mission, and left +Manila in the beginning of August, 1572. The new provincial set +vigorously to work, "correcting, if there were aught to be corrected, +anything in those first laborers that gave the lie to the perfection +that they were professing (and in religious any puerility gives the lie +to perfection, just as in a beautiful face any mark shows out, however +small it be). The religious are the face of the community, the most +unblemished of it, and all men are looking at them. Consequently there +must be nothing that gives the lie to it; for, however slight it be, it +must be immediately seen." Convents, churches, and houses, "not costly, +but with the moderation of that time," were erected. Medina continues:] + + ... A convent was established in the town of Taal. There is a lake + there, generally known as the lake of Bongbong. Its water is salt, and + so deep that the bottom cannot be reached in some parts. It is about + forty leguas in circumference, counting in its gulfs and bays. [56] + Shad are caught there, or rather tunny-fish, which, although not + like those of Espana, still approximate to them. The lake empties + through a river into the sea. When the Spaniards went there, this lake + swarmed with people. It is twelve or thirteen leguas from Manila. Its + chief town was this Taal, where the religious were established. Now + it is the principal convent, and has a stone church, but very + few people. [57] There lives the alcalde-mayor of La Laguna. And + there are generally Spaniards there who are making rigging for his + Majesty. This lake has its islets, especially one opposite Taal, + which had a volcano, which generally emitted flames. [58] That made + that ministry unhealthful; for the wind or brisa blew the heat and + flames into the village so that all that land became parched, and + the natives had no lands to cultivate.... + +[To remedy this Father Alburquerque built an altar at the foot of +the volcano; a procession was made thither by all the village, and +mass celebrated. So successful was this that "as yet no more fire or +smoke has been seen, and that island, about four leguas in circuit, +has fields and cows, and the inhabitants of Taal sow and reap their +harvests in their land." Other convents were established at Tanauan, +Lipa, Bauang, and Batangas, the first three with houses, the last +with a house and stone church. "But they have few people, [59] so +that the presence of the Spaniard must be a poison that finishes +them. And this reduces them more than their wars and slaveries did +in their heathenism. Of the volcano of Tlascala is recounted almost +the same thing as of Taal."] + +The father provincial settled religious in Laguna de Bay, [60] which +is another lake not less remarkable than the one that we have just +described. Its water is fresh, and it is the largest lake known [in +the islands], for it must be more than fifty leguas in circuit. It has +its islets in the middle, some larger than others. It is exceedingly +stormy, for, as the water has but little density, it is aroused and +disturbed with but little wind, to the danger of those upon it. This +convent is one of our largest. It was the largest settlement [on +the lake]; now it has about one hundred tributes. All the Indian +women make hose, and they are the best that are exported. There are +generally two religious there, for that convent has its visita. The +church is of stone, and is very large, as is the house likewise. About +this lake are many convents of the religious fathers of St. Francis, +which district we assigned to them--although we could have kept it, +and assigned to them a district more remote. But in this is seen our +indifference, for we shared with our guests the best, which are the +districts nearer Manila. This lake has very famous baths of hot water, +one legua from Bay, which are a remedy for many ills. An excellent +hospital is established there, with a house adequate for the religious +who administer it. These religious are Franciscans, and they administer +this hospital, as they do others in the islands, with the charity and +love which might be expected from so holy religious. And although +brothers of St. John of God came to administer the hospitals, and +remained in Manila many days, and even years, the Franciscan fathers +were not willing to give up their infirmaries and hospitals, nor were +the former able to deprive them of these. Therefore, they returned to +Nueva Espana. And indeed, even if they who have the care of hospitals +as a duty [i.e., the brothers of St. John of God] had charge of these, +I do not see how they could have done it with greater charity, or +more to the universal satisfaction [than have the Franciscans]. This +lake empties by two arms of rivers: one goes to Pasig, our convent; +and the other to Taguig, likewise our convent. Lower down the two +rivers unite. Further increased by the San Mateo, which comes from the +uplands, and has very clear water, they make a very beautiful river +which empties into the sea, after flowing past the walls of Manila. It +is called the Pasig River from the chief village. But in order to drink +of the good water, one must ascend even to the very convent of Pasig, +where the water is found clear. There are many things to see along this +river. For both sides are lined with gardens and summer-houses, more +lived in than even those of Manila, for there is enjoyed the coolness +and freedom which the city does not possess. There are churches up +the river, some with seculars, some with fathers of the Society, +some of St. Francis, and some ours. For two leguas up the river [61] +is our convent of Nuestra Senora de Guadalupe, which is built of +stone. It is the most frequented house of devotion in the islands, +both by Spaniards and by natives. And it is enough that it has not +ceased to exist, because of the changeableness and fickleness of the +country. We may talk more at length of this holy house. + +Religious were established in the convent of Pasig, of which we +have said somewhat already. It is about three leguas from Manila, +and from Guadalupe one legua farther on. Now it has less than one +thousand Indians in charge, and three religious; for it has a most +fatiguing visita, namely, San Mateo, where ordinarily is established +one religious with voting power. [62] + +The father provincial established religious in Calumpit, one day's +journey from Manila toward the east (where the Tagal language is +likewise spoken), bordering the province of Pampanga. It is located +on a beautiful river called Quingua, of excellent water, which is used +by all the convents of that district. It was a very densely populated +district, but now it has but few people, for the Indians have not +remained there. [63] It had formerly innumerable _mosquitas_, [64] but +now few; and some sugar plantations, which were started by father Fray +Pedro Mejia, [65] and continued by father Fray Luis Ronquillo. [66] +If care were taken of them, the convent would be supplied with what +is necessary. It is a priorate and has a vote. Its Indians number +about five hundred. + +The father provincial likewise established a convent in Lubao, which is +[in] the province of Pampanga. It is a most fertile land, and we might +say that it sustains the country, for it is all rice-fields. Hence +it is said, that at harvest Pampanga is worth little. The convent of +Lubao had many people, and hence they were able to build a church, +which is one of the best in the country. It is all built of brick, +made there; they also built a two-roomed house. It has generally two +religious, with six hundred Indians. [67] All Pampanga is like streets, +for the houses of one town are continued by those of another. One may +go to all its towns without getting in the sun, for now the bamboos, +and now the palms furnish very pleasant shade. From this place one +goes to Guagua, a short legua, past the houses; thence to Betis; +from Betis to Bacolor, the best of the entire province. Of the rest +we shall speak in their turn. + +The father provincial established religious in the island of Panay, +which, as it was of the Bisayan language, he was not willing to +abandon. Those islands, although the first to whom the clarion of +the gospel was sounded, have been the ones that have remained most in +ignorance. I am unaware of the cause for this unless it be my sins, +for truly the most flourishing province, in regard to its missions, +has been that of Panay, as will be seen in this work. And yet, they +are as new in matters of our faith, as on the first day. I think +that their living in very remote towns conduces greatly to this, +and in not seeing the religious so frequently as the others do. And +although they have attempted to maintain some [religious] assemblies, +they have not retained them, for the persons who most strenuously +oppose their having assemblies are the encomenderos--because they +fear the diminution of their Indians, more than what they owe as +Christians. I console myself that another tribunal will judge them +with more rigor. But may it please the omnipotent God that human +selfishness be not repaid with eternal punishments; for they become +encomenderos more to deprive the natives of the good of the soul, +than to convert them and protect them in what concerns them so deeply. + +The island of Panay is more than sixty leguas [68] south of Manila. The +same star stands over the bar of its principal river, the Panay, as +at Manila. Its other river, the Alaguer, is on the other coast. Both +have about the same amount of water, but the Panay flows more slowly, +and hence can be ascended more readily. It is also deeper, so that +fragatas can enter over its bar at full tide, for it has about one and +one-half brazas of depth. At low tide, not even the small vessels can +enter. It is two leguas from the bar to the town. The convent is very +large. With its visitas, it has in charge more than one thousand two +hundred Indians. The alcalde-mayor of that jurisdiction lives there. As +a rule, there are many Spaniards there; for at that port are collected +the vessels for the relief expedition to Maluco. Thence goods are +transported in champans to Ilong-ilong, where the port is located, and +where the vessels are laden. There are more than one hundred Chinese +married to native women in this town, and their number is increasing +daily, so that I think they will end by peopling the country. I, being +twice prior of this convent, learned somewhat of the Chinese language, +in order to be able to minister to them; for to do so in Spanish, or +in the language of the land, is the same as ministering to Spaniards +in Greek. The river banks above are lined with palm groves, and with +villages that are thinly inhabited because of the laziness of the +alcaldes-mayor. The latter imagine that, when their offices are given +to them, it is only that they may get money. They only take heed of +that, and prove rather a drawback than an aid to the ministry. About +two days' journey up the river, and on a branch flowing into the Panay, +is the convent of Mambusao [69], a very flourishing house. Don Fray +Pedro de Agurto, first bishop of Sugbu, and a member of our order, +gave this to the order. He was one of the most learned and holy men +of all the Indias. Afterwards he will be glorified, for he is the +brightest jewel in this history, and has most honored the habit in +these islands. He was a creole of Nueva Espana, and one of whom all +those fathers can be proud. Ascending the river inland in Panay, +and leaving on the right Mandruga and Mambusao, one reaches the +convent of Dumalag, after a few days' journey, more or less. It is +a very important convent, for it ministers to more than one thousand +Indians. There are two religious in each of these convents, prior and +assistant. Before arriving at the convent of Dumalag, the convent of +Dumarao, a very important house, has its river on the left. All of +these convents have their churches and houses finished--although in +wood, for it is not convenient to build them of other materials. Those +crossing to the coast of Otong, where the port and fort are located, +pass through this district. They use a hammock [as their bed]; they +walk inland a matter of two good leguas. Then they stop in a visita +of Passi called Batobato. Thence they descend the river--or go by +land, if the water is low--to the town of Passi, which is located in +the middle of the island, with the most beautiful and suitable site +imaginable. It enjoys balmy winds, excellent water, less dense woods, +and less rain, so that one would believe it a different region. This +convent has a stone church, and has charge of about two thousand +tributes. The king grants it a stipend for three religious, and since +this had to be, as it were, the Escorial, not only of the islands, +but also of the country, it has been so unfortunate that scarcely +has a work been finished than it immediately is burned. I cannot say +in what this convent has suffered most, and that from the time when +they left their old site and moved to their present location. This so +constant work is the reason for this district not having more than two +thousand Indians, and I wonder that it has them. The river of Alaguer +[70] flows past the convent gates. By this one descends, leaving on +the right and inland the priorate of Laglag; [71] and still lower and +also inland and on the same side, that of Baong; [72] and reaches the +convent of Dumangas, which we call Alaguer. Thither went father Fray +Juan de Alba--as the reader will remember--and from that house all +the above were administered until they were made priorates. The bar +of this river is about two leguas from the town. Now the convent is +finished, but can sustain only one religious. The port and the fleet +have destroyed it; for these are the best people of the Bisayas. The +river, although like that of Panay, can not have much depth because of +its rapid current, nor can the tide ascend for any distance, however, +small boats enter it. These two rivers have one source. The Panay runs +northward, and this of Alaguer toward the vendaval. If one wishes, +he may cross hence, between this island and Himalos, [73] to Salog +(Jaro), a convent of the order, which was also assigned to it by +Bishop Agurto. It has in charge about one thousand Indians, but the +number is much lessened by the conscriptions of the port, which is +one-half legua from that town. From that place, following the coast, +one goes to the convent of Otong, the chief convent of this island, +because it is near the village of Arevalo--once important, but now of +no account. The alcalde-mayor and overseer-general of the Malucos lives +there. Otong lies about one and one-half leguas from the port. One may +reach it either by the beach, or by a salt-water creek which flows +through the village (and even to the very gates of our convent), +and then makes a turn, leaving the village an island. About two +leguas along the coast lies the convent of Tigbauang, which belongs +to our order. Today it is in charge of more than eight hundred +Indians. The capital is very small, for it enjoys the conscriptions +of Ilong-ilong. A matter of a short legua farther on is the convent of +Guimbal. Of it, one may philosophize as in the case of Tigbauang. The +latter has Hantic [74] as a visita, which was formerly one of the +best priorates, but often destroyed by men from Camucon, Solog, and +Mindanao, as it is quite outside the Spanish pale. It is more than +twenty leguas from its capital, and is visited with great hardship +and danger. Now since, without thinking, we have related all that is +to be known of the island of Panay, let us return to Manila; for I +think that something awaits us there. + + + + +Chapter XVII + +_Of how our religious tried to go to great China_ + + +During this time two Chinese junks or champans came to Manila to +trade. These people, as they are so fond of silver, scented what +was to enter their country through this medium. Hence they began the +richest and most opulent trade known. Were the Spaniards less hasty, +surely the trade would have resulted more cheaply, and the Chinese +would not have done with them as they wished. In the beginning the +articles traded were very cheap, and extravagant fortunes were made +in Mejico. Now, however, it makes such inroads on the capital, that +loss on the cost has often occurred in Mejico. But then, who can +remedy this? These Indians or Chinese are generally called Sangleys, +not because they call themselves Chinese or Sangleys, for they have +been and are surprised at the two names. They are called Sangleys, +because when they came to Manila, and the people saw men of so strange +appearance, with hair like that of women--and of which they take most +especial care, more even than of their faces and bodies--and done up +on the head very nicely, and with a most peculiar headdress, their +long garments, their ample and long drawers reaching to the feet, and +all their other apparel in keeping, which seemingly belong to women +rather than men, they asked the latter who they were. The answer was +"Sangley" (or "merchant"); as one would say, "We are merchants." They +were canonized with this name, and it has proved permanent, and hence +they are now called by no other name. The name China must have been +given by the Portuguese. Their own name is Songsua. [75] + +[A short description of China and its people follows. The fathers +no sooner saw the Chinese traders, than they were filled with zeal +for the conversion of the country. But they were unsuccessful in +persuading the traders to embark them on their vessels. A letter +written by Legazpi to one of the Chinese viceroys, and accompanied +by a present, also failed of effect, for neither was delivered. Thus +China remained a closed door for the time being.] + + + + +Chapter XVIII + +_Of the part played by our religious in the siege of Manila by Limahon, +a great Sangley pirate, and of the latter's flight and destruction._ + + +The month of August, 1572, was, beyond doubt, a sad one throughout +the Filipinas Islands; for, in that month the Lord was pleased to +take to Himself Adelantado Miguel Lopez de Legaspi, by whose valor +and prudence these islands had been won, and increased with the +advantages that were seen. For in his eight years of governorship he +did not begin anything that did not have a prosperous conclusion--well +known to arise from his zeal and Christianity and his firmness and +forbearance. Hence he was, with reason, loved by his own men, and +feared and respected by foreigners. Thus, by merely the renown of his +name in the islands, no one, however brave he might be, dared to exert +himself as a leader. During his life, all promised themselves that that +work commenced by him would attain the ends suitable to beginnings +so distinguished. But at his death everything remained, as it were, +in a torpid condition; for indeed it seemed to the enemy impossible +that that man who had conquered theme had died, or that so great +valor had passed away so soon. But, truly, those who grieved and wept +most were our religious, for they knew what they were losing in his +loss, and how matters of religious instruction would be put backward, +which by his valor were extending and widening the territories of the +church. And their grief was greater because they were surrounded on +all sides by enemies, and were in a city without walls, or other fort +than that of the bodies and good courage of the soldiers But soldiers +are wont to lose their courage when they have no level head to guide +them and face the danger. The adelantado was buried, in fine, in the +convent of St. Augustine in Manila, his bones being deposited there, +until his disposition of them was carried out. Father Fray Martin de +Rada, who lived there then as provincial, conducted his obsequies. He +preached a long sermon on his many virtues, in which it is certain +that one cannot say that love of his benefactor moved him, but zeal +that vices should be eradicated. + +After the next year, 73, his obsequies were preached in our convent +in Mejico. There Master Fray Melchor de los Reyes preached with the +vigor that might be expected from so erudite a man. He satisfied the +audience and not less our duty and thankfulness. And certainly we in +this convent ought to feel very thankful toward him [i.e., Legazpi] +and for the blessings and advantages acquired through him by the +order of our father St. Augustine. + +The treasurer, Guido de Lavezares, entered into the government by +virtue of a royal decree in the islands (although a secret one), in +which his Majesty ordered that in case of the death of the adelantado +they should be governed by Mateo de Saus--who had gone to the islands +with the title of master-of-camp; and in case of the death of this +second, the treasurer should enter into the governorship, with the +title of governor and captain-general. He did so, thus fulfilling +his Majesty's decree; and he had so great Christianity and prudence, +that one would believe that he had inherited the spirit and zeal of +the dead governor. + +[Here follows a very brief account of the descent on Manila by Limahon, +who is forced to retire to Pangasinan--Medina says Cagayan. There the +pirates published news that the Spaniards had all been killed. Medina +continues:] + +Those who hastened to believe this were the Indians of Mindoro, +who are also something like the Moros. This island is more than +twenty leguas from Manila on one side; on the other it is so near +that there are but two or three leguas to cross, namely, by way +of Batangas. The island is very large, and very well covered with +mountains; and it has beautiful rivers and a plentiful supply of +fish, and above all, of wax. It has a corregidor, and is more than +one hundred leguas in circuit. It has two benefices, in which live +beneficed seculars. One is called Bacoy, and the other Nauhang. They +have about six and seven hundred Indians respectively. Services are +held in the Tagal speech. But there are here, further, some Indians +whiter than the Tagals, who live in troops in the mountains. They are +the ancient inhabitants of the country, and it is they who gather the +great abundance of wax which is yielded there. I said that there was a +benefice of them, namely, of the people called Mangyan. [76] They are +very good, and if they were instructed and taught, it would be easy +to reduce them to settlements and missions. But no one attempts to do +any work in the Lord's service. Especially do these Mangyanes fear the +sea. They pay no tribute. They fear lest the Spaniards take them to man +their ships. They go naked; and deliver the wax to the Tagals, which +the latter pay as tribute, and give as their share. More than three +hundred quintals of wax yearly must be obtained in this island. This +mission, then, was first in our charge, and at the time of the pirate +Limahon's descent upon Manila, that island was a priorate. Its prior +was father Fray Francisco de Ortega, and his companion was father +Fray Diego Mojica. [77] As soon as those Moros heard, then, of the +result at Manila, they threw off the yoke, attacked the fathers, +seized them, and talked of killing them. However, they forbore to +kill the fathers immediately--I know not for what reason, since the +Moros were setting out to execute that resolve. + +[The governor, hearing of the imprisonment of the fathers, sent +for them, but they had already been released. The Moros of Manila, +instigated by Borneans, took occasion to revolt at this time, choosing +as their two leaders Lacandola and Raja Soliman. "Seeing this, father +Fray Geronimo Marin determined to go to the other side of the river and +talk to those chiefs concerning the cause of their rising, so that, +if there were complaints, as cannot fail to arise among soldiers, +they might be remedied." Quiet was finally restored in this quarter, +the greatest difficulty being found with Raja Soliman, who "did not act +fairly in whatever the Spaniards were concerned, nor did he regard them +with friendly eyes." The governor proclaimed a religious procession +in honor of the fortunate termination of the affair with Limahon. It +was held January 2, 1575, at which time was founded a brotherhood of +St. Andrew. In the year 1574 three more Augustinian religious had +arrived, namely, Diego de Mojica, Alonso Gutierrez, [78] and Juan +Gallegos. [79] Also in 1575 came three others, Francisco Manrique, +[80] Sebastian de Molina, [81] and Alonso Heredero. [82]] + + + + +Chapter XIX + +_Of other events, and when the other religious entered into the +islands_ + + +[In these early years a disaster befalls the Augustinians, and somewhat +dashes their hopes. This is the death of Diego de Herrera with ten +priests who are coming, six from Spain and four from Mexico, to augment +the missionary efforts. Of the thirty-six priests obtained by Herrera +on his mission to Spain, but six set sail for the Philippines. The +four from Mexico who join them are: Francisco Martinez, of the chair +of writing in the University of Mexico, an excellent Greek and Latin +student, who had been prior of the Augustinian convent in Lima, Lesmes +de Santiago, an ascetic, and formerly a successful merchant; Francisco +Bello; and Francisco de Arevalo. The shipwreck is quite near Manila +and is due "to the carelessness of the pilot--and I think that this is +the first ship that has suffered shipwreck on coming from Mejico." The +loss of Herrera is felt keenly, for he was an enthusiastic and zealous +worker. "The loss of this ship was felt keenly in the islands, for it +bore heavy reenforcements of troops, money, and other things needed +in the new land, which lacked everything. But above all they were +anxious because they were surrounded on all sides by enemies, and +had but few troops, and these were scattered in many districts. But +those who grieved most were Ours...." Medina continues:] + +The religious discussed the matter, and seeing the great abundance of +the harvest, and that they were unable to attend to everything, they +thought that it was not right to enjoy this field alone, but that the +other orders should come to aid them. For they recognized that there +was work for all, and that, if the door of China and Japon was opened, +those from Espana would seem but few to them. Besides, there was +enough in the islands wherewith to occupy themselves. Therefore, they +wrote to the father-provincial of Nueva Espana--at that time Maestro +Veracruz, a man of the letters and holy life that is known--asking him +to take the matter up with the viceroy. [83] He favored this plan, +chiefly because in it was evidenced the great liberality of Ours, +in not keeping the bread, which the Lord had given them, but dividing +it with love with their other companions; and this fraternal spirit +of the orders is a good thing. This example was given us by the holy +apostles, who, after casting that net in which they caught so many fish +that they could not pull it in because of so great weight, immediately +_annuerunt sociis_. They called and signaled to their companions to +come to their aid, in order that they might enjoy their good fortune +and drag the net to shore and obtain the fish. The viceroy of Nueva +Espana discussed the matter, in the interests of all the orders--for +the viceroy was father of them. He wrote to his Majesty, so that +the discalced fathers of the order of our father St. Francis, with +whom our religious shared the cape, went to the islands in the year +1577. And Ours even gave them of the best, which they themselves had +pacified, namely, Camarines, Laguna de Bay, and many convents about +Manila. There they began to preach, to establish contents, and to +administer, with the greatest fervor. They have increased so much +that now they have many convents, that contain excellent linguists, +and grand servants of the Lord, and have notable martyrs--of which, +God willing, we shall see somewhat later. + +Later, in the year 1580, the fathers of the Society of Jesus came to +the islands. Therein they have made much gain, as it is well known +that they have done wherever they dwell, by teaching human as well +as divine letters to the youth, and at the same time giving them the +mild food of virtue--which enters very well along with the teaching +of letters, of which a long and settled experience has been had. They +have the university in Manila, very notable in its members, which has +filled the islands with learned men. It is in no respect defective; but +is excellent in everything. And although all do not join the church, +knowledge does not at all tarnish a captain's reputation; rather, it +is enamel upon gold. For he who has the most alert understanding enters +and goes out better on occasions, and gives in public the better reason +for what is proposed. Besides, those born in the islands grow up with +but little knowledge of the Castilian language, both on account of the +habits of the country, and because they are always arm in arm with the +blacks, who talk a jargon of tongues--which is neither their own, for +they have lost that, nor that of the natives, nor of the Spaniards, but +a smattering of each one; those coming from Espana do not understand +them. Therefore, it is needful that the youth should have some means +of losing that corrupt speech, and of relearning that of their parents, +so that they may afterward be able to shine in public without shame. + +The fathers of the Society have many places of ministry, and daily +are extending their labors. They have a little about Manila, but more +in the Bisayas; for they have charge of the island of Samar, that of +Leyte, that of Ibabao, and that of Bohol. [84] Now they have a convent +in the very island of Mindanao, where they have performed great deeds +among the Subanes. They have missions in many other districts, the +Indians of which are very tractable and well instructed, as I shall +be able to relate here; for they are excellent in everything. And as +the fathers are usually influential in secular affairs, they obtain +what they see to be important for their good management, all of which +is needed to induce these stiff-necked people to accept salvation. + +They have remarkable Bisayan linguists. And although they printed +Belarmino [85] in that tongue, I think it was at more cost than +gain; for to imagine that the Indian will buy a book is a ridiculous +notion. And even if he had it, he would be too lazy to read it. This +is the reason why so little has been printed in all the languages +of these regions. Perhaps with the lapse of time they will lose the +ancient vices, and become fonder of the truth. + +In the next year, 1581, several religious of his order went to the +islands with Bishop Fray Domingo de Salazar, of the order of our father +St. Dominic, and first bishop of these islands. They established +themselves in Manila with so great observance and vigor, that, in +the opinion of all, this province is the most holy and austere known, +and is considered as such. Those who come from Espana do not recognize +it--not because there is a lack of observance there, but because the +habit here is most severe; and since the country is so unsuitable +for austerity, necessarily that is a cause for keen regret, and those +who wear the habit are wont to wear a hair-shirt perpetually. These +most religious fathers have charge of the Sangleys, for whom they +have had finished linguists, and they do not lack such now. They +have built so fine a wooden church in the Parian of Manila--that is, +the alcaiceria, where the Sangleys have their shops--that it might +be sightly even in Espana, and in it the Sangleys have generously +assisted. [86] For they had a common fund for current expenses, and +they amass in it yearly about twenty thousand pesos. Each Sangley, +pagan or Christian, pays, if he wear a cue, three reals of four to +the peso, in two payments. For this fund there are Spanish collectors +with a sufficient salary. What I regret is that, in all these cunning +devices to obtain their money, and the exaction of these contributions, +the money is taken from the Spaniards, as the Sangleys are their +creditors. And the Sangley himself says when they collect it, "I do +not pay this, but the Castilian." For since we get our food, clothing +and shoes through them, and it is necessary that everything come from +the hand of the Sangleys, therefore they avenge themselves very well, +by putting up prices on everything, and shortening measures, so that +the loss is greater than is realized. Watchful Spaniards do not fail +to take note of this, and they grieve over it; but they endure it, +for the communal fund, or the tribute, or the other things are not +demanded of them--as if in what they buy, or order to be made, they +did not pay double. When I came to the islands in the year 1610, when +not so much was exacted from the Sangleys, there was a large bale of +paper of eighty large sheets, from each one of which six small sheets +were made, so that there were four hundred and eighty sheets. This +could be bought for three or four reals. But after the contributions +were levied on them, I saw and bought these large bales of paper, of +but fifty large sheets, and from each one could be cut no more than +four small sheets; and they cost three pesos. They could not have so +high a price in Espana. I bought a small piece of linen of fourteen +or fifteen varas for four reals. Now they measure by varas, and it +is very cheap at one real per vara. And thus in everything else, this +appears now, whether the Sangley, the Spaniard or the Chinese pays the +trickery. But it is a singular thing, how poorly the Spaniard governs +himself. Wherever he halts, immediately all prices go up; and even +when he is able to get food gratis, he clothes himself and obtains his +food at excessive rates, because of his lack of consideration or his +heedlessness. And when he happens to bethink himself, it is too late. + +The Dominican fathers have another station of married Sangleys, near +Manila, and adjoining Tondo, so close that their houses and those of +Tondo are contiguous. This station belonged to us, but we generously +gave it to them, so that they might agree to make a compact in regard +to the celebration of the feast of Corpus Christi. [87] We ourselves +celebrated it on the Sunday that came after the principal feast, +when the cathedral celebrates it, with great solemnity. The fathers +of our father St. Dominic came and entered their suit. Journeys +were made to and from Roma at great expense. At the end, it was +decided that the festival should be celebrated _ad invicem_ [i.e., +"in turn"], one year in one place and the next year in the other, +in the following manner. When it should be celebrated in Santo +Domingo, we were to perform the services at the altar; and when it +was celebrated at our house, in the same way they should perform the +service. Let them consider that it was important whether to celebrate +the feast immediately on the following Monday. Some things on which +we lay particular stress have no importance whatever; and, regarding +some that we ought to lay stress on, we allow them to stand without +any care whatever. This is well known and a trite saying in our holy +order. But it is a matter of greater importance to that convent +than to ours that the feast should be celebrated today rather +than tomorrow. The Dominican fathers have built in the convent a +very strong stone church, which would be considered substantial in +Espana. One has only to cross the bridge over the river to go from +this church to their church in the Parian. A short distance farther, +and also near there, they possess the hospital for sick Sangleys. But +I maintain that but few are treated there, for these nations would +rather be left to die in their own houses, with their relatives, +than to regain their health in the hospital. Besides the Sangleys +have very excellent physicians among themselves, even better than +those from Espana--I mean those in Manila, who serve rather to take +money and to bury people than for any other purpose, and gain their +experience at the very dear cost of the Spaniards. + +Furthermore, the Dominican fathers have the province of Pangasinan, +which belonged to us. But recently we gave them the town of Lingayen, +the best one of that province. Likewise they have the province of +Cagayan, the most distant part of the island, which contains the +city of Nueva Segovia (which consists of the name merely). There is +an alcalde-mayor and a commander, who is also captain of the troops +in the presidio established there. These inhabitants of Cagayan are +warlike. Daily they rise and burn convents and churches and kill +some of the religious. The Dominicans have many convents for here is +their stronghold. And indeed up the river (as they say), which is the +best and largest of the island--and where those who understand it +thoroughly say that the city of Manila ought to be--are remarkable +lands and nations as yet unconquered. The fathers have worked here, +and are working, with great zest, and suffer innumerable inconveniences +for the good of those souls. Hope of greater fruits is very bright. In +order to reach this province, those going by land cross our province +of llocos, which lies between Cagayan and Pangasinan, of which we +must make mention later. This illustrious order has had in Manila +men prominent in letters and religion. They are a mirror in life and +morals, and revered in life as heavenly men. And in Japon, although +they were the last in the Lord's vineyard, they have not been last +in gains and labors, for they have had very saintly martyrs. They +have a college in Manila also, where they teach Latin, the arts, +and theology, and that college is likewise a university. Thus +behold Manila, founded but yesterday, with two universities; and +I am not surprised that, notwithstanding that it is the colony of +the Spaniards, and the desire of so many nations, the more it has +of that the more it needs. For from here must emanate the light that +will lighten all this archipelago. When these peoples are converted, +they will lack ministers, so great is the latitude discovered in +this hemisphere. May our Lord be pleased to aid them and to aid us, +so that our labors may bear light, his Majesty be reverenced worthily, +and the devil be banished from the hearts of these people. + +In the above colleges, a number of students receive instruction, and +are sustained free of charge. The portion of the others who enter, +amounting, I believe, to one hundred pesos, is paid. Their results +are excellent. The liberality of those who haver come to Manila is +discernible in everything; for in works of charity they have given and +are giving very much, although those with wealth are very few. And +really the magnificence of all the churches and temples astonishes +me. All are finished and wonderfully adorned with jewels and silver +ornaments, without there being any building for which there is not +more than enough; and silver ornaments for the front of the altar are +seen in many churches of Manila. Indeed when those who have done this +are considered attentively they have made the expense once for all; +for by means of the silver, hangings which soon are destroyed and +damaged by the dampness in these islands, are done away with, But +the silver, when somewhat tarnished, regains its former luster, and +even more, by cleaning it. The work of the Society may be extolled +in all Espana. All this appears good, so that when the foreigners +return to their countries, after having finished their trading, +and sold their merchandise, they should take with them the news +of our temples; and that through the grandeur and majesty of the +temples, they may recognize the grandeur and majesty of Him who is +thus worshiped in this country. And this is one thing at which the +nations are most astonished, and especially the Japanese. They look +at the temples with great curiosity. This nation has also been tested +in Christianity. For up to today they have given to the church an +innumerable number of martyrs, both men and women, all notable. This +I have heard declared by the archdean Alonso Garcia, in the reports +made in Manila by order of his Holiness in the year 1631. In them +were described more than nine hundred martyrs, all notable, besides +the rest, of whom no knowledge could be had. Nearly all the orders +have Japanese priests, and they are excellent subjects; our order has +three. Two, Fray Miguel and Fray Leon, are holy men. The third has +not resulted so, although he is rather an interpreter and one well +grounded in everything. But until life is ended we may not praise +or condemn one. _Ante mortem non laudes hominem quemquam; lauda post +mortem, honorifica post consumationem_. [88] + + + + +Chapters XX-XXII + + +[These chapters deal almost entirely with Chinese affairs, and the +part played by the Augustinians in the first Spanish embassy sent +to China; their return; and the ill-success of the second embassy to +that country.] + + +[At length the attempts of the Augustinians to go to China bear fruit, +and on June 21, 1575, Martin de Rada and Jeronimo Marin set sail for +the great empire. The opportunity comes through the defeat and siege +of the pirate Limahon. The Chinese captain Dumon braves the laws +forbidding the entrance of foreigners into China, and conveys the +missionaries to that country--whither they go rather in the light +of emissaries of the government than as religious workers; for the +governor, Guido de Lavezares, gave them three letters, one for the +Chinese emperor, another for the viceroy of the province of Fo-Kien, +and the third for the governor of Chin-Cheu. They are well received and +borne through a portion of the land in state. They receive audience, +and later a banquet, from the governor of the city of Chin-Cheu, +to whom they deliver the letter from the Spanish governor.] [89] + +[At Oc-Kin, the viceroy grants the fathers cordial and dignified +audience. At the request of the former the fathers present him +with a paper in which they state their object and desire, namely, +the preaching of the gospel. The viceroy requests a book of the +Christian law, whereupon he is presented with a breviary, as the +fathers have no other book with them. After hearing an exposition +of the Christian doctrine, the viceroy dismisses the Augustinians, +loading them with rich presents. Three captains are ordered to see +them safely to Manila. To the letter of the Spanish governor, the +viceroy replied as follows:] + + +_Letter from the kingdom of Tangbin in the province of Oc-Kin, from +the royal house_ + +I received a letter, to which this is the reply, from the governor +in the fort of Manila. To thee, who art born of heaven. Although +we differ among ourselves, we are children of one father and of one +mother. Therefore we love and regard you as friends and brothers. And +likewise have we friendship with the Loquios, a foreign people, who +come as friends to this province of Oc-Kin every three years. They, +in token of friendship, bring us some products of their country, +which this country does not produce. Here we present to them other +things unknown to their own country. Therefore shalt thou know that +we protect and esteem greatly the foreigners who come hither. + +We have ordered the fathers and Castilians to be supplied with all +necessaries, so that they might lack nothing. For if they should +lack anything, we would be grieved and ashamed. And besides this, +we have offered and given them some things, all of which is placed +in a memorandum. The ten vessels that are going to your shores are +furnished with all necessaries, so that you shall not have any trouble +in giving them what they shall peradventure ask of you. The captains +and sailors, and the rest of the crew, are paid for ten months. + +We have written to the king the extent of our information, so that he +may know what is passing. We would like the fathers to remain here, +and more, until we shall hear and see the king's reply. But as the +voyages are long, namely, three months to go and three to return, +we thought that you would grieve over their absence. Therefore, we +return them to you and send with them a small present. All the present +is in charge and keeping of my captain. If any of it be lacking, he +will be punished. Given in the year of the king the lion Huicbanlic +[i.e., Wanleh]. + +[After a stay of thirty-five days in Oc-Kin, the fathers, still +accompanied by the two soldiers, Loarca and Sarmiento, set out on +their return, being banqueted and feasted at all the cities on their +way. They set sail for Manila September 14, and arrived there, "part +of them October 28, and the others November 1. When they arrived they +found a new governor, for Doctor Francisco de Sande had reached the +islands in the month of August of the year 1575, with his Majesty's +appointment as governor of those islands." The present to the governor +is delivered to Lavezares. "Among the rich things brought, the greatest +was that brought by father Fray Martin de Rada, and a thing of great +importance and value in those times--namely, a description of the +great kingdom of China, its provinces, its boundaries, its religion, +its wealth, its civilization, its amusements, and everything that +human curiosity is desirous of knowing, of which until then there was +no account. This was the account caused to be printed by father Fray +Jeronimo Roman, of our order, in the second edition of his _Republicas +del mundo_, which was published by Bishop Fray Pedro de Mendoza, +[90] in his book on that kingdom."] + +[On the return trip of the Chinese captains, a second embassy of +priests, Agustin de Alburquerque and Martin de Rada, accompany +them. But the captains are dissatisfied with the presents received; +and this, together with the news of the escape of Limahon, determines +them to abandon the fathers. Accordingly the latter are left destitute +in the country of the hostile Zambales, but fortunately make their +way back to Manila, where they are welcomed with rejoicing. Somewhat +later (1580) an embassy of three priests is appointed by the king of +Spain, consisting of the Augustinians Juan Gonzales de Mendoza--then +bishop of Popayan, Peru, and later bishop of Lipari, in the kingdom of +Naples--Francisco de Ortega, and Jeronimo Marin, to go to China. The +avowed object of the embassy is to open the door to commerce, and +carry the faith to China. The first remains in Spain. The advice of +Marin is followed and the embassy is not sent.] + + + + + +Chapter XXIII + +_Of the election, in the islands, of father Fray Agustin de +Alburquerque_ + + +It appears that now the provinces of Filipinas were gathering greater +strength, for, while they were being colonized, the increasing trade +and the relations with Mejico were excellent; the religious were +increasing, in the temporal and spiritual, throughout the province, +which was obtaining many and good laborers; and convents were being +built. That of Manila and that of Santisimo Nombre de Jesus, in +particular, were laying their foundations, in order to erect stone +buildings; for, however strong wooden supports may be, yet with the +lapse of time they finally decay and become useless. This does not +happen so quickly with what is made of stone, which lasts much longer +and opposes the inclemencies of the weather. + +At first we used to make our houses in the manner of the inhabitants +of the country themselves; for, in short, they know more of their +climate, as they have more experience therein, and God gave them +more adequate knowledge of the products of the islands, so that they +might make use of them. The islands are by nature very damp. If one +digs down two palmos he finds water. Therefore, humanly speaking, +it is impossible to make cellars as in Espana, or to live upon the +ground, because it would play havoc with one. For this mother nature +provided these Indians with certain woods, so large and hard that, +after planting them in the earth, the Indians build their houses upon +them, at a height of one and one-half, two, or three brazas. These +timbers or columns are called _harigues_, and the wood is that called +_tugas_. [91] These timbers having been placed, as I say, upright in +the earth, and having the space of more than a braza beneath them, +form the columns of the edifice, and upon them the natives build. We +have all made use of this method of building in these islands. We +have built fine houses and churches from these woods--for which, +inasmuch as many villages assist in the building, the largest columns +and those of known goodness are sought, which last many years. In +conformity with this, while I was building a house in the town +of Dumangas, on the Alaguer River, a very large house was there, +belonging to an encomendero living there, one Ruy Lopez de Arellano, +a native of Constantina. This man died, and the house being already +half fallen, I was having it taken down, in order to make some use +of it, before time should finish its destruction, and the river bear +it away, which was very rapidly being done. I took down from it one +column, in particular, which the Indians assured me had been brought +there more than thirty years before by the Indians up the river. I +affirm that at the ground line it was eaten in about a finger's length +around. All the rest was in perfect condition. And I observed that the +part that had been under ground was in much better condition. There +are other columns left as inheritances from father to children, +and to grandchildren, upon which many houses have been built. The +walls, which are called _dingding_, are made of excellent timber. The +walls of the Indians' houses are made of bamboo, inasmuch as they are +poorer. The roof is made of palm-leaf, called _nipa_. Instead of nails, +the natives use certain strong ligaments, made from flexible roots, +called _bejuco_ [i.e., rattan], where we use nails. These houses, +then, are considered more healthy; for as it is usually very hot in +the islands, these houses are much more cool, and the winds blow +through them with greater ease. When Manila had wooden houses, it +was more healthy. But now they have taken to making stone edifices, +and those not of stone are rare. Stone is also being used to build +outside of Manila, and already there are many houses and churches of +that material. If one considers this closely, even though economy +be not considered, necessity was bound to impose this. For there +could be no woods to furnish so many columns, and the dragging of +them thither would be very costly. Hence, by collecting money, which +is easier for the natives, they summon Chinese, who do what work is +desired; and, if it is wished, they paint the building. Therefore, +because of the aforesaid reasons, our convent at Manila was begun +in stone. It is now, as I have remarked, the best in the islands; +and daily it is being made more notable by further work. + +The fathers held a chapter meeting in 1578, and peaceably and quietly +cast their votes for father Fray Agustin de Alburquerque, a man of +whom we have already said sufficient of his occupations, virtue, zeal, +and prudence. As soon as he beheld himself invested with the ermine, +he gave his attention to everything possible, looking after both the +spiritual good of the province--the principal thing--and the temporal, +extending and spreading the province. He established religious in +Bulacan, and that place is now one of the principal and more desirable +convents. It has an excellent stone house and church, and about six +hundred tributes. [92] It is about six leguas north of Manila. It +has usually two religious. The Tagal language is spoken there. The +alcalde-mayor of that jurisdiction, which has about four thousand +Indians, lives in Bulacan. All the Manila religious extol the Indians +of this town as the most tractable and most attached to the church. + +He established religious in Candava also. This is the last convent +in Pampanga, and formerly was most flourishing, although now it in +very dilapidated. Near it is a beautiful and copious river, [93] +which divides into many branches as it approaches the sea, and all +these branches empty into Manila Bay. Hence one may go to all these +convents both by sea and by the estuaries, without sail. Therefore, +one can go and come without depending on the weather. It has now about +six hundred Indians. [94] It is one and one-half day's journey from +Manila. Two religious live there. It has a very fine wooden house, +and the church is built of the same material. + +Religious were firmly established in Macabebe. This is, in my opinion, +the finest priorate of all Pampanga, and the chief one. It lies on +a branch of the Candava River, as above stated; and in the middle +of the road has a very good wooden house and church. Three religious +lived there generally, for it had more than one thousand three hundred +Indians. A visita called Minalampara was taken away from it, which +is a vicariate. With that the said town of Macabebe was left with +about one thousand Indians. [95] Two religious live there generally. + +All this Pampanga country is swampy. For such is the condition of the +rivers, that the people have their conduits, and, when they need water +let it in. This is the reason for the vast quantity of rice there. This +province has abundance of cocoa-palms, and many bananas. The soil is +very favorable for any trees that one might choose to plant there. When +the religious arrived there, that province had many inhabitants. Now, +although it lacks that great number of former years, yet it is not +depopulated. [96] The people there have accepted Christianity more +readily than all others of the islands. They have more to do with +the Spaniards than the others, and try to imitate them as far as +possible. But the more they try to do that, the more do they show +their texture as Indians. Very many people have been conscripted from +this district, and I wonder that a man is left. For the governors send +soldiers from here to Maluco, Sugbu, Octong, and Caragan, where a fort +has been built and is guarded by the men of Pampanga. And although they +do more work than the Spanish soldiers, they receive no pay, their food +is scarce, and they are ill treated. And yet it can be said of these +Indians (and a strange thing it is), that although they are treated so +harshly, it is not known that a single one has deserted to the Dutch +in Maluco, where they suffer more than in their own country. Many of +the other Indians go and come. When these soldiers leave Pampanga, +they present a fine appearance, for the villages come to their aid, +each with a certain sum, for their uniforms. All this is due to the +teaching of the religious of our father St. Augustine, whose flock +these Indians are, and the children of their teaching. + +Besides the above religious, the provincial established others in a +settlement in the village of Bacolor, which is the best village not +only of Pampanga, but of all the islands; for it has more than one +thousand Indians under the bell [i.e., "who are Christians"]. It is +about one and one-half days' journey from Manila by sea and creeks, as +in the case of the others. It has the best meadow-land in the islands, +and it all produces rice abundantly. It is irrigated, as was remarked +above of the others. It has a celebrated church with its crucifix, +which is entirely built of stone and brick. The house is made of stone +also. The inhabitants are the richest and best-clothed of all Pampanga, +and have the most prominent of the chiefs. When the supply of religious +is good, there are always three in this village, and there have even +been at times four or five; for besides the stipend paid by his Majesty +(who owns this encomienda), it has its own chaplaincies, founded by +the said inhabitants of Pampanga. It also has its own altar fund, +which, although not very important as yet, will yield something for +the support of those in charge there. All the territory of Pampanga +is surrounded by mountains where dwell Zambales and Negrillos, who +descend to the villages for the purpose of head-hunting; for there is +nothing so much to their taste as this. A people without abiding-place +or house cannot be punished. They rest at night where they choose; +and sustain themselves on roots and what game they bring down with +their bows. The children, as they are raised with this milk, and as +they are given suck of human blood, die by pouring out their own blood. + +Many misfortunes occur yearly, and we have only the pain of not being +able to remedy them. And although the Indians know this, they do not, +on that account, watch more carefully or have greater vigilance over +themselves. On the contrary they proceed with so great abandon that +one marvels. If they are censured, they answer: "What can we do, +since there is nothing besides the will of God?" The same thing +happens in regard to the crocodiles. Although the people see that +the crocodiles seize them daily, they proceed with the same abandon; +notwithstanding that, with but little toil, they could remedy this, +by catching them or by making some enclosed bathing places in the +rivers. But they neglect to do this, either through laziness, or in +order not to toil for another's gain. For they say: "What is given me +by another, or by the village?" Under no circumstance do they unite +in doing anything for the common good, unless the alcalde-mayor or +the father orders it. Finally, it is necessary that the father govern +and rule [even] those most enlightened and civilized. Hereabout it +is said that the village is such as is the prior. If the prior makes +them assist, they do so. If he leaves them they are overcome by their +laziness. They forget what has been taught them, with the ease to which +they accommodate themselves. They learn with ease everything evil, +without a master; but for the good, one master is not sufficient +for each Indian. For they are greatly given to following their +inclination, which causes great grief to the ministers. [97] But +not all men can be saints; and, since the Lord gave them no greater +talent, He desires them to be saved with what they have. _Homines, +et jumenta salvabis, Domine._ [98] All of these convents are located +within the archbishopric of Manila. + +The father provincial went further, and established religious in +the island of Panay. The reader may remember the description that +we gave of it, and which he will find in the next to the last place +to the convent of Tigbauan; for there the provincial established +resident religious. This convent has been in many different hands; +for at first, as appears, we had it in charge, and then the seculars +had it. The fathers of the Society followed the latter, after which +a Portuguese secular had charge of it for a considerable time. He, +in order to relieve his burden, exchanged it for another district of +the order called Ibahay, which was the first priorate given me in these +islands by the order, and in my opinion better than Tigbauan. The only +thing which made it troublesome were five islands which had visitas +that belonged to it, where it had all that was needed. The order has +held it for some time, and it is not so good as others. It is a royal +encomienda. The village of Arevalo is situated near by. Therefore, +whenever the religious are sick, there is never lack there in the +presidio of a surgeon, who, without being able to distinguish his +right hand, bleeds and purges, so that in a brief time the sick +man is laid in his grave; and a religious or a Spaniard is worth a +great deal in this country. Daily our number is lessening, for the +country furnishes but little help. It cannot be compared to Nueva +Espana, which has enough inhabitants for itself, and to spare. Nothing +increases here, or succeeds. The creoles do not reach their majority, +and death comes upon them unseasonably. [99] + + + + +Chapter XXIV + +_Of the chapter held in the islands, in which was elected the fourth +provincial, our father Fray Andres de Aguirre._ + + +When the time came, as ordained by our rules, namely, April +22, 1581, the fathers who were now in greater number, and as +as we have related, had a greater number of missionaries and +convents--assembled. Peacefully and harmoniously they cast their votes +for father Fray Andres de Aguirre--of whom one may not say little, +and, if we say much, it will grow wearisome, and we shall never fill +the measure of his deserts. Let the religious who reads this remember +the mention which we have given this servant of God, and he will find +that father to have taken part in the most important things recounted +in this history; for he will see how he was one of the six who first +came to this country in the adelantado's following, November 23, +1564. He will find this father the associate of Father Urdaneta, when +the latter discovered the return passage to Nueva Espana. He will see +him at the court, together with the aforesaid [Urdaneta], informing +King Felipe II about events in Filipinas, and of the fortunes of that +fleet, which we have related. Although he returned to Mejico with the +same Father Urdaneta, and stayed there many years, yet, thinking that +he was ill employing the health which our Lord gave him, and that his +person would be more useful in the country which he had discovered for +the honor of God, and thus renewed in courage and spirit, he determined +to return to Filipinas. For that purpose he petitioned the father +provincial of Mejico to aid him on that journey with some religious, +who were the jewels of greatest value that he could take. His request +was conceded, and those religious were such that truly this province +of Filipinas owes what luster it possesses to them. For as they +were all excellent persons for the ministry, and came from a place, +namely, Mejico, where so great care and solicitude was the rule, +they tried to reduce this province to the fashion of that one, by +settling the Indians, gathering them together, and making them observe +civilized laws. And I am very certain that that is the difficulty +of christianizing these islands. If the desired gain in the harvests +is not seen today, it is because there has been no firmness in that +plan; but the natives are allowed to live in their small settlements, +whither the religious goes but seldom, and the Indians cannot see what +is preached to them put into practice. I have said somewhat on this +subject previously, and whenever opportunity occurs, I shall again +discuss it, as it is very dose to my heart. Besides, it was, and is, +better for the Castilians themselves to have the Indians living in +communities; for in matters requiring despatch, they have the latter +close at hand, and keep them more tamed, and richer in what concerns +their advantage. "But," I ask, "what difference is there between the +Zambales of these islands, and the Chinese? Are the former not, like +the latter, rational beings? If then they agree in the chief thing, +which is excellency, how do they differ so much in the manner of +living? Why do some have an organized state, and others not?" And if +this so brave people settle in communities and bind themselves with +laws and government, they will in time lose that natural haughtiness +and adopt different customs. For if animals incapable of reason are +domesticated by human intercourse and lose their fierceness, men +capable of reason will do it much more. The negroes furnish us with +an example of this. Although they appear a race that seems the scum of +the world--so wild [100] when they are brought, that they even appear +more bestial than the beasts themselves--yet, after intercourse with +a civilized people, they learn at last to act like human beings. Now +how much better would the Indians of these islands do this, in whom +has been found much capacity for whatever we have tried to teach +them! Those only who are unwilling do not learn--through laziness, +and because they see what little gain they derive from it. Who will +doubt that some of them make excellent scribes, so that even the +Castilians are children compared to them. Some are excellent singers, +and there are choruses of musicians in Manila who would be notable +in Espana. For one to become an excellent tailor, all that is needed +is for him to see the work. They make very good carpenters; and this +trade is not taught them, but they only have to see it. For in what +pertains to _agibilibus_ [101] they are better than we, for they are +more phlegmatic. The Indian women have more capacity, and learn easily +to use the needle, when they see it, thus they are more skilful than +the Spanish women reared here; therefore the articles of handiwork that +have been exported from these islands are numberless. And all these +Indian women live where there are religious, which is quite different +from the visitas, with which there is no comparison. [102] The women +of the visitas tremble before a religious. When the religious talks to +them in the church or elsewhere, they do not understand him. They are +thoughtless beings, and seem even more heedless than beasts. I shall +prove this proposition. While I was visiting the Sibuyan Islands, +I was trying to confess those people, who, although truly many of +them were Christians, had never been confessed, perhaps because no +more could be done with them. I performed all my duties in order +to persuade a people so rustic and rude, and without sense, to make +confession. At that time an honorable Spaniard, one Alonso de Barco, +who was married to a native woman of Panay, went to those islands to +collect his tributes. He was walking through the church court when I +was hearing confessions. I had sent away one of the chief Indian women, +because she did not pay attention or answer questions, and had told +her to meditate thoroughly over her sins and return later. She went +out and the Spaniard asked her if she had confessed. She replied that +she had not, because the father had asked her how many feet a hog had, +and she had been unable to answer me. The Spaniard laughed heartily, +and, upon my coming out, told me about it. Whereupon I crossed myself +many times, at seeing that the people were so thoughtless there, and +that she should have understood me so ridiculously. Those who live +where the father is stationed are not so, but even the little children +come to the convent and are assembled. And in matters of the soul--the +chief thing--they go to confession; and in truth I would rather confess +a hundred Indians in the Filipinas, of those thus rendered fluent, +than one Spaniard. The Indian women confess remarkably well, and with +many tears, and take communion with devotion. They give account of +themselves, respect the father, and recognize his courtesy. Who has +not experienced this? The Spaniards understand it all, but when an +effort is made to settle the Indians in villages, all the Spaniards +resist the religious as if the latter were taking something from +their pockets. And surely, as I am advised, the greatest warfare +that the devil wages against the ministry is by the hands of the +Spaniards, so that all those who should favor this cause are opposed +to it. Consequently, the religious tire themselves out, and the devil +reaps what harvest he wills. All the evil is laid to our door, and the +good the Spaniards attribute to themselves. If the Indian flees and +the encomienda is deserted, it is the fault of the religious. But if +it increases, it is due to the alcalde-mayor, the encomendero, and +the collector. This is a thing so beyond reason, that truth itself +cries out. If it were not for the protection of the religious, there +would not now be an Indian, or any settlement. The Indians understand +this fact very well, as will be seen by the statement of one of them. + +The bishop of Nueva Segovia, Don Fray Pedro de Soria, collected +those Indians together, by order of his Majesty, and told them of +the advantages of the Spanish monarchy, and how beneficial it would +be for them to have Don Felipe, the king of the Spaniards, as their +king, who would protect them peacefully and with justice. The chiefs +answered not a word to this. Thereupon, the bishop spoke again and +asked them whether they had understood the words he had spoken to +them, and if they would answer. Thereupon a clownish Indian arose and +said: "We answer that we wish the king of Espana to be our king and +sovereign, for he has sent Castilians to us, who are freeing us from +the tyranny and domination of our chiefs, as well as fathers who aid +us against the same Castilians and protect us from them." Further, +suppose that it were possible to make the religious withdraw, so that +their ministries should cease; within a few days their lack would he +bewailed, to the greatest extent possible. But this fact is true, that +while one enjoys a blessing, it is not esteemed, nor is any thought +given to a present virtue. However, let it be lacking, we feel that +lack immediately, and we seek alter it enviously. As says Horace: +_virtutem incolumen odimus, sublatam ex oculis quaerimus invidi_. [103] +Spaniards may ask me: "Who has pacified the country? Who domesticated +the Indians, so that one can go through the whole country with more +safety than by the highways of Espana? For there neither the machine +of justice, nor the severe punishments, nor the grave penalties secure +any safety. Nor do the lofty houses, nor their tightly barred doors +at all prevent the evils committed by the thief and murderer; for all +is open to the execution of their desires. Here one sleeps with the +door open, with entire safety, and just as if many legions of soldiers +were watching it." And in fact, I do not recall ever having locked +a door during my ministry. [104] I ask then, whence proceeds this +except from the religious, who are gradually taming these peoples as +fathers, and teaching them for temporal interests also? It there were +no religious, how could the tributes be entirely collected? For the +tributes seemed to be only what the chiefs chose to give, without its +being possible by any severity to make them give more. This is proved, +because in the encomienda of Dapitan, a district of Mindanao, although +tribute was paid to Diego de Ledesma, son of one of the conquistadors, +it amounted to nothing, all told being no more than the value of forty +pesos. But at the end of one year after it was given to the fathers +of the Society, tribute was collected from more than one thousand +Indians. For, as we have, during the course of the year, made them +resort [to church], the chief cannot afterward conceal any of them. + +Truly, when I see the duties that we are performing, and at so great +danger (for we are the object of the watchfulness and censure of +the governors and all the people of the country), if we undertake +to defend the Indians, they say that we are usurping the royal +jurisdiction--just as if we were not serving his Majesty the king, +our sovereign, with all our strength. If we make agreements with them +as fathers, in order that their suits may not last ten years, they +say that we are playing the justice. If we try to prevent offenses +to the Lord, they say that we are interested in the matter. If we +restrain the heavy trading, they say that it is to profit more. And +truly, we might say that _spectaculum facti sumus mundi, angelis et +hominibus_. [105] If love of God and our neighbor did not guide us, +of a truth there would be opportunity for some one to say "_Pereat +dies in qua natus sum, et nox in qua dictum est, 'conceptus est +homo?'_." [106] For the accusations and misrepresentations in vogue +concerning the religious are innumerable. [107] I knew a venerable +old man, by name Fray Juan de Villamayor, [108] whose head and beard +contained not one single black hair. He was prior in Aclan, where +some Spaniards of evil life then resided; and because he tried to put +an end to the offenses to the Lord, one of the Spaniards defied him, +and laying his hand upon his sword, said to him: "Come down here, my +poor little father, and I shall tell you who you are." The religious +answered him very humbly, and bade him farewell, saying that what he +was doing was in the service of the community. He said that he would +talk with him later, when he had recovered from his anger. + +While father Fray Lucas de la Reina, who was one of the foremost +religious in the Bisayan province--a fine linguist, and one who added +much to the sacristies, and was very discerning in things pertaining +to the altar--was prior in the same village, he heard that a wretched +mestizo woman in his district was leading a dissolute life; for on that +occasion the encomendero Don Agustin Flores was there. This man came +at the head of a number of blinded and unruly Spaniards. The religious +had the woman seized and placed in a private house. A mestizo brother +of hers grieved so sorely over this that, trusting in the favor of +the encomendero, he tried to kill the religious. For while the said +father was standing at the church door after the _Salve_ on a Saturday, +surrounded by Spaniards, the mestizo came in at one side, and struck +at him with a dagger. The father warded it off, and protected himself +from it with his hands, without a Spaniard offering to aid him. A +lay brother, named Fray Andres Garcia, [109] was coming toward the +convent; he was making a small flat-bottomed boat [_chatilla_] there +for the house at Manila. He was truly a religious of great virtue +and example. He had formerly been a soldier in Flandes and Italia, +and was one of the chosen men sent to Ginebra [i.e., Geneva] by +Felipe IV, to carry despatches to the duke of Saboya [i.e., Savoy], +the king's brother-in-law, who was trying to take that rebellious +city. As soon as father Fray Lucas spied the brother, he cried out +and begged for aid. Fray Andres hastened to him, and although now +a man well along in years, he had not forgotten the vigor of his +youth. And in such manner did he comport himself, that those Castilians +went away. The mestizo was punished, and the father was healed. The +religious have suffered, and still suffer, innumerable things like +the above, for making those Indians sincere Christians, for teaching +them civilization, and for serving your Majesty in pacifying the +country for you. Eight religious, who accompanied father Fray Andres +de Aguirre hither, began this work. Although that father returned to +the Filipinas Islands simply to aid Ours in the work here, and to die +in the country discovered by him, yet the province, finding that its +affairs, past and present, were known to him, elected him provincial; +he was therefore constrained to bend his shoulders to receive that +load--which is not light, to one who knows it. + +This chapter named many other places as priorates, which, although +under administration, were only visited, and had been waiting until +there should be religious [to place in charge of them]; as religious +were obtained from time to time, the convents were being supplied--not +only with those coming from Espana, but with those professing in +Manila. For in this manner the natives could be ministered to more +readily, and the religious would fulfil their duties better; and +their responsibility was very heavy. + +Religious were established in Pangasinan. 1 have referred to this +before, and mentioned that this province is in possession of the +most religious fathers of our father St. Dominic (who keep it in +a very flourishing condition), by reason of the cession of it that +we made. Finally it has many excellent convents, built by those who +administer them so carefully. + +Religious were established in the island of Bantayan, located between +the island of Panay and that of Sugbu, but farther from that of +Panay. However, if one wishes to go to the island of Sugbu without +sailing in the open sea, he may coast from islet to islet, although +the distance across is not greater than one or one and one-half +leguas. These Bantayan islets are numerous, and are all low and very +small. The largest is the above-named one. When Ours acquired it, it +had many inhabitants, all of very pleasing appearance, and tall and +well-built. But now it is almost depopulated by the ceaseless invasions +from Mindanao and Jolog. [110] We abandoned this convent (which had a +thousand Indians) years ago, in order not to be changing from place +to place. This island is the mother of fish, [111] and those that +are caught in their season at these islets are innumerable. They are +taken in boats among the islands. After we abandoned it, the island was +given over to beneficed seculars. Although they have done their duty as +zealous men, they have been unable to do more, because of being exposed +to great risks. The above-named enemies have made great slaughter in +these islands, and have taken even a greater number of captives. For +these people have no abiding-place; and, however quickly the news +arrives at Sugbu, when help comes the enemy has already left. For, +although the distance across is not more than three or four leguas, +and even two in parts, the help, as it must travel by sea, must go +far--namely, twenty-five leguas. Lately, in the year 1628, men from +Jolog did very great damage in that island. Admiral Don Cristobal de +Lugo was governing at Sugbu as lieutenant-governor. He could have +sent men, since he had news of the enemy in time. The chanter Juan +Muniscripo, beneficed clergyman of the island, and another secular +(who had been expelled from the Society), by name Alonso de Campos, +and six Spaniards--who, it is known, fulfilled their duty--were in +the island. But finally, as they lacked all necessary ammunition, +they had to retire and take to hiding, and seek new locations. By +God's mercy they were not captured, but the people of the island who +were captured and killed numbered more than one hundred and fifty. The +attempt has been made to withdraw the Indians thence, and settle them +on the mainland of Sugbu, which is more suitable in every respect; +but the attempt has failed, for the Indians would rather die there +than to have a thousand comforts elsewhere. These islands contain +many cocoa-palms, but no water or rice. The water comes from wells, +and is very bad. The incumbent of the benefice has now built a small +fort; but I believe in my soul that, when the Indian catches sight +of the enemy, he will abandon it instantly. + +This island has a village called Hilingigay, which it is said was +the source of all the Bisayan Indians who have peopled these shores, +and whose language resembles that of Hilingigay. The Indians remember +quite well when they were under our tutelage and teaching, and desire +to return to it. For they assert that since we have left them they have +not passed one good day. They talk in this vein because always the past +was better. That benefice has now about four hundred Indians. They pay +tribute to the king, and belong to the bishopric of Sugbu, being of +its jurisdiction in secular matters as well. It is more than seventy +leguas from Manila to Bantayan to the south. + +The father provincial established religious in Jaro, on the coast +of the island of Sugbu, a place at present called Carcar. It has +in charge more than one thousand two hundred Indians. It has been +visited at times from San Nicolas, and at others from the house of +Nombre de Jesus of the Spaniards. But it seemed best at this time for +it to have a prior with assistants, because of the conveniences which +were found there, which are not few--and much more [are they to be +considered] in the case of the ministry. It is about six leguas from +the city of Nombre de Jesus, and more than twenty from the end of +the district. The distance can be made in four hours, with the brisa. + +The provincial established religious in Hantic [112] on the opposite +coast of Panay. It was an excellent village. The holy martyr Melo +[113] was prior of it. Now it is fallen back because we left it; +and we have taken it once more. It has about three hundred Indians, +and is a visita of Guimbal, which is one legua from Tigbauan, and +more than fifty from Manila. + +Resident religious were established in Aclan, on the island of Panay, +on the coast that looks toward Manila, which is more than fifty +leguas away. This is the best convent of the island. The provincial +thought best to change it for another which is inland from the river +of Panay, called Barbaran, a village of people possessed by the +devil. The exchange was effected, and it happened that the secular +who was there, died as soon as he reached Aclan, and that the first +religious established in Barbaran also died very soon, the one being +but little behind the other. I have never believed in this changing +of districts, for since all are of Indians, the betterment is slight, +while the damage suffered by the ministry, which is the chief thing, +is vast. I omit to mention other and no less damages that exist, +which are not for this place, as they do not concern us. + +The father provincial established religious in Batangas, which is more +than twenty leguas' distance from Manila. It has a stone church and +house, although these are much dilapidated from the weather. It was +a great district, but now it is much less because of the men drafted +for Manila. It has about six hundred Indians as tributarios. Two +religious live there generally. Service is performed in the Tagal +tongue. We have mentioned this convent in our description of the +lake of Bongbong or Taal, which is the nearest convent to Batangas, +from which it is even distant only one day's journey; the road passes +through certain most excellent meadows, resembling those of Espana; +where one may rear an immense number of cattle. The Indians through +all this district, which they call the Comintan, make use of domestic +cattle on which they travel and carry their loads. The language used +there is much like the Bisayan, for one can cross from this town of +Batangas, which is located on a very beautiful bay, to the Bisayas +with great ease during the brisas. This district belongs to the +archbishopric of Manila. + +Moreover, the provincial established a convent in Malolos. This +place lies two leguas by land from Bulacan, and there is an excellent +highway. From Manila it lies little less than one day's journey. This +village has greatly decreased; it has about three hundred Indians. It +is a priorate and has a vote, but has only one religious. It has a +wooden house, and has never had one of stone. [114] + +The father provincial established religious in Agonoy, where Tagal +is spoken. It is on the way to Pampanga, on a branch of that river +called Candaba. It is a very large priorate, for it has more than one +thousand rich and influential Indians. Three religious live there. It +is quite near to Macabebe and Calumpit, for one can ascend to either +place by the river in two hours. This town is not farther from Manila +than one day's journey. A quantity of wine is made there from a tree +that grows in its marshes, called palm or nipa. The house is wooden +and very poor. [115] + +Moreover, the father provincial established religious in Mexico, +a town of Pampanga. It receives its name from its great abundance +of water. A great quantity of rice is produced there, and it has a +fine plain. The house and church are of stone. It has about three +hundred tributes. [116]. It is a priorate and has a vote, and one or +two religious generally live there. This town is quite exposed to +the inroads of the Negrillos and Zambales, and there are continual +misfortunes of murders, and it is quite common to find headless +bodies in the field. It belongs to the archbishopric of Manila, and +lies more than one day's journey from the city, either by sea or creek. + + + + +Chapter XXV + +_Of the great oppositions suffered by the province in that time_ + + +[However, in these early days, even, peace and quiet are not for +the religious; and they find their work hindered and even opposed +by encomenderos and other Spaniards who work much evil against them, +and turn the natives against them. Our author mentions certain cases, +for the entire truth of which he vouches, which show the manner in +which some Spaniards act.] + +It happened while I was prior of Passi in the Bisayas, an encomienda +belonging to his Majesty, that some Indians had been drafted from +that district to man a fleet which was being built. Some of the poor +wretches, on the return from the expedition, desirous of returning to +their homes--seeing that after so long an absence they were detained +for other private works, now by this Spaniard and now by that one, who +seized them--fled. For the Indian acts without counsel, as he lacks +understanding. Very often, after having worked one month, and when, +within one or two days, they would be exchanged, they run away--thus +giving occasion to seek and punish them, and losing their wages, +and abandoning the axes with which they were working. It appeared +to a gentleman who was chief commander and lieutenant-governor in +Ylong-ylong, a port of Panay, an infringement of his rights that the +Indians should flee. Therefore, he sent two soldiers to look for them, +at the cost of the poor wretches. They came to the place where I was, +and told me why they came. I replied to them that they could look for +them immediately. They seized the governor, [117] and wandered for +three days amid the hills and valleys, stupidly, as if the Indians +would appear; for not only those Indians, but the peaceful ones had +abandoned their houses, and fled to the mountains. They returned, +worn out after three days, without a single Indian. The Spaniard who +acted as leader put the wretched governor, holding in his hands his +Majesty's rod of justice, in the stocks; and there he beat him at +his pleasure, now with a club, and now with his dagger. Thereupon +the Indian began to cry out so loudly that I heard his cries in the +convent. As 1 was about to go down, his relatives with tears informed +me of what was being done. I went alone to the government house, for my +companion was on a visit, this being the eve of the feast of the Holy +Spirit in 1623. I began to ascend and to reprimand the soldier and to +tell him that he had no authority to put that governor in the stocks, +nor to maltreat him. Then the soldier pointed his sword at my breast, +and gave me a very impudent message from the commandant. Among other +things, he told me that he would send for me and bind me with double +shackles. I laughed, brushed aside the sword, went to the stocks, +and took my Indian, all covered with his own blood, and so ill-used +that even yet he knows no well day, but is constantly ailing and +dispirited, and in a bed. Next morning, they took the governor +away, saying that the commandant would condemn him to the galleys, +as if he were the cause of the Indians fleeing. Fearful of the case, +I went down the river, and talked with the commandant. After talking +with him, he returned the Indian to me. Since then 1 have received +innumerable favors from him there, which I shall not name, as they +are not of interest. Nevertheless, the Indian spent more than six +taels of gold, or more than forty granos, in the journey. Let this +true account and fact be considered, and who serves his Majesty, who +protects the Indians, to what we religious are exposed, and what we +endure in the fulfilment of our duties, and in the preservation of the +country--which the Spaniards themselves are inciting to hostilities +by such oppressions. The soldier was not commended, but neither did +the commandant punish him. Within a short time he died, without his +hopes being obtained, and as they are wont to die here. May God in +His goodness have pity on his soul. + +While I was prior in Santisimo Nombre de Jesus (the chief house of +the province in the olden days), and while the chief commandant and +lieutenant-governor was another gentleman whom I shall not name +because of his influence, the latter struck a religious, whom I +had there as the head preacher, between the eyes. In order to take +away all opportunities for trouble, and that the commandant with +his influence might cause none to the order--for whatever such an +official wishes to do here, he does--I allowed the religious to go +to the convent of Carcar. It was necessary for this religious to go +to San Nicolas, on that saint's day, to preach, and he did so. As +soon as he arrived, clad in his black habit, in all the propriety +of an Augustinian religious, he went to the house of the foremost +man of the city, both in position and wealth, and his wife, who were +regarded most highly by the people, one of whose children had been +baptized by the religious. He requested this man to give him the little +loaves that the latter had been asked to make. The commandant heard +of his arrival, and immediately sent two soldiers and an adjutant +to seize him, and drag him with them, although he had retired. The +commandant had prepared a champan and shackles to send the religious +to Manila. I was advised of his arrest. I set out and went to tell +Bishop Don Fray Pedro de Arce, who was at that time in his house, +of the matter. He went out in his chair, followed him to the city +and we found the religious surrounded by soldiers, who immediately +opened the door and went away. We went to the convent, where the +bishop began to write. Two seculars, who defended this action, and +by whose authority the commandant did this, prevented the commandant +from being excommunicated. Finally, in a meeting of the orders, the +commandant was declared excommunicated. But the governor of Filipinas, +Don Juan Nino de Tabora, who should have punished the commandant, +neglected to do so. In this he did not imitate Don Juan de Silva, +who, when a similar case happened, summoned the alcalde-mayor who was +in llocos, took from him his office, and deprived him of all rights, +although he was pardoned by having had the express order of the bishop +of that province. But what men neglect to punish the Lord does not +forget to punish. He ordered a change of fortune after certain days, +so that the same governor, Don Juan Nino de Tabora, did not like this +gentleman. Accordingly, following the dictates of his conscience, +he made the latter leave Manila, under pretext of going to pacify an +encomienda that he had given him. Finally, things became so linked +together, that the above-mentioned man took refuge in our convent, for +he had not found a kindly reception in any other. There dispossessed +of his encomienda, which had been taken from him, he suffered for one +year, what that same gentleman knows; until that, with the arrival +at these islands of the inspector Don Francisco de Rojas, he left +the cloister--saying that he had not sinned against king, governor, +or state; but that, if he suffered, it was for his misconduct toward +our order in Sugbu. I might write thousands of things concerning +these events, where, as in the above, one might see the gain made +by the religious, and at what cost to them, as said Christ: _Eritis +odio omnibus propter nomen meum_. [118] Consequently, I cannot quite +understand how the Spaniards should desire us in these ministries, +so that, by our attending to our obligations, they could take pleasure +therein. This people whom we have in charge are rustic, uncivilized, +lawless, and have no more system of action than the will of their +chiefs. Now, then, how can these people become Christians, unless +they are gathered together, and restrained; and if the religious, +as fathers and masters, do not punish them? And if a father has the +well-known jurisdiction over his son--and this jurisdiction is extended +much more in the case of a master--why do we not have something for +these two titles? For if the Indians have no fear or respect for the +religious, of what advantage is our stay here? And how can we compel +those already christianized to fulfil their duties, if the Indian feels +that the father can not punish him? For they detest, as a rule, church +matters--to such an extent, that they would even pay two tributes to +be free from the church. They love their old beliefs and revelries so +strongly that they would lose their souls for them. Without any fear, +how would they attend to their duties? The extensive kingdom of China +is more densely populated than any other that is known, and there is +the greatest poverty among the common people, who are given to theft, +murder, and innumerable other sins. Yet it is the most peaceful kingdom +known and has no gallows or execution, but [they are restrained] by +means only of their fear of the bamboo with which they are beaten. Now +if the Indian lack this fear, who can bring him to reason? The Indians +are daily growing worse, for they are losing fear. Daily utterances +are made against the religious that they cannot punish them, and +should not do it. This reacts against the Spaniards themselves, for, +once aroused, the Indians will rebel when least expected; and they +know already how to wield a sword and use an arquebus. + +It is quite true that the religious do not mix in things of importance +belonging to other tribunals, and the fathers provincial are careful +to advise them on this matter; but the opposition to them in their +ministry is the cause of the devil and his work. Some persons, +under the pretext of piety, try to destroy the religious, saying +that the Indians are free, and protected in their liberty, and that +their liberty must not be taken away, but that they may wander as +they will. For the aim of the fathers is to have the Indians live in +villages. All this means harm to the Indian, for he is naturally lazy +and a friend of sloth. If he is allowed, he wanders about aimlessly +like a vagabond without working; and, at tribute-paying time, he +has not the wherewithal to pay. He begs a loan of the tribute, and +thus he becomes a slave. This would not happen, were he forced to +perform the work from which he flees. Thus in not allowing him to +become a vagabond, his own good is sought. We know well that there +are constables in Espana who arrest and search out the idle. Is that +contrary to the liberty in which we are born? Certainly not, for +idleness is the mother of all the vices, as St. Gregory insinuates, +when he names it as the chief cause of the destruction of Sodom: +_fuit iniquitas sororis tutu superbia, abundantia et otium._ [119] +Then, how can what is not opposed to liberty in Espana be opposed to +liberty here in a country which rears so remarkable natives? Therefore +for his own good much care must be taken of the Indian. What the +Indian should be, he would become with the knowledge of the priors, +so that they may make him settle down, and perform the work that is +to make him a Christian, support him, pay his tribute, and make him +a man of reason and judgment. [120] + +Besides this war waged on us by the secular element, that which was +most feared and dangerous, and caused the religious most anxiety, was +the spiritual war. This arose from the zeal of the bishop of Manila, +Don Domingo de Salazar, the first bishop of this city a man of vast +knowledge on all subjects, and who was not ignorant of the privileges +of the mendicant orders in the administration of the natives. He was +bishop in Manila, and thought that he ought not to allow the religious +so much freedom in the office that they were administering. He tried to +restrict them in many ways, and refused to concede much. The religious, +however, did not do less than to answer by pointing to the bulls of +the supreme pontiffs (called forth many times at the instance of the +Catholic sovereigns of Espana), and other _motus proprios_--all made +for the furtherance of good administration, and that the faith might +be propagated throughout the new kingdoms of their domains. The bishop +denied to the ministers everything pertaining to jurisdiction and +power; for he imagined that we could not grant dispensation in that +second degree for marriages, or exercise any judicial act of those +which recently--that is, ordinarily--they exercise over the newly +converted. This occasioned a great contention, and even scandal; for as +the country was new, and there was no other learning than that of his +Lordship--which doubtless was very great, and authorized by his dignity +and person--and that of our fathers, some said "yes," and others "no," +some that they could, others that they could not. Thus everything +was in confusion, not only among Ours, but throughout the islands. + +The father provincial was like a drowning man in this matter, and was +obliged to give attention to so grave a necessity as the present. As he +could devise no remedy here, he resolved to go to Espana, in order to +settle the whole matter. The bishop, who wished only to do the proper +thing, was glad of the voyage. He wrote some letters to religious of +the province of Mejico, whom he thoroughly trusted and believed in. He +set his doubts before them, and the arguments on which he grounded his +position, in order that the controversy might be settled amicably; +and that the province of Mejico, as the mother of this province, +might correct what his Lordship considered as excesses. + +The father provincial left Manila and reached Nueva Espana. He left +his vicar in the Filipinas, namely father Fray Francisco Manrique. He +pursued his voyage, and reached Espana in safety, where he despatched +his business very favorably--both in the Roman court, where Gregory +XIII was governing the Church of God; and in the court of Espana, +where he obtained very favorable decrees from his Majesty, Felipe +II, our king and sovereign. The latter approved everything that our +religious had done in the churches of those kingdoms and seigniories +of his. He granted many other favors and gifts, so that they might +prosecute the undertaking with greater resolution, and by the self-same +methods that had been used theretofore. While these matters were being +negotiated at court, the religious of this province, [121] conferring +upon the articles upon which the bishop and Ours disagreed, wrote to +the bishop letters of complete submission, in which they begged him to +moderate his anger, and await the decision that would soon arrive from +Espana with other decisions approving what had until then been done by +the religious, and encouraging them to go forward in the defense of +truth. The most learned Master Veracruz, as the father and protector +of the ministry, and defense of the privileges held by the religious, +wrote so learned a letter to the bishop, that it proved sufficient +to calm him. Later, that letter served as a primer for the ministers, +and a protection against the difficulties that arose. Of so much value +has been the opinion of this great man, and of all his writings. [122] +In conclusion, I will say that father Fray Andres de Aguirre returned +from Espana, whereupon those hurricanes which had been aroused were +laid. But he reached Mejico so broken from the journey that he did not +dare to go immediately to the Filipinas. However he sent the promised +news of what had been enacted concerning it, which was given a glad +reception. Thereupon, our fathers, like men who had reached land after +a great and severe storm, commenced to breathe. They gave thanks to +the Lord that He had not forgotten them. Thanks were given likewise +to his Majesty Felipe II; for by so many favors and privileges they +were able to prosecute the works that had been undertaken, and to +place their shoulders to works much greater for his service. This +was not alone for the good of the Augustinian order, but for that of +all the other orders; for if one order suffered shipwreck, all must +do the same, as all were in the same boat, directed by the same helm +in the same direction, and under the same winds. + +[Father Aguirre returned to the islands in 1593, where he was received +with joy. He died as was his wish, in the islands "which he loved +greatly, as he was one of the founders of that province."] + + + + + +Chapter XXVI + +_Of the chapter held in the Filipinas Islands, and as will be told +later, of the first election of our father Fray Diego de Alvarez._ +[123] + + +The year 1584 came, at which time father Fray Andres de Aguirre +had finished his term as provincial, as aforesaid; and the time had +come to give the province, according to the orders and rulings of our +regulations, a new head, who should take charge of the affairs of the +province, both in spiritual and temporal matters, with new strength, +and new energy and resolution. I do not deceive myself in comparing +the action of the chapter to that of retiling; for they act as one +who, when he perceives that his house is leaking, tries to remedy +that by putting on new tiles, which oppose the rain and wind with +new vigor and thoroughness, and keep the house free from leaks, +which at the last would utterly ruin it. In the same manner, the +superiors of the order, after the completion of their three years of +service in the office, would beyond any doubt be tired and liable to +yield more easily to any dispensation in the rigor of the observance, +so that gradually the edifice would be undermined--as the Holy Ghost +tells us, _qui spernit modica, paulatim decidet_. [124] Therefore in +order to avoid such troubles, which are so full of peril to the order, +our rules provide that new superiors be elected, who may carry out +the rigor of our laws with new resolution, new zeal, and new force, +and who should restore and suspend whatever time and opportunity +has relaxed somewhat, taking away the opportunity for evil custom +and abuses. Thus, desirous in this chapter of advance throughout the +province, the capitular fathers set their eves on father Fray Diego +de Alvarez, a man of learning and judgment, and of blameless life. Of +such a man did the province have need, so that with the quiet that it +had already negotiated at the cost of the anxiety, care, and diligence +of father Fray Andres de Aguirre, the new provincial might continue +what his predecessor had so happily commenced. Thus, then, the whole +chapter having turned their attention to the good of the province, +many things were settled in it; and the province began to spread, +and new priorates were assigned from the visitas of the order (which +were numerous and very widely scattered), so that by this means the +Indians could be better instructed and greater care taken of them. The +experience has shown us that they are a race with whom one cannot be +neglectful; and if it were possible to assign one religious to each +Indian, so that the latter might not lose sight of him, even this, +I believe would be insufficient. For scarcely has one left them +for any short space of time, when they return to their natural way +of life--just like the bow which, when strung, is bent; but, when +unstrung, at once straightens and regains its former position. + +In this chapter religious were established in the village of Bantay, +of the province of Ilocos, near the town of Fernandina, which now +exists only in name. [125] It is fifty leguas from Manila. It has +now an excellent wooden house and church. It belongs to the bishopric +of Cagayan, and the bishop of that province usually lives there. It +has two resident religious, and has more than one thousand Indians +in charge. The chapter placed a religious in the village of Purao, +[126] the first village in the province of Ilocos after leaving the +province of Pangasinan. This village belongs to the bishopric of +Cagayan, and is a district of about one thousand Indians, although it +is unhealthful. Two religious live there usually. It is fifty-four +leguas from Manila. One can go to the province of Ilocos either by +sea or by land, although the highway is very dangerous. One always +goes with an escort of armed Indians, for many Zambales wander through +those mountains, whence they descend to hunt heads. When there is no +resistance offered by arquebuses, of which they are in deadly fear, +they obtain heads very easily. + +This chapter established religious in Vigan, or the village of +Fernandina, near Bantay. There lives the bishop, to whom this +town has been given for his dwelling, and so that he may place +there what seculars he wishes. It is the best town in Ilocos, +although it has suffered its setbacks from fires, which have caused +much damage. The residence of the alcalde-mayor of this province is +here. This province is better than all the others, because the Ilocans +lead all the other Indians in being clean and heat, and in having +large settlements. However, that is due to the earlier religious, +who settled them in villages, and the people have remained settled +so thoroughly. Had the like been done in the other provinces, the +religious would not suffer so greatly. This province has thirteen +priorates in all, only four of which, or rather five, have a +vote. [127] The Indians are all Christians, and are the humblest and +most tractable known. The entire province lies along the coast, and has +fine rivers, which descend from the mountains. When the north winds +blow, the province is considered very unhealthful. It produces rice +in abundance, and all the native fruits, besides some of Castilla, +such as oranges, grapes, figs, etc. The houses are all built of +wood, and therefore liable to many fires, so that scarcely a year +passes when some convent does not burn. Now they have begun to roof +the houses with stone, that is, tile. This was begun by father Fray +Francisco de Mercado, [128] who has often been prior of Ilaoag--which +has more than one thousand five hundred Indians--and at other times +vicar-provincial of the same province. [129] + +This province is considered to have a great advantage over the others; +for when the Chinese arrive late, and cannot anchor or go to Manila, +they enter some port or river of Ilocos. On that account this province +is well supplied with necessaries, at very reasonable prices. Traders +are wont to go there from Manila in order to buy, and then take their +purchases to Manila with the north wind or brisa. Ships from Macau +and India are accustomed also to anchor in these ports, this depending +upon what time they come and all this is of advantage to this district. + +A great quantity of gold has been, and is, obtained from the province; +not that the province yields it, but the Igorrotes bring it down +from the mountains. They are light-complexioned Indians, but more +unconquerable than what we have said of Zambales and Negrillos. When +peaceful they bring down gold, which they extract there from their +mines; and they exchange it for cattle, which those along the coast +own. They trade also for abnormally large and completely white +swine--never have I seen them of such size in Espana. They also take +away blankets, which the people in Ilocos make of excellent quality, +from cotton, which is produced in abundance. But when the Igorrotes +are hostile, the same is suffered as at Pampanga, and even more. For +then those mountaineers come down to hunt heads, in which they take +great pride. This is a remarkable inclination of all these Indians, +for they are all bloodthirsty. Ours labored much in this province, +as will be seen. + +The father provincial established religious for the second time in +the districts near Passi in Bisayas. We have said enough of this in +its place, and I refer to that. + +Likewise the fathers of the definitorio established resident fathers +in Malate. This is only one short half-legua from Manila, and consists +of but one street, along which are three parish churches. The first is +Santiago [130] and is built of stone. It is excellent, and was ordered +to be built by Don Juan de Silva, governor of these islands. All the +Spaniards who live outside the city of Manila--who, I believe, number +more than those who live within--attend this church. These Spaniards +are all poor folk, and married to native, mestiza, or negro women. Many +are sailors; and some are in the islands only temporarily, engaged in +their petty trading, and because they can live more comfortably in +this country, and there is less heat, as it is open and free. This +suburb contains some stone houses, and some summer gardens. Farther +on is Ermita, which ministers to Tagal Indians, who number about four +hundred. [131] It has a stone church and the house of the beneficed +priest. It belonged to us first; but some time ago it was given to +the bishops of Manila, in order that they might have a house outside +the city, where they might refresh and recreate themselves. [132] +It is called Nuestra Senora de Guia. It has an image to which great +devotion is paid. When the ships from Castilla fail to come, and are +delayed, then they take out the image and carry it to the cathedral, +and a novena is performed in order that the Virgin may bring these +ships. Thus many times the ships have arrived at that time. At other +times it has happened that, after the novena, they have no news of +the vessels and they wish to return the Virgin, but the weather has +been such that it was impossible; but at that time news of the vessels +would arrive, which is the most joyful news for all the islands. For +if the vessels fail to come, in even one year, all are left without +help or shelter. [133] + +Further on in the same street is this convent of ours at Malate. It +has a stone church and house, sufficient for one religious, who lives +there and has in charge two hundred Indians. [134] The image, "Nuestra +Senora de los Remedios," has been highly reverenced. All the Indians +of these towns are traders, and their chief source of wealth is in the +voyages to Cavite. For there, at any time, they find a boat all ready, +which takes them to Cavite in a very short time. Very rarely is any of +these boats ever lost; for the Indians understand them perfectly, and +are wont to venture on the sea even with the waves running sky-high. + +Religious were established in Tanauan, situated in the lake of +Taal. It was a very fine town, rich and densely populated, but now +it is thoroughly impoverished. It has a wooden house and church, +and Ours minister to about seven hundred Indians. [135] The people +are Tagals. As one goes thither from Manila, he descends a truly +frightful hill for more than one legua. The convent lies on the +lake shore, and on the brow of the same land or slope. Tanauan lies +eleven or twelve leguas from Manila, and belongs to the latter's +bishopric. In it is Comintan, where many cotton hose are made. The +inhabitants are healthier and more clever than the others. Champans +(which are Sangley boats) enter this lake through the Taal River, by +which the lake empties into the sea; for the Chinese go everywhere, +and there is no islet, however devoid of profit it be, where they do +not go. If they can obtain nothing else at any islet they get wood; +and if that is lacking, yet they find on the coast material from +which they make lime. This they take to Manila, and it is not the +least expensive thing. + +A convent and religious were established in Lipa, which is located on +this lake, four leguas from the convent of Tanauan, of which I have +just spoken. This convent has at present about four hundred Indians. It +has one religious, and the place formerly was densely populated. But +already I have mentioned how this lake region has retrograded. Many +Indians have been taken thence to Cavite, and but very few return; +for they remain in that neighborhood, fleeing from work. There are +a very fine new house and church there, which are built of wood and +better than those of Tanauan. + +Religious were established in San Pablo in the mountains, [136] +which is fourteen leguas from Manila by way of Laguna de Bay--ten to +the Bay, and four to this convent. It was nothing until father Fray +Hernando Cabrera [137]--of the province of Andalucia, and a son of the +house at Cordova--went there, who was prior in that convent for many +years. Although neither its house nor its churches of stone, yet they +are of wood, and the best and finest in the province--particularly the +church, with its reredoses and paintings of the saints of the order, +so handsomely made that there is nothing finer in the islands. It +is feared, and with good reason, that since it is built of wood, +it will last but a short time, and that all that expense and beauty +will be wasted. The Indians were settled as if they were Spaniards, +and their village was laid out with its squares and so excellent +houses that it was good only to behold it. But as soon as the father +left there, all that order vanished; for all which does not tend +to keep the Indians in their fields and in the mountains makes them +dissatisfied. The father established so good a stock farm that the +Manila convent had to go there, and obtain from it five hundred head +of cattle; these were placed on the old stock farm, which no longer +had any cattle. He adorned the sacristy of the said village with so +much silver that no cathedral in Espana had an equal amount, for it +had abundance of every kind. As soon as this religious left there, +the convent of Manila took a notable ornament from it, which cost +it more than eight hundred granos. With this the house at Manila is +adorned during the most solemn feasts, both within and without the +house. The father did many things in other places, until his death +at sea, during a voyage to Espana in 1629. The province will always +mourn the death of this religious, for, besides his having done most +to increase it, he was the best Tagal interpreter. This, together +with his exceeding great renown in secular affairs, and his not less +observance in matters affecting his order, was a quality that would +make him esteemed in any community. He left this province to go to +take shelter in Espana. There was no provincial who would restrain +him; for of these religious there are some who had to be restrained, +since out of many crews not many men excel. He died at sea; and +it was well understood that God did not choose to leave him here, +but without doubt would take him to give him the reward of his many +labors and of his devotion. This convent has more than one thousand +Indians, and three religious--a very small number. Sometimes there +are two religious, the number depending upon the poverty or ease of +the time. A quantity of fruit grows in this place. The water is bad, +and therefore the religious are looking for better. Cattle draw the +fruit from here to Bay, where small Sangley and Japanese champans +are found. These buy the fruit to resell it in Manila; for all the +fruit and buyo used in the city of Manila comes from this Laguna, +as I believe I have already mentioned. Amid these heights are many +fresh-water lakes, and others of salt water, one-half legua in circuit +or more. Others are less but so deep that bottom cannot be found. They +are secrets of the Author of nature. + + + + +Chapter XXVII + +_Which treats of the chapter of this province in which father Fray +Diego Munoz [138] was elected_ + + +In the year 1587, the chapter was held in Manila. It was the first one +held according to the new rules received and ordered to be observed +in the general chapter held at Rome in 1581, when our very reverend +Tadeo Perusino, a man of great learning, notable for his sanctity, +and one of great skill in the government and management of grave +matters (as was declared by his Excellency Cardinal Jacobo Sabelio, +on this same occasion), was elected [general of the order] for the +second time. This work [i.e., the new rules] had been commenced +in 1575 at another general chapter, at which this illustrious man +was elected also. There all the provinces warned him of the need for +rules, for they had very few or none, and that, therefore, he should +ordain in this respect what he should consider most advisable; and +that they should order them to be printed. They also declared that it +was necessary to correct them, and make them conform with the holy +canons of the Council of Trent, and with certain new determinations +and rules of the most holy pontiffs, adding various other things +in harmony with the times, for with time everything changes. The +chapter having referred this matter to out most reverend father, his +Paternity consulted all the father provincials and learned men of all +the provinces, and finished the work with so great success that it +was quite concluded and approved by the year 1580, by the assistance +therein of his Excellency Cardinal Jacobo Sabelio, most beneficent +protector of our holy order. The latter presented these rules to his +Holiness Gregory XIII, so that he might amend and correct them as our +supreme head and shepherd. His Holiness committed them to two most +erudite cardinals, Alciato and Justiniano--the first doctor in both +laws, and the second a very great theologian, who had governed the +order of our father St. Dominic most worthily as its general. These +illustrious men having examined and approved them, his Holiness +deigned to bless them; and, as I think, that means that he approved +them without adding to them greater force than they possessed, as +they are the orders of our general chapters. That is the ceremony that +his Holiness is wont to display with provincial councils. Hence they +are authorized, but with no greater force than that given them by the +Council. For if he would positively approve the rules and order them +to be observed, then they would have the force of apostolic rules. The +fifth part of the said rules, which treats of degrees, was not received +by the Spanish provinces, who dissembled with it. The generals have +heard that, and not only have they not said anything about it, but +have even neglected it, so that the fifth part is now not binding. + +In what pertains to the visitors, they are elected in the province, +and have a vote in the provincial and intermediary chapters. But our +most reverend father generals have dispensed with their making visits +the third year, on account of the inconveniences that have been found +to result from the visit. + +Therefore, according to these new rules, the fathers assembled +in the Manila convent, and cast their votes for father Fray Diego +Munoz, although he had not reached the age of thirty years. That +was a sufficient argument for his ability, since his so great lack +of years was dispensed with, and since a province which was founded +with so great devotion chose to select a man so young. But in truth, +he was a person of so excellent erudition and rare virtue that that +dignity was the least thing that he merited. His election was very +well-received, and his person was judged to be very suitable for +the office. He was a son of the house of Mejico; and that fortunate +house has been one of great learning and virtue, as is proved by its +numberless illustrious sons who have gone forth from it. + +He came to the islands at the completion of his studies, eager for +the salvation of souls, and thinking that there were many laborers +for Nueva Espana and a lack of them for these islands. In the islands, +he so conducted himself, during the period of his residence in them, +that he was always ascending to higher planes, until he became +provincial. In that office he showed himself no less devoted than +previously to whatever arose for the welfare of his order, which was +not little. Nor did he show a halting courage in it, as will be told +in due season. He was commissary of the Holy Office in the islands, +which he administered with the greatest of prudence and wisdom, +and not less to the satisfaction of the inquisitors. + +He, also, added to the luster of the province by founding new +convents. Among them was that of Apalit, in Pampanga. Apalit is +located on the river of Candaba (of which we have before spoken), +very near to Macabebe. It had many Indians formerly, but now it has +very few, scarcely three hundred, I believe. [139] This house has +no vote. One religious, who is sufficient, generally lives there; +he can confess himself at the many convents near by, reached both by +water and by land. + +At this time Father Quinones, [140] a son of the house at Mejico, +died among the Tagals. The Indians cannot forget his life, for his +penances and mortifications were great, and he is commonly regarded as +a saint. He worked hard in his ministry, and gave the Indians excellent +instruction. He compiled a grammar and lexicon of the Tagal language, +and he was the first one to give the rules of the Tagal mode of speech, +so that the mysteries of our redemption could be declared better to +the Indians by one talking their language perfectly. He was learned, +and graduated in both laws; but he did not preach because of an +impediment in his speech, which was somewhat stammering.... + +[It is related that what was considered his body was found in 1634 +[141] to be in perfect preservation. Father Munoz died while still +a young man.] + + + + +Chapter XXVIII + +_Of the election of our fathet Fray Juan de Valderrama_ + + +When the time for the election came, namely, May 22, 1590, all the +capitulars, who were now coming from all parts, assembled. They came +from the Bisayas in their caracoas, and from llocos, some by land +and some by sea, for the election. Those among the Tagals and in +Pampanga were living nearer, and accordingly, without being absent +over Lent from their missions, they came at the critical moment and +entered Manila at the time set by our rules. Finally, all assembled, +and considered and consulted in regard to the person most suitable, +in their opinion, for the good and welfare of the province. That, to my +way of thinking, is what the religious always take by the horns, as men +who place the common welfare before the spiritual (or rather, private) +good. Finally, they thought that father Fray Juan de Henao (or rather, +Valderrama) was the man most suitable for that occasion. Accordingly, +they elected him, and his election was a most fortunate event, for +he was very religious and very devoted to his institution. Hence he +governed with great prudence and devotion. + +During his term some new priorates were established, which seemed +advisable for the good government and administration of the +Indians. Among them was that of Arayat, located in the farthest +corner of Pampanga. It had a goodly population at the beginning, +but now the population has dwindled to less than one hundred Indians; +[142] for on one side the Zambales, and on the other the conscriptions, +have been consuming them, as is seen at present in other districts. He +also established religious and visited the provinces very carefully, +and provided in all things quite in accordance with the obligation +of our calling. + +At this time happened a wonderful miracle in the province of llocos, +whose memory endures unto today. It was as follows. Among the religious +who were going to Filipinas quite ordinarily, in great numbers, went +father Fray Pedro de la Cruz, [143] to whom our Lord gave much of His +spirit, and who was called commonly "the Apostle of the Filipinas;" +and for him the Lord worked many wonderful miracles. The province of +Pangasinan--which as we said above we gave to the religious fathers +of our father St. Dominic (perhaps from this fact, the latter have +taken occasion to write that he was their religious; but the trick +matters not; only it is not right to take him from those to whom he +belongs, for the stones which shine with more luster in religion are +those in whom our Lord shows more of His piety and mercy)--fell to +this religious and holy man. This servant of God, then, being in a +village of that province called Bagnotan, saw an Indian woman carrying +a baby, to whom she had but recently given birth. The religious was +doubtless moved by the spirit of heaven in his question. The Indian +woman answered that she was taking the baby to bury it alive, for it +had been born blind. When he asked her for her reason, she said that +they had the custom of immediately burying alive any child born who +was incapable of serving its parents, for in such case the latter had +no interest or hope in its living. For it was an arduous task to give +them being, to bear them in travail, to rear them through childhood and +support them all their lives, since such children could not requite +so many benefits. No arguments availed to persuade the Indian woman +of the contrary, until the holy man made an agreement with her, +namely, that she should give him the child, and that he would rear +her and support her as his own daughter. With this agreement, the +mother gave the child to Father Pedro de la Cruz, and he entered his +convent with his new daughter. He got a woman to nurse her at the +price of four reals per month, and then with his right as father, +set about baptizing her. He did so, and it was our Lord's pleasure, +for the credit of His servant, the value of holy baptism, and His own +glory, and likewise so that that devilish custom should cease, that, +as soon as the infant received the water of holy baptism, she gained +her sight, although she had indeed been born blind.... + + + + +Chapter XXIX + +_Of the second election of our father Fray Diego Alvarez_ + + +Father Fray Diego de Alvarez left so good an estimation of himself +during the three years of his service as provincial, and governed +with so great prudence, that so great a desire for his rule was +aroused that, upon the arrival of the time assigned by our rules, +the fathers did not wish to make any new trials of conditions which, +although in appearance good, afterwards are found deceitful. They +had had experience of the prudence of father Fray Diego Alvarez, and +accordingly reelected him so that they might enjoy him for the second +time; for in truth he had been a father to them. Hence he was elected +unanimously, May 6, 1593. His election was very favorably received in +the islands, for he was always much loved by his own and by others; +and he always showed great judgment, preserving the province during +his two trienniums in that flower and rigor of devotion which it had +at first, and also glorifying the province with the new inauguration +of houses and convents. + +He established a religious in Pototan, a village then ruined; [144] +and that village, as it was so small, was united, above Suagui, +with another called Baong. [145] Accordingly, a church was built +there. This convent of Baong had more than one thousand Indians, and +was a well-known place for recreation; but now, although it endures, it +has but six hundred Indians. As it is remote from trade, and situated +inland, residence there is regarded as exile. It is one day's journey +from Dumangas, and its river empties into that of Alaguer. + +This chapter also established religious in Sibucao, a matter of one +legua from the Suagui River, up the river Alaguer. The road also +turned from Dumangas by ascending the river, although by land the +journey is shorter. This convent was very well located here, for, +in short, it is within sight of so gloomy [146] a river, and very +convenient for the religious. Afterward the fathers thought that they +were acting wisely in moving the convent one-half day's journey inland +to a village called Laglag, very inconvenient for the religious. But +indeed it is apparent how the fathers of former days sought rather +the comfort of the natives than their own convenience; accordingly, +wherever they found the most people, there they went. This convent +has more than one thousand Indians, and two religious live there +ordinarily. It is one of the good convents of the province of Bisayas, +and has a wooden church. [147] + +The bishop of Sugbu, Don Fray Pedro de Agurto, bestowed the district +of Salog upon the province, as I have said before. It is very near +the port and fort of Ilong-ilong. It is an excellent port, and has +now been improved through becoming the property of his Majesty. This +convent has more than one thousand Indians in charge, and generally +has two religious. Its chief center is on the coast, or rather, +near the coast, on a fine river, and its visitas are inland. + +Religious were established also in the village of Octong, one of +the chief villages of the Bisayas. That convent has a vote, and is +in charge of more than one thousand two hundred Indians. [148] It +is one-eighth legua from the village of Arevalo. This village was +well inhabited, and the people spread along that coast. The Dutch +burned it once, as well as the convents of Salog and Tigbauan; but +it was rebuilt, better than ever. In regard to the people along the +coast, they have diminished greatly, for the ravages [of pirates] +on that coast are frightful. I cannot understand how the Indians +can endure so much, for they have too much toil--now with the little +fleet that defends their coast, now with the ships sent to Ternate, +whose boats are laded and provisioned in that port. Two religious +live in that convent, which is adorned with considerable silver and +many ornaments. The people are intelligent, as they are reared with +Castilians. The convent is situated in the Sugbu bishopric. + +Religious were established in Potol, [149] the first point on Panay +Island coming from Manila. That convent enjoys an exceedingly large +stipend, for its jurisdiction extends very far. It has as visitas the +five islands mentioned previously, and all those coasts. Thus it had +more than two thousand Indians. Later fleeing from their enemies, +more came to the island, four leguas up the river of Ibahay. The +river is so long that it has an ascent of as many more leguas. This +was my first priorate in 1611, when it was yet good. That year came +three severe hurricanes--called _baguios_--which ruined the country, +and laid low the church and house, which was very large and fine. I +rebuilt it. Afterward our Father Barona [150] exchanged it for that +of Tigbauan. The bishop of Sugbu made two benefices of that district, +and two beneficiaries reside there at present. But the natives always +remember the first religious that they had, for what is known first +is liked more--but not because they have ceased to be tended with +good devotion. + +During this three years, priorates were established in many convents +in llocos, as in that of Tagudin. That convent suffers greatly from +the Igorrotes, and on that account is almost depopulated. [151] +A priorate was established in Candon, an important priorate of that +province and the best, although without a vote. It ministers to more +than one thousand five hundred Indians. [152] Another was established +in Nalbacan, a priorate with a vote, although it has been greatly +exhausted by the burning of the church and convent. Batac also is an +excellent priorate, and now is one of those that have a vote and are +more esteemed. Resident religious were established in Dinglao, [153] +which is an excellent vicariate. Religious were placed in Bauang. All +these convents belong to the bishopric of Nueva Segovia or Cagayan, +as above stated. + +In the island of Manila, that is, in the archbishopric of Manila, +religious were established, in Caruyan and Quingua. Now these last +two are vicariates, and do not have one thousand Indians. + +The religious living in them can scarcely support himself. [154] + + + (_To be concluded._) + + + + + + +Bibliographical Data + + +The following documents are obtained from MSS. in the Archivo general +de Indias, Sevilla: + +1. _Letter from Manila Dominicans._--"Simancas--Eclesiastico; Audiencia +de Filipinas; cartas y expedientes de personas eclesiasticas de +Filipinas; anos de 1609 a 1644; est. 68, caj. 1, leg. 43." + +2. _Letters from Juan Nino de Tavora,_ 1629.--"Simancas--Secular; +cartas y espedientes del gobernador de Filipinas vistos en el Consejo; +Audiencia de Filipinas; anos de 1629 a 1639; est. 67, caj. 6, leg. 8." + +3. _Letters from Juan Nino de Tavora,_ 1630.--The same as No. 2. + +The following document is obtained from Pastells's edition of Colin's +_Labor evangelica_: + +4. _Decree regarding missions._--In vol. iii, p. 686. + +The following document is taken from the Ventura del Arco MSS. (Ayer +library): + +5. _Relation of 1629-30._--In vol. i, pp. 617-625. + +6. Medina's _Historia de la orden de S. Agustin_ is partly translated +in full, partly synopsized, from a copy of the printed work in the +possession of the Editors. + + + + + + +NOTES + +[1] See _Vol_. xxii, p. 128. + +[2] See, _post_, the statements of the fiscal at Madrid regarding +the various points of this letter. His examination was made and his +opinions noted before the decrees of the Council were given. + +[3] Referring to the Dutch East India Company, formed by the +consolidation (1602) of the various trading companies in the Orient, +by the States-General of Holland. This was for many years one of +the richest and most successful of the world's great commercial +associations; but in the eighteenth century its condition became one of +decline. When Holland and Belgium were conquered by France, in 1795, +the Dutch East India Company was practically abolished. Thereafter, +until 1808, the Dutch Indias were administered by a committee of the +States-General, and in the latter year their government was formally +vested in the Dutch nation, which has from that time retained it. + +[4] Spanish _vandala_: a Filipino word, signifying a forcible +assessment on the natives for government supplies--_i.e.,_ a +repartimiento; see explanation in Retana's _Zuniga_, ii, p. 532*. For +later and different use of the word, see Zuniga's text (_ut supra_), +i, p. 325. + +[5] Alluding to the floods which, as often in former years, had +recently inundated a part of the valley in which lies the City +of Mexico. In 1627 heavy rains caused the bursting of the dams +that confined the Quauhtitlan River, and parts of the city were +overflowed. The same experience was repeated in 1629, but to such +an extent that the entire city was under water, in most places more +than five feet deep. It was more than four years before the city was +freed from this calamity, and not until 1634 was this accomplished for +the valley, by a series of earthquake shocks. See Bancroft's account +of these floods, and the drainage works undertaken to prevent them, +in his _Hist. Mexico_, iii, pp. 7-11, 85-91. + +[6] The petition here addresses the governor instead of the king. + +[7] See _Vol_. VIII, pp. 127, 133, where the encomiendas of Butuan +and Oton are mentioned as held by Dona Lucia de Loarca. This would +indicate that Silva's wife was a granddaughter of Miguel de Loarca, +and that her father was a son of the latter. + +[8] The above matter in quotation marks, as appears from a footnote +in the Ventura del Arco MS., is taken from a letter written by Father +Manuel Azevedo, rector of Manila, May 3,1630. Evidently "Manila" is +an error for "Malaca," and the letter was probably written to Manila, +and the above section embodied in the relation written from that place. + +[9] See account of the establishment of this mission, in _Vol_. XVIII, +p. 213. + +[10] The festival here mentioned would seem, from its length, to +mean the two feasts observed by the Chinese in the first month of +the year--New Year's and the "feast of lanterns." See accounts of +these and other feasts in Williams's _Middle Kingdom_, ii, pp. 76-84; +and Winterbotham's _Chinese Empire_, ii, pp. 49, 50, 138-142. + +[11] Fray Juan de Medina was born at Sevilla, and entered the +Augustinian convent of that city. On reaching the Philippines he was +assigned to the Bisayan group, and was known to those natives by +the name of "the apostle of Panay." A zealous worker, he was wont +on feast days to preach to his flock in three languages--Bisayan, +Chinese, and Spanish. He was minister at Laglag in 1613, at Mambusao +in 1615, at Dumangas in 1618, at Panay in 1619, and at Passi in 1623; +prior of the convent at Cebu in 1626; and definitor in 1629. After +twenty years of missionary labors, being soul-tormented, he asked and +secured reluctant permission to return to Spain; but the exigencies +of the weather prevented the ship from making its voyage. Three years +later he obtained permission to make the same voyage, but died at sea +(1635). Diaz, in his _Conquistas_, says that Medina composed many +things in aid of his missionary work; but only the present history +and four volumes of manuscript sermons in the Panayana language are +known with certainty. See Perez's _Catalogo_, pp. 83-85; and Pardo +de Tavera's _Biblioteca Filipina_, p. 255. + +[12] The island of Panay, in which is a village of the same name. The +Augustinian missionaries began their labors in this island in 1572, +at Oton (or Ogtong). Their first establishment in the archipelago was +at Cebu (1565). Dumangas mission was begun in 1578; Aclan, in 1581; +Passi, in 1593; Ibahay, in 1611. All these are in Panay. See list of +convents and villages founded by the Augustinians in the Philippines, +from 1565 to 1880, at the end of Medina's _Historia_, pp. 481-488. + +[13] The monument of Legazpi and Urdaneta presented in this volume +was the work of the sculptor, Agustin Querol, and of the architect, +Luis Maria Cabello. On the front and rear of the pedestal are the +arms of Manila and Spain. On one side are allegorical representations +of the sea and, valor for Legazpi, and on the other the emblems +of science for Urdaneta. The pedestal ends above in a border upon +which are the names of Magallanes, Elcano, Jofre de Loaisa, and +Villalobos. This monument is due to Senor Gutierrez de la Vega, +who initiated a public subscription during the last years of the +Spanish regime for a monument to the two discoverers. As it arrived at +Manila where Spanish authority in the islands was tottering or ended, +it was placed in position by the Americans. See "Espana y America," +(Augustinian review), for April, 1903, pp. 479-485. + +[14] See _Vol_. XV, p. 102, note 66. + +[15] Western group of the Carolinas. They were called Los Reyes, +because they were discovered on the sixth of January, when the festival +of the holy kings is celebrated.--_Miguel Coco, O.S.A._ + +Fray Miguel Coco--born at Zamora in 1860, and a resident in the +Philippines during 1881-95--was editor of Medina's _Historia_, on which +he made copious annotations. Many of these we reproduce or synopsize, +in English translation, all of which are signed by his name. + +[16] The Corales (or Coral), San Esteban, or Jardines Islands are +now the northern Carolinas.--_Coco_. + +[17] Now the Palaos.--_Coco_. + +[18] For the name of this latter island, see _Vol_. II, p. 68. The +Spanish editor of Medina, in referring to San Agustin's _Conquistas_ +(p. 26), where the name of this island is discussed, says wrongly +that the name was given by the Legazpi expedition. It is one of the +western Carolinas. + +[19] In hydrography the name _placeres_ is given to the layer of sand +in stagnant water or alluvion which usually has particles of gold. The +Placeres are in die western part of the Carolinas. See San Agustin's +_Conquistas_, p. 67, and Montero y Vidal's _El archipielago filipino_ +(Madrid, 1886), pp. 443-499.--_Coco_. + +[20] The largest of the Marianas or Ladrone Islands is Guam, which +was ceded to the United States by Spain in 1898. The remaining twelve +smaller islands of the group were transferred to Germany by Spain. + +[21] Retana (_Estadismo,_ ii, p. 512*) says that the _baroto_ is now +a boat dug out of a single log, sometimes of more than eighty feet +in length. They are used principally for the lading and discharging +of vessels, and are native craft of Cebu and neighboring islands. See +_U.S. Gazetteer of Philippine Islands_ (Washington, 1902). + +[22] See _Vol_. I, pp. 105-111, for the English translation of +this bull. The translation of the portion quoted occupies parts of +pp. 108, 109. + +[23] This image is not now carried to the Cathedral on St. Vidal's +day. It is carried in procession, however, on the second Sunday +succeeding Epiphany when the Church celebrates the feast of the sweet +name of Jesus. Until the end of Spain's domination of the islands +the banner of Castile was also carried in this procession.--_Coco_. + +[24] Literally "barren loves," the _Chrysopopogon acicutatus_ +(Trin.). It is described by Delgado (_Historia,_ p. 744) as a brake +that is found quite commonly in the fields, and has small ears that +bear a kind of very small millet, like that called _vallico_ in Spain, +which grows among the wheat. It has a rough mildew that sticks to +the clothes and penetrates them, which the Spaniards call _amores +secos_. It is especially abundant where there are cattle; and when +these are grazing, the plants penetrate their eyes, even blinding +them because they grow so thickly, and they must be withdrawn with +the fingers. + +[25] Charts of the villages of Opong and Cordoba in the island of +Mactan, made about 1893, showed that the island possessed 15,060 +inhabitants.--_Coco_. + +Bulletin No. 1, of _Census of the Philippine Islands_: 1903, +"Population of the Philippines" (issued by the Bureau of the Census, +of the Department of Commerce and Labor, Washington, 1904), gives +the present population of Mactan, which is in the province of Cebu, +as 17,540, all civilized. + +The Philippine Islands are divided into provinces or _comandancias,_ +the latter meaning military district, and in which civil government +has not yet been established. The province or comandancia is divided +into municipalities and _barrios_. That barrio or ward in which +the municipal government is located is called the _poblacion_ or +_centro_. The census of the various municipalities has been returned +for each barrio. See Bulletin No. 1, _ut supra_. + +[26] Cebu and San Nicolas are now two independent towns. The census +of the latter, about 1893, showed 20,498 inhabitants.--_Coco_. + +The population of the island of Cebu, according to the census of +1903 (see Bulletin No. I, _ut supra_), was 592,247; of the city of +Cebu, 31,079; or, if the closer-built part of this municipality, +which may properly be regarded as the city of Cebu, be considered, +its population is 18,330. + +The steady increase in the total population of the Philippines, as +shown by various reports and sources, more or less authoritative +and trustworthy, is seen in the following figures. At the time +of the discovery by Magallanes in 1521, the total population is +supposed to have numbered about 500,000. In 382 years, according to +the census report of 1903, the population (now 7,635,426, slightly +more than the 1900 census of New York State) has multiplied fifteen +times. The increase during the past century was 1.5 per cent. Of +the present population, 6,987,686 are civilized or partly so, and +647,740 are wild and uncivilized, although they have some knowledge +of domestic arts. Of this latter number about 23,000 are Negritos, +who are supposed to be the aborigines of the archipelago. Sources +(ecclesiastical and governmental) give the census for various years +as follows; they cannot all be taken as definite, although some are +approximately so: + + + 1735 837,182 + 1799 1,522,224 + 1805 1,741,234 + 1812 1,933,331 + 1815 2,502,994 + 1817 2,062,805 + 1818 2,026,230 + 1827 2,593,287 + 1833 3,153,290 + 1840 3,096,031 + 1845 3,434,007 + 1850 3,800,163 + 1862 4,734,533 + 1870 4,698,477 + 1876 5,567,685 + 1879 5,817,268 + 1887 5,984,727 + 1891 6,101,682 + 1896 6,261,339 + + +That guesswork has figured to some extent in these figures is evident; +but as a whole they represent tolerably well the growth of the +islands. The figures for 1903 are to be relied on. See Bulletin No. 1, +_ut supra_, and _U.S. Gazetteer of the Philippine Islands_, pp. 25-31. + +[27] The episcopal residence is now in Vigan, Ilocos Sur, where it +was removed in 1755 from Lal-lo, Cagayan.--_Coco_. + +[28] The island now known as Samar was formerly called Samar in the +south, and Ibabao in the north.--_Coco_. + +[29] The island of Panay has at present one hundred villages, +scattered through the three provinces of Iloilo, Capiz, and Antique, +and the two districts of Concepcion and Aclan--with a population in +1893 of about 790,772 people, of whom the Augustinians had in charge +561,158.--_Coco_. + +The "Bulletin" above cited gives Panay (which comprises parts of +Antique, Capiz, and Iloilo provinces) 743,646 people, of whom 14,933 +are wild. + +[30] This is a fact if the figures of the _U.S. Gazetteer of +the Philippine Islands_ are correct. Those figures show that the +mainland of Luzon contains 43,075 square miles and that of Mindanao +45,559. While these numbers may not yet be taken as authoritative +they may be regarded as approximate until actual and scientific +surveys are made. Algue's _Atlas_ follows the generally accepted +though perhaps erroneous idea that Luzon is the larger of the two, +its figures being 47,238 and 36,237 square miles, respectively. + +[31] This cross is still preserved. It was enclosed in an octagonal +temple by the Augustinians in the time of the Augustinian bishop of +Cebu, Fray Santos Maranon, in order to preserve it from the weather, +and from the natives, who, regarding it as miraculous, were accustomed +to take splinters from it as relics. The foundation of the enclosure +is of stone, and it has a grated window which permits passers-by to +see the cross. The latter is wooden, not stone, as Montero y Vidal +states in his _Historia general_, i, p. 17. This is the identical +cross erected by Magallanes in 1521.--_Coco_. + +[32] This statement is an error. Drake's first trip to Spain was made +to the Biscayan coast in 1564, and was only for the voyage. See Julian +Corbett's _Sir Francis Drake_. (London, 1890). + +[33] Fray Bernabe Villalobos was born in Leon, and professed in +the Augustinian convent of San Felipe el Real. He went to the +Philippines in 1590, where he had charge of missions in Halaud +(1591), Panay (1593), and Oton (1596). He was twice prior of Manila +(1602 and 1613), twice of Cebu (1606 and 1618), and definitor (1616), +and later labored in the Tagal missions. His death occurred at Manila +in 1646. See Perez's _Catalogo_, p. 41. + +[34] Compare the materialism of the North American Indians, in +Cleveland reissue of _Jesuit Relations_, viii, p. 119; xx, p. 71; 1, +p. 289. + +[35] Fray Juan de Alva was born of an illustrious family in Segovia, +and professed in the Augustinian convent at Toledo in 1514. In 1535 +he went to Mexico, where he labored for thirty-three years. At the age +of seventy-two he went to the Philippines, landing at Cebu in 1569. He +labored successfully in Panay, and founded the church of Dumangas. In +1572 he was elected first prior of the convent of Manila and definitor, +after which (1575) he began the foundation of Pasig. He became rector +provincial of the Philippines in 1576, and died at Manila, September +17, 1577. See Perez's _Catalogo_, p. 8. + +[36] Fray Alonso Jimenez was a native of Malaga, and took his vows in +the Augustinian convent at Mexico in 1558. He accompanied Juan de Alva +to the Philippines, where he voted in the first provincial chapter. He +was the first missionary to the islands of Masbate, Leyte, Samar, +and Burias. Thence he went to Ibalon in the province of Camarines, +where he resided several years, and made many excursions into Albay and +Sorsogon. He was prior of Cebu in 1575. Endowed with great facility +in learning languages, he became known as the first linguist of the +islands. His death occurred in August, 1577, at the Cebu convent. He +composed a catechism in the Bicol language. See Perez's _Catalogo_, +p. 9. + +[37] Fray Diego Ordonez Vivar was a native of Guadalajara in Nueva +Galicia, and professed in the convent of Mexico in 1557. Arriving at +the Philippines in 1570 he became the first missionary to Bulacan in +1572, provincial secretary in 1580 and 1584, minister at Hagonoy in +1582 and 1587, procurator-general in 1583, and minister at Tendo in +1594 and 1599. He died in Pampanga in 1603. Agustin Maria, O.S.A., +in his _Osario Venerable_ (still unpublished) says that Ordonez was +in Japan and was an eye-witness of the martyrdom of the Franciscans +in 1596. See Perez's _Catalogo_, pp. 9, 10. + +[38] Fray Diego de Espinar was born in Toledo and entered a convent +in Castilla. Almost immediately upon his arrival at Cebu (1570) +he was assigned to the region about Laguna de Bay. He was the first +missionary at Bonbon (1575), Mindoro (1578), Paranaque (1580), and +Candaba (1581). He took part in the first diocesan council celebrated +by Bishop Salazar; and in 1587 went to Macao, where he lived until +1596. While returning to Manila in the latter year he was wrecked and +drowned between Mindanao and Borneo (1597). He had been definitor in +1581. See Perez's _Catalogo_, p. 10. + +[39] "For he finds shackles who finds kindnesses." + +[40] St. Gregory, _Homil. II in Evangelia_.--_Coco_. Englished, this +reads: "Therefore, he desires to plunder him who carries a public +treasure along the street." + +[41] This islet is today called Corregidor. The name Mariveles is +applied to the mountain ridge in the southern part of Bataan Province, +whose brow forms, with Corregidor, one of the entrances to Manila +Bay. It is a great pity that Corregidor is not well fortified, +in case of war with a foreigner, as it is a very strategic point, +and the key to the port and city of Manila.--_Coco_. + +[42] Buzeta and Bravo, _Diccionario Geografico_, say that Manila Bay +is thirty-three leguas in circumference, and has a maximum depth of +thirty-five brazas. + +Manila Bay is one of the finest bays in the world and by far the best +in the Far East. It will accommodate all the fleets of the world. Its +greatest dimensions are from Tubutubu Island in the estuary of Orani, +bay of Pampanga, in the northwest angle of the shore of the greater +bay, to Las Pinas, thirty-five miles, near the boundary between +Cavite and Rizal; and from the delta of the river Grande Pampanga, +on the shores of Bulacan in the northeast, to Corregidor Island, +southwest, thirty-one miles. It is one hundred and twenty miles in +circumference. Five of the important rivers of the archipelago empty +into it. See _U.S. Gazetteer of the Philippine Islands_, p. 186. + +[43] Tondo now contains 39,043 civilized inhabitants. It is the +most northerly and populous district along the bay shore above the +Pasig. Its inhabitants are largely engaged in the tobacco and cigar +industries, and in fishing, weaving, and gardening for the Manila +market. See Bulletin No. 1 of the Census Bureau, and _U.S. Gazetteer +of the Philippine Islands_, p. 188. + +[44] Psalms cxxi, 7.--_Coco_. + +[45] Matthew xvii, 20.--_Coco_. + +[46] See _Vol_. VI, p. 115, note 27. + +[47] See _Vol_. VI, p. 88, note 22. + +[48] See _Vol_. IX, p. 95, note 18. + +[49] Fray Agustin de Alburquerque was a native of Castilla, and +professed at the convent of Salamanca. Batangas became the theater +of his missionary labors in the islands. He was definitor in 1572, +prior of Tondo in 1575, and prior provincial in 1578, renouncing +to the Franciscans during his term the _omnimoda_ ecclesiastical +jurisdiction. He tried to sell himself as a slave, in order that he +might introduce Christianity into China. He is the author of the +first or second Tagal grammar, the Franciscans claiming that the +first was written by Fray Juan de Plasencia. He died in 1580. See +Perez's _Catalogo_, pp. 13, 14. + +[50] Fray Francisco Merino took his vows in the Augustinian province of +Castilla. After his arrival in the islands he labored in the province +of Iloilo until his death. Although he was proposed as one of the +associates of Father Rada on the latter's memorable journey to China in +1576, Jeronimo Marin went in his stead; while he himself accompanied +Juan de Salcedo and Pedro Chaves on the Camarines expedition. He died +in 1581. See Perez's _Catalogo_, p. 14. + +[51] Fray Juan de Orta, born in Moguer, in the province of Huelva, +professed in the convent of Mexico in 1558. He was a novice under +Urdaneta. Shortly after his arrival at the islands, he learned the +Bicol language, in which he evangelized with great success. A number +of villages founded by him were later handed over to the care of the +Franciscans. In 1575 he returned to Manila to help the prior there, +where he worked zealously, having in charge also until his death (in +Manila on Palm Sunday, 1577) the village of Paranaque. See Perez's +_Catalogo_, p. 12. + +[52] Isaiah v, 20.--_Coco_. + +[53] This edifice is still in existence. It is the only one with a +stone vault which has been constructed in the archipelago. It resisted +with but little damage the series of most severe earthquakes which +devastated Manila so frequently. The earthquake of 1880 split one +of its towers, which the fathers of the convent afterward ordered +to be pulled down. The church is the most capacious and beautiful +in Manila, in spite of these circumstances. Its architect was the +Augustinian lay-brother Fray Antonio Herrara, nephew or son of the +famous architect who built the Escorial.--_Coco_. + +[54] _In reg_., chapter viii. This is in English: "And therefore, +the more fully that you shall watch over a common possession than +your own, so much the more fully shall you learn how to progress." + +[55] St. Poss, in his life of St. Augustine [_Vita S. Augustini_], +chapter xxix. Englished the above quotation is, "He made no will, +for, as he was a pauper in Christ, he had nothing." + +[56] The _U.S. Gazetteer of the Philippine Islands_ (p. 374) says that +the lake of Bonbon or Taal is second in importance among the lakes +of Luzon. Its circumference is seventy-five miles, being seventeen +miles from north to south and twelve and one-half miles from east to +west: It reaches a depth of one hundred and six fathoms very near +shore. The crater of the volcano of Taal in its center supplies +quantities of sulphur. + +[57] The last parochial census (before 1893) gave Taal 32,908 +inhabitants, and says that from it was formed the village of Lemery, +which has 16,738 inhabitants.--_Coco_. + +Bulletin No. 1 (_ut supra_) gives the present civilized population of +Taal as 17,525. The chief industries of the people are agriculture, +herding, fishing, and the coast trade. Lemery has 11,150 civilized +inhabitants. + +[58] For a late discussion of the volcanoes of the Philippines, see +Bulletin No. 3 of _The Census of the Philippine Islands_, "Volcanoes +and Seismic Centers," published by the Department of Commerce and +Labor, Bureau of the Census (Washington, 1904). + +[59] Today (1893) Tanauan has 21,363 inhabitants; Lipa, 40,031; +Bauang, 39,275; and Batangas, 35,156.--_Coco_. + +The Bulletin's figures give Tanauan 18,263 civilized inhabitants; +Lipa, 37,934; Bauang, 39,094; and Batangas, 33,131. + +[60] This lake has a coast-line of 108 miles, and its two greatest +diameters are respectively 32 and 28 miles. Fifteen rivers empty into +it. See _U.S. Gazetteer of the Philippine Islands._ + +[61] The original reads: "_porque dos Iglesias_," which we have +regarded as a misprint for "_porque dos leguas_." + +[62] The original is "_de voto_." Perhaps Medina means that the +religious at this visita had the right of voting at the election of +the provincial.--_Coco_. + +[63] Calumpit has now (1893) 15,024 inhabitants.--_Coco_. + +Bulletin No. 1 (_ut supra_) gives the present civilized population +of Calumpit as 13,897. + +[64] A small bird, native to the island of Cerdena, whose nest is +utilized by the cuckoo. The context, however, suggests that the +word may be a misprint for _mezquitas_, referring to the mezquit +(_Algarobia_) of Nueva Espana--the writer meaning that along the +Quingua valley were numerous thickets of some shrub resembling the +mezquit. The river is now fringed with clumps of prickly bamboo. It +is also possible that _mosquitas_ is simply a misprint for _mosquitos_ +("mosquitoes"). + +[65] Fray Pedro Mejia was born in La Mancha, and professed in the +Augustinian convent at Valladolid. He became prior of Guadalupe in +1621, and later definitor and visitor. He was minister at Narvacan +in 1611 and of the Tagal villages of Calumpit, Bauan, and Guiguinto +until his death in 1659. See Perez's _Catalogo_, p. 94. + +[66] Fray Luis Ronquillo, nephew of Governor Gonzalo Ronquillo, was +born in the city of Arevalo (Spain), in the province of Avila. He was +lecturer in theology, master, and prior of the convent of Arenas. He +went to the Philippines in 1624, where he became preacher in 1626, +definitor-general in 1628, prior of Manila and master of novitiates in +1638, prior of Tondo and Malate, and definitor of the province in 1632; +and was at the missions of Calumpit (1629), Bay (1635), Bulacan (1641), +and Pasig (1642). He died at Manila in 1644. See Perez's _Catalogo_, +p. 102. + +[67] The census prior to 1893 gave Lubao 20,568 inhabitants.--_Coco_. + +Its present civilized population according to Bulletin No. 1 (_ut +supra_) is 19,063. + +[68] Doubtless a mistake of the author, for Manila is about three +hundred and twenty miles from Iloilo.--_Coco_. + +[69] Today (1893) administered by seculars, to whom the Augustinians +ceded it.--_Coco_. + +[70] Today Halaud.--_Coco_. + +[71] Duenas.--_Coco_. + +[72] Dingle.--_Coco_. + +[73] The island of Guimaras, today (1893) in charge of +seculars.--_Coco_. + +[74] The present province of Antique.--_Coco_. + +[75] The Chinese call their country Song-Song.--_Coco_. + +[76] "_Manguianes._--The heathen, unaffiliated natives inhabiting the +interior of Mindoro, Romblon, and Tablas. Manguian (forest people) +is a collective, name of different languages and races. According to +R. Jordana, the Manguianes of Mindoro are divided into four branches, +one of which, Bukil or Buquel, is a bastard race of Negritos, while a +second in external appearance reminds one of Chinese Mestizos, and on +that account it is to be regarded as a Mongoloid type. The other two +are pure Malay." (Blumentritt's "Native Tribes of the Philippines," +in _Smithsonian Report,_ 1899, p. 541.) + +Colin says (_Labor evangelica,_ lib. i, cap. iv, sec. 30) that the +tribes dwelling at the headwaters of the rivers in the various islands +are known by almost as many different names--among these, as Zambales, +Manguianes, etc. "It is understood that they are mestizos of the +other tribes, the savage and the civilized; and that for this reason +they rank between those two classes of peoples in color, dress, and +customs." He also describes their habits and mode of life (cap. vi, +sec. 52), and says of them: "They are a simple, honest, temperate +people," and adds that, up to the time of writing his book, they +had not been christianized, "save some six hundred in the district +and visitas of Nauhan, who received baptism during the few years in +which the Society of Jesus had charge of them." + +Murillo Velarde, S.J., states in his _Historia de Philipinas_ (Manila, +1749), fol. 52, that "in 1631 the cura of Mindoro, who was a secular +priest, ceded that ministry to the Society;... the superior lived at +Nauhan in Mindoro, and Ours undertook to preach to and convert the +Manguianes, heathen Indians of that island." On fol. 63, verso, and +folio 64 he gives some account of these labors, and of the customs +of these people, under the date 1633. + +Sawyer (_Inhabitants of the Philippines,_ p. 206) describes the +Manguianes as "probably a hybrid Negrito-Visaya race." He mentions +three varieties of these people, of whom "those residing near the +western coast are much whiter, with lighter hair and full beards;" +those of the southern part show evident signs of Chinese blood; +and those in the center are darker and less intelligent. He praises +the morality and honesty of the Manguianes, as also does Worcester +(_Philippine Islands,_ p. 413). + +[77] Fray Diego Mojica was born of noble parents in a Castilian town, +and took the Augustinian habit in Salamanca. After living for some +years in Mexico, he went (1573) to the Philippines, where he was sent +to Mindoro. He was the first prior of the Convent of Santa Maria de +Gracia in 1575; twice definitor; minister of Tondo and Batangas; +prior of Pasig in 1578; preacher and confessor to the Spaniards +in 1580; president of the provincial chapter in 1581. He died in +1584. Extremely modest by nature, he never sought or wished preferment. + +[78] Fray Alonso Gutierrez professed in the province of Castilla, and +was a conventual in Cebu in 1573. He ministered to Halaud and Oton +successively in 1576 and 1577; was preacher and confessor in 1581; +minister at Paranaque in 1584, at Tabucao in 1584, at Pasig in 1586, +and at Tondo in 1587. In the last-named year he was definitor and +lecturer, and in 1590 president of the chapter, dying at Manila in +1605. See Perez's _Catalogo,_ p. 15. + +[79] Fray Juan Gallegos took his vows at the convent at Mexico +about 1566. Upon his arrival at the islands, he became a conventual +at Lubao. He was first minister to Bay in 1578, and to Tabucao in +1581. He died while definitor, at the end of 1581. _Ibid_., p. 15. + +[80] Fray Francisco Manrique professed at Valladolid, and on his +arrival at the islands relieved Father Rada (September 11, 1575) of +the ministry at Oton. He was afterward definitor and missionary at +Lubao (1576); rector provincial in 1577; first minister to Candaba in +1579; prior of Manila, 1575, 1578, 1581, and 1584; definitor, 1581; +vicar-provincial, 1582; and first prior of Macao, 1587. His death +must have occurred in 1588, as his name does not appear after that +in the provincial records. _Ibid_. p. 16. + +[81] Fray Sebastian Molina, after his arrival at the islands, became +first minister to Macabebe in 1575. He died in September of the +following year. _Ibid_., p. 16. + +[82] Fray Alonso Heredero was an austere religious, and was three +times minister at Macabebe (1576, 1578, and 1581). He was definitor +and minister at Calumpit in 1584, and again definitor and minister +at Mejico in 1590. He died in the latter town in 1591. _Ibid_., p. 16. + +[83] The viceroy of Nueva Espana at this time was Martin Enriquez de +Almansa; he arrived in the City of Mexico November 5, 1568, and held +his office until October, 1580, when he was succeeded by the Conde +de la Coruna. + +[84] The Franciscans were in charge of these islands in 1893.--_Coco_. + +[85] The "Christian Doctrine" of Cardinal Bellarmino; see _Vol_. XVII, +p. 70, and note. + +[86] Only the name of Parian remains today; and of the church not +even the ruins.--_Coco_. + +[87] San Agustin (_Conquistas_ p. 381) says that the Augustinian +mission to the Chinese was established in the Tondo convent in 1581, +and placed under the special charge of Fray Diego Munoz. Later a suit +arose between the Augustinians and Dominicans (_Conquistas_, p. 533) +as to the administration of the Chinese at Baybay. It was settled in +1612, on condition of the two orders celebrating alternately Corpus +Christi day. + +[88] Ecclesiastes xi, 30.--_Coco_. + +[89] See Gonzalez de Mendoza's _Historia de la gran China_ (1586), +for a relation of this journey. Part of it may be found in _Vol_. VI +of this series, pp. 114-125. + +[90] This is evidently the _Historia de la gran China_ by Gonzalez +de Mendoza. + +[91] In Tagal, _molave_.--_Coco_. + +[92] Bulacan in the census preceding 1893 had a population of +13,659.--_Coco_. + +Bulletin No. 1 gives Bulacan 11,589 civilized inhabitants. + +[93] The Rio Grande of Pampanga. + +[94] In 1893, the inhabitants numbered 15,156, with a convent and +church of solid masonry.--_Coco_. + +Bulletin No. 1 makes the present civilized population 11,783. + +[95] In 1893 Macabebe had 19,801 inhabitants, and a stone church +and convent.--_Coco_. + +The civilized population now (see Bulletin No. 1, _ut supra_) +is 14,405. + +[96] The population of the province of Pampanga is reported for +five different years as follows: 1818, 106,381; 1840, 152,232; +1850, 156,272; 1870, 203,137 (these four including Tarlac); 1887, +223,902. The estimate of the _U.S. Gazetteer of the Philippine +Islands_, from which these numbers are taken, figures a population +of 223,922 for 1901. Bulletin No. 1 (_ut supra_) reports 223,754 for +1903, of whom 222,656 are civilized, and 1,098 wild. + +[97] The attitude of the great Augustinian Philippine writer, San +Agustin, and in general the friars of the last century of the Spanish +regime, toward the native is well shown in the following note by the +Spanish editor, Father Coco: "The Indians have not changed in this +regard. Since they have not lost their disposition they preserve +with it their vices. If the father does not interest himself in the +regulation of bridges, roads, the maintenance of the children at +school, etc., nothing useful is done. In this interest and zeal, the +father must not relax one instant, for the very moment in which the +vigilance of the father rests, little by little all the good that he +has done in the village disappears. The greater number of the Ilocan +plains are crossed by irrigation canals, brought to completion by the +initiative of the fathers, and preserved until now by the watchfulness +of the same persons. All this, as is natural, brings endless troubles +and not small sorrow to the parish priest." + +[98] Psalms xxxv, 7.--_Coco_. + +[99] The author might have added something more, namely, that from +the little that is enjoyed from the Spanish race, it is becoming so +degenerate in the course of time that it is losing completely even the +characteristic traces of its origin. It is giving the "leap backward," +as we say here in common parlance.--_Coco_. + +[100] The original is _bozales_, which is a term applied to negroes +lately imported, or to inhabitants of the less polished provinces of +Spain, newly arrived in Madrid. + +[101] Dative of _agibilis_, a late Latin word coined from _agere_; +meaning "what can be done or accomplished." + +[102] _Visitas_ in the Philippines are the distant suburbs of a +village. They generally have their chapel and patron saint, and +the chapel is called _visita_. The term has been extended to the +suburbs. Many of the _visitas_ are distant from the mother village +four or six hours by horse, along impassable roads which cause great +annoyances to the parish priests.--_Coco_. + +[103] Odes, book iv, 24, 11. 30, 31. William Coutts in his translation +of Horace (New York and Bombay, 1898) renders this passage as follows: +"We hate virtue when safe amongst us, but seek for it when removed +from our eyes, envious alike." + +[104] Still today [1893], thanks to God, one may sleep in the convents +with doors unlocked, without the slightest fear. However, now they +are generally locked in the province of Manila.--_Coco_. + +[105] Paul's first Epistle to the Corinthians iv, 9.--_Coco_. + +[106] Job iii, 3. + +[107] Much more might be said about these points, which Father Medina +treats with as much skill as delicacy.... Not to go into certain +details, wearisome beyond measure, I shall only say, that even now +were it not for the direct intervention of the Spanish priest in +the collection of the cedula or tribute, the treasury would lose +some hundreds of thousands of pesos. Many are the parish priests, +especially in the Bisayas, who oblige the heads of barangay to deliver +at the convent the result of the collection; for if they did not do so, +not one-half of what the town should furnish would be deposited in the +royal treasury. While the writer of these lines was in a certain town +of Iloilo a few years ago, the parish priest had in his convent the +sum of 15,000 pesos, belonging to the collection of the tribute. He +petitioned the corresponding authority for an armed force to conduct +the revenues of the state safely to the royal treasury. That authority +considered it suitable to answer him that it was not part of the +duty of the military force to act as a custodian for the conveyance +of the state revenue....--_Coco_. + +[108] Fray Juan de Villamayor took his vows in the Augustinian convent +of Toledo, and was conventual and prior of Halaud in 1590 and 1593 +respectively. He ministered at Aclan in 1596, at Jaro in 1598, at +Sibucao in 1599, at Potol in 1603, and finally at Aclan, 1605-1608, +where he died the latter year. See Perez's _Catalogo_, p. 38. + +[109] The lay brother Fray Andres Garcia was assistant for some years +at the mission at Aclan. He died in 1623. See Perez's _Catalogo_, +p. 75. + +[110] The island of Bantayan (province of Cebu) has now a population +of 18,325, all civilized. See Bulletin No. I, _ut supra._ + +[111] And of pearls.--_Coco_. + +[112] Antique; in 1893 it was a province with twenty-one +villages and a population of 119,322, under the charge of sixteen +Augustinians.--_Coco_. + +Its present population is 134,166, of whom 131,245 are civilized and +2,921 wild. The reports of population for several other years are as +follows: 1818, 50,597; 1840, 48,333; 1850, 84,570; 1870, 108,855; +1887, 115,434. See Bulletin No. 1 (_ut supra_) and _U.S. Gazetteer +of the Philippine Islands._ + +[113] Father Fray Nicolas Melo, or Moran, Portuguese by birth, and +the lay-brother Fray Nicolas de San Agustin, a Japanese, were sent +on an important commission to Europe in 1597. They went to Malacca, +and thence to Goa--where, not finding facilities to embark, they +determined to make the journey by land. They journeyed toward Persia, +in company with other Augustinian religious, who were going to our +missions in that empire. Thence they went to Moscow, where Father +Melo comforted the persecuted Catholics (to whom he administered +the holy sacraments), and tried to convert the Calvinist heretics, +for which reason they were imprisoned and suffered penalties without +number. When they reached Nisna, near the Caspian Sea, brother Fray +Nicolas de San Agustin was beheaded on the thirtieth of November, +1611, for refusing to apostatize from the holy Catholic faith. Father +Nicolas Melo was burned alive in Astrakan, together with Princess +Barbara Noski, a tertiary of our order, on the first of November, +1616.--_Coco_. + +Father Melo was born of a noble family in Corinchan, Portugal. Going +to Mexico at an early age, he took the Augustinian habit in the +convent of Puebla de los Angeles, June 28, 1578. After becoming a +priest he went to the Philippines, where he learned the Tagal and +Bisayan tongues, and ministered at Aclan, Cagayancilo, Batangas, +and Tanauan. See Perez's _Catalogo,_ p. 27. + +The lay-brother, Fray Nicolas de San Agustin, a Japanese, converted +by the above, professed in the Manila convent in 1594. Ibid., p. 69. + +[114] In 1893 Malolos had 14,635 inhabitants, without reckoning +the villages of Barasoain and Santa Isabel, with 9,442 and 7,174 +inhabitants respectively. The three villages, especially Malolos, +had at the above date beautiful churches and convents of solid +masonry.--_Coco_. + +The present civilized population of Malolos (see Bulletin No. 1, _ut +supra_) is 12,575; Barasoain, 8,047; and of Santa Isabel, 6,403. The +first named is the capital of Bulacan province. + +[115] Now (1893) the parish of Hagonoy has in charge 19,755 people, +and has a very large stone church and convent.--_Coco_. + +Its present civilized population (see Bulletin No. 1, _ut supra_) +is 21,304. + +[116] This town had 16,867 inhabitants in 1893.--_Coco_. It now has +13,469 civilized inhabitants according to the latest census. See +Bulletin No. 1, _ut supra._ + +[117] _Pedaneo_ or _gobernadorcilio_, as he is called in the +country.--_Coco_. + +[118] Matthew x, 22.--_Coco_. + +[119] "The iniquity of thy sister was pride, abundance, and sloth." + +[120] In regard to what is mentioned of the character and nature of +the Indian, all the authors, native and foreign, whom I have read are +unanimous in this, with the exception of Father Delgado, S.J., who for +reasons unknown to me, although not difficult to infer, dissents from +the others. See the attempt at refutation (!) which the above father, +with more good will than success, has tried to make of the so well +known letter of Father Gaspar de San Agustin--a letter which in my +opinion should never have been published (as in fact it was published +in the first volume of this "Biblioteca," p. 273, _et seq._). No +Spaniard or foreigner who has lived for some time in the islands +and has had intercourse with the natives will agree with what Father +Delgado asserts, but which is so opposed to the facts. To speak truly +is not to offend, but to depart from the truth is injustice; and in the +present case, he who writes thus would merit another epithet.--_Coco_. + +The letter mentioned in the preceding paragraph will be published +later in this series. + +[121] That is, the vicar-provincial and definitors, who governed +the province.--_Coco_. + +[122] This letter is given in full by Gaspar de San Agustin in his +_Conquistas_, pp. 395-409.--_Coco_. + +This was the father master, Fray Alonso de la Vera-Cruz, one of those +in Mexico to whom the bishop wrote. See San Agustin, _ut supra_, +p. 395. + +[123] Fray Diego Alvarez was master of novices in the Manila convent +in 1580, and minister at Taal in 1581, and at Bulacan in 1582. He +was elected prior provincial in 1584, and definitor and minister at +Taguig in the provincial chapter of 1587. In 1590 he took charge of +the Manila priorate and was elected provincial for the second time +in 1593. He died in the convent of San Pablo in Manila, in 1601. See +Perez's _Catalogo_, p. 20. + +[124] Ecclesiasticus xix, 1. + +[125] The city of Vigan is not now [1893] in so poor a state as Father +Medina says. It is well inhabited, and presents a good appearance, +having many stone edifices.--_Coco_. + +It is the capital of the province of Ilocos Sur, and has a civilized +population of 14,945 (See _U.S. Gazetteer of the Philippine Islands_ +and Bulletin No. 1, _ut supra_); and from its position on the railroad +from Manila it is a town of importance. + +[126] Now [1893] called Balaoang, and with 8,260 inhabitants.--_Coco_. + +Balaoang is now in the province of La Union, and has a civilized +population of 10,008. See _ut supra._ + +[127] In 1893 the three provinces of La Union and South and North +Ilocos had, in the lowlands, forty-two villages with a total population +of 349,205; and in the mountains fifteen missions in Abra, Lepanto, +and Benguet, with a population of 43,044, or a total of 392,249. All +were under charge of the Augustinians.--_Coco_. + +Ilocos Norte now contains 178,995 (2,210 wild) inhabitants, Ilocos +Sur, 187,411 (13,611 wild); and La Union, 137,839 (10,050 wild). The +province of Abra contains 51,860 (14,037 wild) inhabitants; Benguet, +22,745 (21,828 wild); and Lepanto-Bontoc, 72,750 (70,283 wild). See +Bulletin No. 1, _ut supra_. + +[128] Fray Francisco Mercado took his vows in the Manila convent in +1611. He was a missionary at Laoag (1614, 1626, 1635) and Batac (1620, +1641), provisor of the bishop of Nueva Segovia (1623), and definitor +(1632). He gave generous alms to the province from his own funds, +showing special favor to the convents of Guadalupe and Bantay. In +the latter he acquired a fine estate, with the intention of building +a hospital for the Ilocan friars; and at that convent he collected +a good library, which was later removed to Manila. He died at Batac +in 1642. See Perez's _Catalogo_, p. 194. + +[129] "Ilaoag" is the capital of the province of Ilocos Norte and +is today called Laoag. It has a civilised population of 34,454. See +_U.S. Gazetteer of the Philippine Islands_, and Bulletin No. 1, +_ut supra_. + +[130] It does not exist now. Its demolition was ordered by the general +government, after Manila was evacuated by the English, who used it +as a fort, as they likewise did the convent of the Recollects, in +the siege of Manila in 1763.--_Coco_. + +[131] Ermita has a present population of 12,246. It is the seat of the +observatory of Manila, and of the normal school. See Bulletin No. 1, +_ut supra_; and _U.S. Gazetteer of the Philippine Islands_, p. 189. + +[132] Now [1893] this is in charge of the Recollects.--_Coco_. + +[133] Spanish, _ni hay padre para hijo, ni hijo para padre_--"there +is neither father for child, nor child for father." + +[134] Now [1893] there are 1,805 inhabitants; and the village +of Pineda, with 8,196 inhabitants, was separated from it. The +Virgin de los Remedios [i.e., "of the remedies"] is still highly +reverenced.--_Coco_. + +Malate has now (see Bulletin No. 1, _ut supra_) a population of 8,855. + +[135] In 1893 Tanauan had a fine stone church with three naves and +a convent.--_Coco_. + +See _ante_, note 58. + +[136] The Order ceded it to the Franciscans.--Coco. + +[137] Fray Hernando Cabrera took his vows at Cordova in 1601. Upon +going to the Philippines he filled the following positions: sub-prior +at Manila, 1609; missionary at Batangas, 1611; at Taal, 1613; at +Paranaque, 1614; at San Pablo de los Montes, 1618, 1626, and 1629, +where his efforts resulted in an excellent and well equipped church +and convent; definitor, examiner, and definitor-general. He died at +sea in 1630, while on his way to Nueva Espana. See Perez's _Catalogo_, +pp. 78, 79. + +[138] Fray Diego Munoz was born in the town of Zafra, of the province +of Badajoz, and took his vows in the Augustinian convent of Mexico +in 1571. He was renowned for both his learning and his virtues, +and on his arrival at the Philippines in 1578 was given the chair +of sacred theology in the convent of San Pablo at Manila. He was the +first commissary of the Holy Inquisition in the islands; missionary +at Pasig and Malolos in 1580 and 1584 respectively, and of the Tondo +Sangleys in 1581; definitor in 1584; provincial in 1587, when it was +necessary to obtain dispensation from Rome, as he had not reached the +required age. During his term as provincial the regulations of the +order were received, and the present Manila convent begun. He died +in 1594, leaving sermons in Castilian and Tagal, one volume each. See +Perez's _Catalogo_, p. 22. + +[139] The last census before 1893 gave Apalit 11,563 +inhabitants.--_Coco_. + +Bulletin No. 1 (_ut supra_) shows the present civilized population +to be 12,206. + +[140] Fray Juan Quinones was born at Sevilla about 1551 of a +noble family. He studied in the university of Mexico, and took the +habit in that city in 1575. He went to the Philippines in 1577, +where he threw himself fervently into the missionary work. In 1578 +he was named minister to Bay and extended his efforts to Taal and +Pasig. He was definitor in 1581 and 1587; prior of Manila in 1586, +and vicar-provincial in 1587, dying that same year at the convent of +San Pablo in Manila. See Perez's _Catalogo_, p. 19. + +[141] This is the date of the text, and if true, the date of the +title-page (1630) must be either a misprint or an equivocation on the +part of the author. Or this instance and the several others similar +to it may have been added by Medina to his manuscript after he had +completed it to the date of the title-page; or they may be due to a +later hand. + +[142] In 1893 there were 12,858 inhabitants.--_Coco_. The present +civilized population of Arayat is 12,904. See Bulletin No. 1, +_ut supra._ + +[143] Information regarding this father is very slight. He was admitted +as confessor to the Spaniards, as appears by an Augustinian record of +November 12, 1602 after having been examined, and having presented +his licenses to confess, which had been given him in Goa. In 1604, +he returned to be approved. See Perez's _Catalogo_, p. 185. + +[144] In 1893, one of the best towns in Iloilo, with a population +of 15,842.--_Coco_. + +Bulletin No. 1 (_ut supra_) gives the civilized population for 1903 +as 20,964. + +[145] Now Dingle, and not connected with Pototan. It has a population +of 9,769.--_Coco_. + +Also in Iloilo province and with a present civilized population of +12,129. See Bulletin No. 1, _ut supra._ + +[146] Spanish, _lamentado_; thus in printed text, but this word seems +of dubious accuracy. + +[147] It now has [1893] a beautiful stone church, and a population +of 5,281. Its modern name is Duenas.--_Coco_. + +Also situated in the province of Iloilo, with a present civilized +population of 6,700. See Bulletin No. 1, _ut supra._ + +[148] This is a very important town in Iloilo. In 1893 it had 15,151 +inhabitants. It had a beautiful stone church, built very high, and +in the form of a Greek cross, crowned with a fine cupola.--_Coco_. + +Its present civilized population is 14,464. See Bulletin No. 1, +_ut supra._ + +[149] Ibahay in the district of Aclan, of Capiz Province--_Coco_. + +[150] This is Fray Alonso Baraona, a native of Quintanario, in the +province of Burgos. He took his vows in the convent of that city in +1596. He became prior of Santo Nino in 1607, and was missionary at +Dumangas in 1608, Batan in 1609, Jaro in 1610, Aclan in 1613, and +Passi in 1614. He was definitor and prior provincial in 1617, and +missionary at Bay in 1633. His death occurred in 1626. See Perez's +_Catalogo_, p. 77. + +[151] In 1893 it had 7,623 inhabitants.--_Coco_. + +The civilized population in 1903 was 8,503. It is in the province of +llocos Sur. See Bulletin No. 1, _ut supra._ + +[152] In 1893, a parish chart showed 12,180 inhabitants.--_Coco_. + +Also in llocos Sur, and with a civilized population of 18,828. See +Bulletin No. 1, _ut supra._ + +[153] Dingras with 11,113 inhabitants in 1893.--_Coco_. + +The present civilized population is 15,792. This village is situated +in the province of Ilocos Norte. Narvacan (the Nalbacan of the text), +in Ilocos Sur, has a present civilized population of 19,575. See +Bulletin No. 1, _ut supra_. + +[154] Caruya or Caruyan, now Bigaa was in 1893 a parish, as was +also Quingua, in the province of Bulacan. They had populations in +1893 of 7,108 and 7,787 respectively, and good stone churches and +convents.--_Coco_. + +These two villages have present civilized populations of 8,000 and +7,229, respectively. See Bulletin No. 1, _ut supra._ + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898, +Volume XXIII, 1629-30, by Various + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS *** + +***** This file should be named 16451.txt or 16451.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/6/4/5/16451/ + +Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Distributed Proofreaders Team + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |